Home

Remark Office OMR 8 User's Guide

1. Your email message is automatically sent If delivery problems occur they are routed to the address listed in the From box of the email message this may depend on how your SMTP server is configured to handle message failures 8 9 Send Wizard The Remark Office OMR Send Wizard allows you to send files via FTP file transfer protocol or email As opposed to the Email option in Remark Office OMR the Send Wizard provides more advanced tools for creating profiles so that data and reports can be automatically sent to other destinations Send Wizard configurations can be utilized from the Automation Wizard when automating Remark Office OMR functions Send Wizard configuration files can be set up ahead of time to look for files in directories and then either send them to an FTP site or email them For example you could set up an Automation Wizard file that does the following Opens a form template scans forms saves the data to a file grades the data and then launches a Send Wizard file to move the grades to an FTP server or send a report via email If you wish to use email with the Send Wizard you must have an SMTP simple mail transfer protocol server set up independently of Remark Office OMR You will need to obtain the settings from your network email administrator for that SMTP server and enter them into the Remark software When setting up the Send Wizard profile you can send files via FTP and or email For the purposes of this docum
2. cece ceeee eee eee eee ee eee ee ea ees 248 8 3 3 Cutting Copying Pasting and Deleting 249 8 3 4 Resizing Inserting and Deleting ROWS seeeeeeees 177 8 3 5 Freezing Columns and ROWS cceeeeee eee testes eee eaees 251 8 3 6 Using Find and Replace ccececeeee eee ee teat ee eee eeeeaees 252 8 4 Sorting Grid COlUMNS iias AEE ine ee eee eee nena eens teeta ea ees 254 8 5 Spell Checker sicy 0 eats ATA ee a a ak ea es 255 8 6 Saving Dafarn enana sue coed dices oad hae Oecd bles ONNE Oi aaa 256 8 6 1 Advanced Saving Options ccceeceee eee eee tent ee en ees 261 8 6 2 Remark Office Archive Format seceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 186 816 3 CUStOM FOMA wes ecesreccet ace elag eee edegeseedetunieched wii eetecs 265 8 6 4 Database Update Format cccccccecceseeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeneenas 268 8 6 5 Save All Dat iiccii cieiedeteis cored tees ceri EEA ENUA ANTARE EANA 191 8 6 6 Save Data Builder 0 cece cee cece cece eee teeta eee eee e nena ees 272 8 7 Printing Data weecada this deine nceg etd cegeudeus na tuewaisd ENEA ANEA ERA EEE ERATES 274 8 8 Emailing Data tei riea aea NA Aa EAA AEEA Meade a aan 275 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 8 8 1 Email Overview and Set UP ssssssssssssssrssrssssssresrrerrren 275 8 8 2 Using Email to Send Data Files cceeeeeeee eee ee eens 277 8 9 Send Wizard sssi savas cocci ieaiaia AETA aE AE AEA AE
3. automatically based on your last action Insert Region Options 2 Click the Define regions link Hig Insert OMR region 3 Select the link corresponding to the type of region you we would like to insert Insert OMR region Insert a Hest ee eo Image region Insert Barcode region Insert OCR aaa Region The new region is inserted after the currently oc Taart Barcode regon selected node in the tree view Define an Barcode region on the page 4 Place the crosshair in the top left corner of the region hold down the left mouse button and drag a box to the lower right hand corner of the region eae Go back to the Form Template Options 5 Release the mouse button Insert OCR region Define an OCR region on the page The Region Properties box appears Region types and properties are explained in the following sections 6 2 5 OMR Optical Mark Recognition Regions An OMR region is an area on the form containing OMR bubbles checkboxes or some other complete shape The respondent darkens the marks that correspond with his or her answer choice Each OMR region contains a specific number of rows and columns A single OMR region can contain one or more questions When an OMR region is created you must specify certain properties pertaining to the region including the size of the region the type of region and what output Remark Office OMR should generate These topics are covered in the following sections 6 2 5 a OMR Region Types
4. 16 Click the Next button to continue Working with Your Data 17 On the FTP Server settings window tell Remark Office OMR about your FTP server If you have run the Send Wizard previously and set up an FTP site you can select it from the FTP sites drop down list If you do not have any sites listed set one up by continuing with the following steps The following options are available when setting up an FTP server Basic Tab Option Server Address Target Directory Username Password Transfer Type File Exists Action Advanced Tab Option Restrict upload file size Description This is the internet address of the FTP server If you enter a DNS name for the server e g ftp myftpsite com then the prefix ftp is required If you enter an IP address e g ftp 12 34 56 78 then the prefix ftp is optional e g just enter 12 34 56 78 You can optionally specify a target directory on the FTP server The target directory holds the file once it is transferred to the server Note No verification is performed to check that the directory path you enter is valid on the server To verify connectivity to the server use Test Connectivity on the FTP Basic screen This is the username that is required for FTP login on the FTP server The person responsible for your FTP server should be able to provide this information to you This is the password that is required for FTP login on
5. Athletics collegiate Athletics intramural Chess Team Debate Team o0 o0 o Marching Band Data Output Activities 01010 62 Using the Template Editor Rank Region A rank region designation is used for multiple choice questions where each response or response set can only be used one time For example on a voting ballot you may be asked to put a list of candidates in order Using the Rank question type allows you to limit how many times each answer choice can be selected Example 1 Please rank the following ice cream flavors from most favorite 1 to least favorite 3 Form 1 2 3 Chocolate e O O Vanilla O O Strawberry O e O Data Output 1 2 3 Chocolate Strawberry Vanilla Example 2 Please vote for President Vice President and Secretary Form Pres VP Sec John Doe r O O Joe Garcia O O C Ron Jackson O O O Mary White O O O Lisa Brown O O Jane Doe O O O Marty Donovan O O O Data Output Pres VP Sec John Doe Lisa Brown Joe Garcia 63 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 64 6 2 5 b Region Orientation An OMR region can be oriented in columns or rows The region orientation property in the form template determines how the region is positioned on the form by column or by row Column Regions oriented by column contain question s that are positioned on the form in columns it can be one column or several columns Example
6. Tip It is very important that you transfer the license before you attempt to install it elsewhere Keep the license transfer in mind if you are getting a new computer are getting ready to reformat your computer or are transferring use of the software to another person In all of these cases you should transfer the license before taking any further action Note If you need to uninstall and reinstall the software on the same computer e g for installation issues you may do so without transferring the license To transfer a license 1 Select the Help menu and then click Transfer License Transfer Ay Li Cc e n Ss e Heres trarefor alawe off active authorized license for this software to be moved 2 A warning message appears that you should This wil alow youto transfer ths copy of the software to another computer read very carefully It states that you are not A amet cammecion ners toprosed Ne be able to install the software on this system A ino ong be sbie to nthe somere on themacine nn T again and that you need an Internet Your not be able to transfer the software lense back to this machine in the connection to continue You need to agree to the terms before proceeding Please be sure that you understand these warnings before continuing with the license transfer process 3 Click the Continue button Z 1 have read and understood the warnings above and Iagree to proceed 4 The License Key Transfer screen appears aa e
7. ccceeceee eee eee eee eee e neta e 102 6 6 Editing an Existing Form Template c ecceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeaees 103 6 6 1 Editing OMR ReGiONS cceeeeee cette eect teeta teeta teeta ees 103 6 7 Template Editor Preferences ssssessesrsssssssessenssrnerrorreernnrreneas 105 6 7 1 General PreferenCes cccccssceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeegeesaetsaeeaaes 105 6 7 2 OMR Region Preferences cceeeeeeeeeee test eats eee eeeeaees 106 6 7 3 Image Region Preferences ceceeeeeee eee ee testes teeta ees 109 6 7 4 Barcode Region Preferences ccceeeeeeeeeee eee e eee eeeaees 111 6 7 5 OCR Region Preferences ccceeeeceee eee eeeeee test eeeeeeaees 112 Processing Forms 115 TA OVERVIEW iste vedas EE EAA abet EE vs Seleeh tid da vacated EErEE ALERS 115 7 2 Opening a Form Template ccccceceeee sees ce eeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaenes 115 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard ecseeeeeeeee estes eee eaees 117 7 3 1 Scanning Forms with the Read Wizard secsec 117 7 3 1 a Scanning Using Default Settings Easy Scan 121 7 3 2 Processing Image Files with the Read Wizard 6 122 724 TIMAGE Viewer ea ednccs este tenn dees day eetags wade EEA AIEA E KESAEN RS ELETA EENE 126 7 9 Graph Viewer icici ris dade a NE ETA EEE elias ene 127 7 6 REVIEWING EXCEPtlONS wesc cies iicese ceereitinnccesenedenencreenewebe teteetenes cee 128 7 6 1 Reviewing Exceptions by Modifying Individual Cells 131 7 6 2 U
8. modify the flagged word and then choose Grammar Spelling Change or Change All to make the aoe modification You may also choose Add to add Ignore Al the word to your dictionary so that it is not add flagged again Alternatively you may choose a Ignore or Ignore All to keep the word as is Change all and if choosing Ignore All not have it flagged Cancel again during this search Choose Cancel to stop the Spell Checker 4 When the Spell Checker is finished searching the grid it alerts you that it is complete Click the OK button to return to the main Spell Checker window 5 Click the Finished button to complete the Spell Checker process 8 6 Saving Data You can save the data in the data grid to dozens of different file formats The Remark file format was specifically designed to optimize the data storage process in the Remark Office OMR software Tip When working with data in Remark Office OMR use the Remark file format RMK This is the only format that preserves the link between the data and the corresponding images as well as exception colors Export data to other formats after you have collected and cleaned all of your data When saving data you have the option of using Save Data or Save Data As The Save Data option can be used to save a data set for the first time or to overwrite the current data set The Save Data As option allows you to save the current data set with new parameters e g new file nam
9. the selected node Page Yellow OMR Green Image Blue Barcode Orange OCR Purple 29 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 30 Tool Menu Page Menu Pull Function or Region Down Item ag Region Append Adds a region to another region linking ca Linked them into one question This feature is Region used for regions that have text or lines separating the answer choices and the OMR box cannot be drawn around all of the marks together ag Region Link Links multiple regions together so that Regions they are considered one question agi Region Break Separates a linked region into individual Region Link regions Region Auto Align Allows you to auto align the selected page Page to a new image This feature is useful when you need to rescan the form due to form changes skew etc e g when using the Reset Images feature Page amp Region Properties Shows the properties for the page or a 3 5 6 Help Menu region When you have questions about the use of Remark Office OMR or about a specific menu or command look in the help file Note Help is context sensitive Press F1 while any Remark Office OMR window is active and help text appropriate to that window displays whenever possible Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item Q Contents Displays the contents of the Remark Office OMR help S file Tutorials Displays a folder containing the Remark Office OMR tutorials in PDF format Documentati
10. 52 6 2 2 REGION TYPES ver a coniies AEA STADER Hanes aAA OEA eia 52 6 2 3 Beginning the Form Template ccceeeeeeee testes teens 53 6 2 4 Creating Regi n Spissen oein eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eae 56 Contents 6 2 5 OMR Optical Mark Recognition Regions sesser 58 6 2 5 a OMR Region TYPES ceeceeeese eee ee teense enneeees 58 6 2 5 b Region Orientation ecceee eee eee ee eee eens 64 6 2 6 Defining the OMR ReGiON sceceeee eects eee e teens teeta ees 64 6 2 7 Linking OMR ReGIONS ceceee eee e eee eee e ee eee eee ee teeta ees 67 6 2 8 OMR Region Colors Region Positioning eseeeeees 69 6 2 9 IMAGE REGIONS iisskossen dnia aa naia 70 6 2 10 Barcode Reg OnS ssssssssrrsrssrrrrrnurrrrrrnusrerrnnrnrerrnrns 75 6 2 11 OCR Optical Character Recognition Regions 77 6 3 Advanced Region Options ccc cceeceee eee eee eee ee eee eee teste ea ees 79 6 3 1 Region Item PropertieS cccceeceeee cece eee eee ence e eee eeees 79 6 3 16 TES SENG Sinipa teeing dose tees ebaeere es 79 6 3 1 b Survey SettingS cece ennak eee teeta es 81 6 3 1 c Special Note for Image Regions 5 81 6 3 1 d Analysis Respondent ID cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 82 6 3 1 e Recognition Threshold cceeeeeeee ener ees 82 6 3 1 f Blank Multiple and Duplicate Exception Handling 83 6 3 1 g Mark Discrimination ceeceeeeeeee eee e
11. 6100 6104 Error importing specified file format Incompatible data encountered during the conversion 233 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Class Category Error 6105 Error Text The data contained in the data file do not correspond to your form template file The data were truncated The data file contains more grid columns than the current template grid Make sure you have selected the correct form template and data file 6106 6108 Error importing SPSS SAV file format Note that SPSS reformats data when saving consequently data saved as compressed in SPSS may not import back into Remark Office OMR You must uncompress the data within SPSS before opening it in Remark Office OMR 6109 6110 7000 Database 7000 Memory Errors 7001 Error importing the Fixed SDF format file The application doesn t have enough memory or resources to complete the selected database operation Close other applications files and windows to free up more memory or restart Windows Ensure that your computer meets the minimum system requirements You have reached the limit on the number of files that can be opened at one time Close one or more files and then try the operation again 7002 You have reached the limit on the number of tables and or databases that can be opened at one time Close one or more tables and then try the operation again 7003 The database has reached its maximum size To
12. There are seven types of OMR regions The following section describes each type in full detail and includes examples of each style The examples include the region as it looks on the printed form as well as how a selected response might appear in the data grid when you are processing forms Multiple Region A Multiple region designation is used for multiple choice style questions These questions can allow a single response or multiple responses One Multiple region may contain more than one question 58 Using the Template Editor Example 1 Form Data Output Gender Gender Female Female O Male Example 2 Form Data Output Questioni Question2 Question3 Question 1 A B C Question 2 Question 3 Grid Region A Grid region designation is used for questions where the output from the rows and columns represents one piece of data The respondent typically fills in several bubbles that make up one response e g student ID numbers names social security numbers Example Form Identification Number O 1 2 3 4 5 6 e0000 00 0000000 O ODOO Q 0000000 00006000 0000000 000000 0000000 O00000 00 59 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 60 Data Output Id Number 0123456 List Region A List region designation is used for regions that contain multiple choice style questions but the response bubbles are not contained in a single row
13. To create a batch you create form templates for the batch header form s and the form you wish to process with that batch header form called a primary form template You can use multiple batch header forms but only a single primary form template You then combine these form templates into a batch file Both forms must have unique Page IDs on them Remark Office OMR uses the page IDs to understand when a batch header form is being read versus a regular form To use batch header forms 1 Create a form template for the form you wish to process as a batch header form Ensure the form has a Page ID See Chapter 6 for further information about creating form templates 2 Create a form template for the form you wish to process along with the batch header form Ensure the form has a unique Page ID See Chapter 6 for further information about creating form templates 3 Inthe Remark Office OMR Data Center select the File menu and then click Batch 9 Lookin E Batch Headers Wizard Alternatively select the Batch Wizard link from the Task Pane 4 Inthe Batch Wizard Step 1 window select the form template that is being used as the primary form template not the header form This is the form template Creal a Oe OW eon Sonoros Pa eaa e Donor that corresponds to the form you wish to process after each batch header form Click C the Add File s button to add the form template to the Primary Form Template Batch Wizard Step
14. When you return to the Scanner Properties window there are several options which are summarized in the following table Content Area TWAIN Source TWAIN Source Option List of scanners Use legacy driver Function Choose your scanner from the drop down list Note that your scanner may need to be connected and turned on in order to be visible in the list If you have two options listed for your scanner and one begins with WIA choose the one that does not begin with WIA WIA is a built in Windows scanner driver The second listing is most likely that offered directly from the manufacturer and is therefore recommended Mark the Use legacy driver checkbox if you are using an older TWAIN driver Legacy support allows you to use scanner drivers that support older versions of the TWAIN scanning protocol It is not recommended that you use this option unless you find that your scanner driver is not working correctly Parameters Resolution Use the Resolution setting to set the scanning resolution in Dots Per Inch DPI We recommend scanning at 200 300 DPI This setting is not available if you have chosen to show the scanner s TWAIN interface you select DPI when you scan a page 35 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 36 Content Area Option Color Depth Function Use the Color Depth setting to choose a scanning mode Black White Grayscale or Color For most cases scanning in Black Whit
15. If you are also using Page IDs please see the next section Unrecognized Images 1 of 1 7 9 5 b Reviewing Unrecognized Page ID images If the Data Center cannot automatically match a page to its form template the Unrecognized Image Utility appears There are three possible scenarios when using Page IDs 1 Page IDs alone If using only Page IDs you need to process each respondent s form completely before processing another respondent s form If the pages are out of order for a particular respondent the Page IDs are used to put the data in the correct place If multiple respondents pages are processed together the processing stops and you need to sort the pages by respondent before continuing 2 Page IDs with Form IDs If using Page IDs with Form IDs the software attempts to first recognize the form template for the overall form and then each page of the form If both the form and page are not recognized the Unrecognized Image Utility first appears for the form and then again for the page You need to process each respondent s form completely before processing another respondent s form If the pages are out of order for a particular respondent the Page IDs are used to put the data in the correct place If multiple respondents pages are processed together the processing stops and you need to sort the pages by respondent before continuing 3 Page IDs with Form IDs and Respondent Tracker Respo
16. Image Not Tabulated Barcode Not Tabulated OCR Not Tabulated To set survey options 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane 3 Inthe Survey Settings section mark the radio button for Tabulate this item 4 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view 6 3 1 c Special Note for Image Regions By default Image Regions are not set to grade or tabulate However if you are using the Qualitative Response Codes feature you want to turn on the option to grade or tabulate the region If using the Image Clip and Data Entry region type you see two nodes in the tree view Click the plus sign to expand the nodes You can select the node individually where you want to tabulate or grade 81 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 82 and then turn on the appropriate option under Region item properties 6 3 1 d Analysis Respondent ID You may also set a particular region as an Analysis Respondent ID region so that it can be used as an identifier on reports This feature is useful when you are capturing items such as ID numbers or names When set as an Analysis Respondent ID region the resulting reports show the information captured in the region alongside of the results For example if you administer a test where the students enter their ID number the grade report shows the ID number and then that student s grade
17. Note that the ID value for an OMR region must be one of the labels you defined for the region If using a barcode or OCR click the Recognize button to have Remark Office OMR automatically recognize the region s value This value acts as the identifier for this particular page All form pages that correspond to this form template page must have this value present in order for the software to automatically recognize the page Each page within a single form template must have a different page value 6 If desired mark the checkbox for Insert ID data into the grid during the read process Viewing the ID data captured along with the rest of the data can be useful for verification of processed data 7 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view When you are ready to process forms open the form template containing Page ID regions in the Remark Office OMR Data Center Use the Read Wizard to process your forms Remark Office OMR begins processing the forms searching for the Page ID regions first When it matches a region on the form to the region in the form template it automatically places that data in the correct page order Any regions that are not recognized are flagged for your review or placed in the Unrecognized Images queue Note that if you are not using the Respondent Tracker feature you must process all of the pages belonging to one respondent s form before beginning those of a different 91 Remark
18. Remark Office OMR allows you to save the response scales that you use as labels in your OMR regions or codes in your Image regions that use qualitative response coding When you enter custom labels in the Region Properties window you can save them for later use or to edit existing scales From within the Properties window you only have access to the response scales that fit the region you are defining For example if you have defined an OMR region that has five possible answer choices you only have access to response scales that offer five answer choices Therefore the software allows you to access all of the saved response scales under the Tools menu To view or modify response scales 1 Select the Tools menu and then click Response Scales or click Sas 2 Select a scale to view or modify from the Saved scales drop down list 3 To delete the scale click the Delete button 4 To edit the scale click the Edit button and then type the new information 5 To create a new response scale click the New button provide a Scale name and then enter Scale Properties the possible responses in the Labels grid and Possible Response Scale Properties Aaj g Create modify or delete scales that are used when defining OMR and Image their corresponding numeric values in the regions using qualtative codes Values grid one per line You may also click Sees the down arrow on the New button and choose Poor to Excelent a oee From
19. The following table summarizes how each event works 150 Action Event Read from scanner Read from image files Processing Forms Description If you have a scanner set up in Remark Office OMR you may use this option Your scanner must have an Automatic Document Feeder ADF and this feeder must be capable of telling Remark Office OMR when a page is placed in it some scanners do not have this capability The Data Center polls your scanner for pages at a user specified interval If pages are found they are scanned automatically with the open template s The Data Center stores images of these scanned forms for later correction Note that some computer performance degradation should be expected while a page is being scanned You may have the Data Center process image files from a folder that you specify on your computer or network Supported image files are processed in the order of file creation date This feature allows you to use scanning software that came with just about any input device to scan your pages Then save these scanned images to a folder and the Data Center automatically processes them Important Note About Using Server Mode and Page IDs If you are using Page IDs with Server Mode form processing stops if a Page ID cannot be recognized You need to sort your forms images so that each respondent s form is scanned in its entirety before another form is processed See Section 7 9 2 Auto Page IDs for further in
20. When selecting an item from this list you can also insert text before or after the selected item if desired Auto increment fill value Data Entry Image region only When used in conjunction with Default Fill Remark Office OMR assigns the next value in the range you define to the Image region in sequential order For example you can enter the number 1 as the default fill and then mark the Auto increment fill value checkbox Remark Office OMR automatically places sequential numbers in the Image region during form processing When using a default fill in this fashion you can create the Image region anywhere on the form as a placeholder Attempt to detect the presence of handwriting in the region Link Region to an Existing OMR Region Data Entry Image Use this setting to have Remark Office OMR attempt to determine whether handwriting is in the region For Data Entry Image regions when text is detected during form processing the Image region s cell in the data grid is colored blue For Image Clip Image regions the clip is captured when handwriting is detected and is not captured when handwriting is not detected If you are not using this feature image clips are captured for every Image region Use this setting to link a Data Entry Image region to one of the responses from another OMR region on the page e g an other blank from a multiple choice region only question The Image region is colored blue in
21. You may save a form template at any time It is recommended that you save your form templates as you go in case you are interrupted To save a form template 1 Select the File menu and then click Save or You may also use the Save As function to save the form template under a new name click to save the region definitions H Gravic Course Evaluation omr My Documents 2 In the Save As dialog box enter a file name in the box titled File name 2 3 Choose a directory location in the box titled Save in My Network Se My template omt ave as type Form Template Files omr 4 Click the Save button Form templates can only be saved with a omr file extension The form template images are stored automatically as part of the overall form template file Using the Template Editor 6 6 Editing an Existing Form Template You can edit previously created form templates to add or delete pages or to make changes to the region definitions or page layout Note Changing the structure of a form template after processing a batch of forms can cause compatibility conflicts between the form template and previously saved data files Changes to the number of questions the question order or the output labels will likely invalidate existing data files and Grade Wizard Survey Wizard definition files Form templates from previous versions of the software can be opened in the Remark Office OMR 8 Template
22. character set to use throughout the application Email Choose the desired email client and settings to use FFF change Log Optionally enable logging for all changes to the data Check for Updates Optionally check for software updates when starting the application Preference Option Shade alternate rows to look like Data Grid shade alternate grid rows to look like Update the Image Viewer During Read Operations Selecting this Feature will update the Image Viewer after each new image is processed Update the Graph Viewer During Read Operations Selecting this Feature will update the Graph Viewer after each new image is processed Review Exceptions Auto search the response combo box when typing Play sound on review exceptions startup O Play sound when an exception case is located I clear exceptions after they have been reviewed Other Settings Maximum length for a value in a data grid cell 1024 Replace missing data values with Peas System poll interval during Server Mode secs 5 Description Mark this checkbox to shade every other template grid row Click the paint bucket to choose a shading color Update the Image Viewer During Read Operations Mark this checkbox to have the Image Viewer update with a new form image each time a form is processed The Image Viewer is located beneath the data grid window Using this option could alert you to issues su
23. click the Finish button Click the Back arrow underneath Review Duplicates to return to the full Task Pane 7 14 Software Recognition Settings 160 Out of the box Remark Office OMR comes with the recognition settings that are optimal for a well designed and tested scannable form However circumstances can introduce recognition problems Here are few things that can potentially interfere with proper recognition of your forms e Respondents who do not fill bubbles completely or use light marks cross out responses erase responses or use white out to change responses e Forms that are scanned upside down e Forms that are accidentally scanned with the wrong batch including blank forms e Form images that are compressed or expanded as compared to the original form template image e Forms that are much lighter or darker than the original Remark Office OMR has several recognition settings that can help you compensate for these issues Please note that you may have to try a few adjustments to get the right settings for your particular form Recognition Settings can be either software based or form template based You can access the Recognition Settings in three ways 1 Select Tools Recognition Settings Default Settings or Tools Recognition Settings Template Settings 2 From the Data tab in the left Task Pane click View Recognition Settings 3 From the Read Wizard Step 1 click the Recognition Settings link The Recognition Se
24. created the next time Remark Office OMR is opened Logging changes is covered in greater detail in Section 8 11 To turn on logging 1 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the Tools menu then click Preferences then Change Log 2 Mark the checkbox for Enable Change Logging 3 Enter a password in the Password box Click the Enable button 5 Click the OK button to close the Preferences A From this point forward all changes to the data grid are logged To turn off logging 1 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the Tools menu then click Preferences then Change Log 2 Enter the password that was set when turning on logging in the Password box 3 Click the Disable button 4 Click the OK button to close the Preferences 221 Remark Office OMR User s Guide From this point forward all changes to the data grid are not logged If changes have been logged previously the Access database still exists 10 7 Check for Updates 222 Remark Office OMR has the ability to check automatically for software updates You can check at any time by clicking the Help menu and then choosing Check for Updates You can also have the software check for an update every time it starts up When this option is turned on every time you start the software it sends information about your current version to the update website and lets you know if there is a newer version of the software available If an
25. definition because it does not contain any fields 7611 7612 An error occurred attempting to change a table or field definition because the object has already been appended to the corresponding object An error occurred attempting to delete a field You can t delete a field included in an index To delete a field that is part of an index you must first delete the index 7613 Text file specification field separator matches decimal separator or text delimiter Two or more delimiters settings used by the Text ISAM are the same Understanding Error Messages Class Category Error Error Text 9000 Miscellan 9000 These miscellaneous errors signify an internal eous problem or undocumented error type Please report Program any reproducible occurrences of these errors to Errors Gravic Technical Support Send a screenshot of the error and the steps you took leading up to the error 9100 DLL Errors 9100 The DLL file is in use by other applications and could not be opened Close other applications and restart Windows 9101 The DLL could not be loaded because it could not be located on your system Make sure all required DLL files are in directories where they can be found Uninstall and reinstall the software 9200 Clipboard 9200 This error indicates that a problem was encountered Errors trying to copy or paste data to or from the Clipboard This error could occur it too much data is requested or if an inva
26. images e Delimited Barcodes as Identifiers You can now use a delimited barcode one that has multiple pieces of data in it as form page and respondent identifiers on the form This feature is useful for processing multiple forms types at one time that use barcodes to identify them e Image Clips and Qualitative Coding Set up in One Region For handwriting you can now create one Image region and apply both an image clip snapshots of handwritten areas and a qualitative code a rating you supply after reading the handwriting The two pieces of information are be output separately in the data grid and reported on separately in Remark Quick Stats allowing you to both read the handwritten comments and review the coding using an Item Analysis report e Dynamically Naming Image Clips When setting up Image Clips snapshots of handwritten areas you can use a Name Builder to pull in data from other areas of the form and use it as part of the image clip name For example suppose you are scanning conference evaluations and the conference session name is a data field If you have a comments question on the evaluation and are capturing it as an image clip you can use the session name in the image clip name so your comments reflect the session name e Review Exceptions for More than One Exception If a single data cell has more than one exception e g a database lookup error and a MULT Remark Office OMR indicates multiple exceptions were
27. outside of Remark Office OMR To use Respondent Detection 1 Setup a form template that uses the Database Lookup feature See Section 6 3 4 Database Lookup for complete details on using Database Lookup 2 Process forms using the scanner or by reading from image file See Section 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard for information about using the Read Wizard to process forms Respondent Detection Respondent Detection 3 Once the forms have been processed and the Select a detection region and any addtional database elds you woud Ike in the resus data cleaned select the Tools menu and then RESNE click Respondent Detection or click pins avail for detection Py Respondent Detection P 6 Please note that by default the Student ID field will appear First in the results The Respondent Detection Database Feld List Adtional Feds in order wizard appears chon jor 4 From the Regions available for detection ae drop down list select the form template region TEA i Special Needs Program you wish to use for detection Gifted Program 157 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 5 If the region is linked to a database containing additional fields you may optionally select those fields from the Database Field List Use the green arrow to move the desired fields into the Additional Fields box Any fields moved to the Additional Fields box are also used for detecting respondents k Respondent Detection
28. process T ort Sort 3 5 3 View Menu Allows the sorting of data in ascending or descending patterns based on particular regions The View menu allows you to choose which toolbars you would like to display and allows you to customize the current view Template Editor Tool Menu Pull Down Item Task Pane Task Pane Function Displays the Task Pane that is used as a shortcut to perform functions e g open save etc Zoom PECE Fit Height Positions the image portion of the Template Editor so that it fits in the entire window in terms of height Fit Width Positions the image portion of the Template Editor so that it fits in the entire window in terms of width Zoom In Makes the image portion of the Template Editor window larger Zoom Out Makes the image portion of the Template Editor window larger smaller Theme Allows you to choose a theme for the software which defines colors fonts title bars etc You may also choose whether to display large or small icons on the toolbar 25 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 26 Data Center Menu Pull Down Item Function itmage viewer Image Displays the Image Viewer in the Data Center to show Viewer images of forms as they are processed or when clicking in a cell Graph viewer Graph Displays the Graph Viewer in the Data Center to show a Viewer graph of data as forms are processed or when clicking in a cell Qe Ia
29. s Guide 54 To create a new form template 1 From the Template Editor select the File menu and then click New or click iy to begin a new form template Alternatively select New form template from the Task Pane d The New Form Template Properties window appears This window allows you to specify general information about the template including a description page size and page orientation 2 If desired enter a description for the form template in the Form template description ee b 0 x Enter a form description and the page scale and orientation to be used as the basis for all pages New Form Template Properties 3 Select the appropriate size of the form s you ee ee are scanning in the Page Size drop down box Page See oe All pages contained in a form template must be E ee eee O Landscape of 8 1 2 x 11 inches All pages in the form template must be of Al pages in the of the same size thes must Be oF this orenat P Reset Page Images Existing Pages Only Form Template Details 4 Select the orientation of the form in the a eaa sta ta aeir esl ona al EERS ET i Pps Ea tee a Orientation area You may choose Portrait or iale eae Landscape All pages contained in a form template must be of the same orientation Tip You may not change the Page Size and Orientation once the form template is created Therefore make your selections carefully in this window 5 Click the Next gt gt button to cont
30. that your marks bubbles checkboxes are not degraded 3004 3005 The number of rows and columns found does not agree with the number found in the region The specified region orientation could be incorrect Check to ensure that your marks bubbles checkboxes are not degraded 3006 The software could not locate a region that matches the description specified in the OMR Region Properties window Could indicate that the page was not scanned correctly skewed upside down 3008 No marks were found in the region Reselect the region 3009 Incorrect region definition The number of columns and rows are reversed or the label location selection is incorrect Also check to ensure that your marks bubbles checkboxes are not degraded 3010 3013 A border of your region definition is touching your marks Hover your mouse over the region for error details Then adjust the border as indicated 3018 3019 An invalid number was specified for the number of rows contained in the region Check to ensure that your marks bubbles checkboxes are not degraded An invalid number was specified for the number of columns contained in the region Check to ensure that your marks bubbles checkboxes are not degraded 3100 Recogni tion Errors 3100 Cannot locate the region on the page Possible causes may be a skewed or offset page form design or a degraded image 3101 The image is
31. 2 Select Batch Header Form Template s box Lookin E Batch Headers E Sample Batch Header 2p 5 Click the Next gt gt button to continue Racca j omr l Teacher Header Sheet omr Batch Header Form Templates Add File s c program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 7 Sample Scenarios Batch Headers Teacher Header Sheet 149 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 6 Inthe Batch Wizard Step 2 window select the form template corresponding to Use sess your batch header form Click the Add paula File s button to add it to the Batch Sink cS Header Form Templates box You may select multiple batch header form templates if desired 7 Click the Next gt gt button to continue 8 Inthe Batch Wizard Step 3 window Feo lype Remark fice Batch ls ob 3 enter a file name for the new combined f Comeon batch file The Data Center combines the form template and batch header form ce a template s into one batch file The new m re ee combined file has a obf file extension n gt 9 Click the Create Batch button to combine the templates and exit the Batch Wizard When the batch file opens in the data grid an orange line defines the end of the batch header form template regions from the beginning of the primary form regions 10 Process the first batch header form or forms by starting the Read Wizard and either scanning forms or reading image file
32. Activate Automatically button Your license key information is sent to a secure server which returns a code to the computer that activates the software This is the fastest way to activate your software This is a one time process so once the software is activated you do not have to go through this process again Note When transmitting the license key over the Internet no personal information is sent to Gravic Inc Our server simply verifies your license key and if valid sends the activation code back to your computer The transfer happens via a secure server License key XXXX XXX KXXX XXXX License Key Entry Please enter or paste the 16 character license key that was provided with your software You will then be required to activate the software license with this license key using one of the various activation options which will be presented on the next screen Submit Key Close a x Software Activation Remark Office OMR 8 0 45 id Please follow the directions below to complete the software activation process Vendor Gravic Inc Activation status Not activated Expiration date Thursday July 29 2010 Evaluation time remaining 0 minute s Remaining application uses 0 i Application license key XXXX HMX XNXO KN Automatic Internet Activation If you have an Internet connection you can activate this software automatically now Activate Automatically Read Internet Activation Disclaimer Tf
33. Copy This copies the selected scale and CEA allows you to make modifications to the copy es instead of starting over when you want to i Peer create similar scales Click the Save button e food when you have finished creating your new scale 6 When you are finished click the OK button to save the changes Tip You may right click the mouse within the Labels or Values grid to access cut copy and paste functions 101 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 6 4 11 Zoom You may use the software s zoom features to zoom in and out of the image for better viewing It is recommended that you find a zoom range that allows you to see an entire region as you are creating it To use the zoom features 1 With a form template open select the View menu and then click Zoom 2 Select In to zoom in and Out to zoom out Alternatively select Fit Width to have the image fit in the viewer based on width or Fit Height to have the image fit in the viewer based on height You may also use the toolbar buttons for each of these yY y a a 6 4 12 File Properties functions You may view the properties of a form template at any time by selecting the File menu and then clicking Properties or click G From this window you can review the form template description size orientation number of pages number of regions and number of items You may also reset the form template images from this window 6 5 Saving a Form Template 102
34. If no question text is entered the region names are used on the reports You may manually type question text into the question text grid or paste text from the Windows clipboard by using the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl V or by double clicking a cell then right clicking and choosing Paste from the menu In order to paste information you must first copy it from another location e g a Word document You may select multiple rows in the grid to paste multiple lines of question text To set question text for a new region 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Question text and names link in the left Task Pane 3 Click in the first grid cell under Question Text 87 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 4 Type the desired question text in the first grid cell Alternatively double click in a cell then right click and select Paste from the menu or press Ctrl V on the keyboard to paste the contents of your Windows clipboard into the cell 5 Press the Enter key on the keyboard or click in the next cell going down to continue adding question text only applies to regions with more than one question 6 Once you have entered all of the desired question text click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view 6 3 2 b Question Names When defining an OMR region with multiple questions in the same region you can specify individual question names for each questio
35. In addition Easy Grade uses the first row of data in the data grid as the answer key therefore you should insert your answer key before your test data if you plan to use Easy Grade e g scan the answer key first The Grade Wizard allows you to customize the grading process by choosing which questions to include assigning point values setting benchmarks adding question text specifying learning objectives adding scaled scores and more To access test grading features 1 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center open a form template and either open an existing data file or process forms 2 Select the Tools menu then select Analysis and then click Easy Grade or Grade Wizard Alternatively select the Analysis tab in the Task Pane and then choose an analysis option In addition the analysis options are available on the toolbar Easy Grade Fl Grade Wizard Remark Quick Stats opens allowing you to configure and display reports Please consult the Remark Quick Stats user s guide PDF for further details about using Remark Quick Stats Tip The Grade Wizard and Easy Grade screens and functions are described in complete detail in the Remark Quick Stats User s Guide PDF file Access the file by clicking Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation 213 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 214 Remark Office OMR Data Center Preferences Chapter 10 10 1 Overview This chapter details how to customize the Remark Office
36. In the Review Exceptions Options area mark the checkboxes for those cases that you wish to review during reading The following options are available Multiple responses Blank responses Recognition errors Image regions Database Lookup regions Barcode regions OCR regions Repeated rank responses or Required items Office Read Wizard Review Exceptions optional Select the desired items to be flagged when running Review Exceptions ien using region tracking and or page error detection cleaning data that have been flagged during a read operation Please note that when reading in ise so that you can review the desired exceptions Activate Reyiew Exceptions Multiple responses Image regions C QCR regions Blank responses Database lookup regions Repeated rank responses Recognition errors Barcode regions O Reguired items 16 Click the Read button to begin processing image files When you click the Read button in the Read Wizard window Server Mode begins and you may continue working in other Windows applications By default the Data Center polls the specified image directory every five seconds for images If you want to change 156 Processing Forms the number of seconds between polls select the Tools Menu and then click Preferences You will see the System poll interval during Server Mode setting under the General section To end Server Mode 1 Select the Tools menu and then click Stop Server Mode or clic
37. Internet connection 2 Remark Office OMR goes out to the Gravic website and check for an update for your product If an update is needed you are prompted to download and install the update If an update is not needed you are advised that your software is up to date 16 Navigating Remark Office OMR Chapter 3 3 1 Overview This chapter provides an overview of how to get around in Remark Office OMR including the menu items and tools available in the software Wizards and other navigation tools are also described Specific functions are explained in more detail in the appropriate sections of this user s guide 3 2 Remark Office OMR Components The Remark Office OMR software interacts with you through three main components which can display multiple windows You may display many windows simultaneously allowing you to use multiple Remark Office OMR documents at one time Remark Office OMR contains a Template Editor component a Data Center component and a Remark Quick Stats component The Template Editor is used to create form templates for each form you want to process in the software The Data Center is used to process forms clean data and save export data Remark Quick Stats is used to grade or tabulate processed data A shaded title bar designates the active or current window Minimize documents on the desktop by clicking the minimize button located in the upper right hand corner of the window Double clicking the minimized icon
38. Mode the same images are processed again if they still reside in the specified folder s You may wish to consider creating a batch file on your own to move the processed images to a different location once they have been read 11 Click the Next gt gt button to continue 12 OPTIONAL If you chose the Package and rename images option on the first step of the Read Wizard the Image Naming Conventions window appears The Image 154 Processing Forms Naming Conventions window allows you to specify options for repackaging the processed images In the Begin image names with box enter a file base name that the software can use to name the images of each form The default base name is the form template name however you may use any name you like We suggest using something that identifies to you that the images belong to a certain form The images that are stored all begin with this base name and then have the page number if processing a multi page template date and time appended to them to keep track of the various images You may optionally choose a region from the form template to use as the base name The value that is collected from the form for the specified region is used as the base name for the corresponding stored image If you leave the Begin image names with option blank your images only have the page number if applicable date and time as the name of each image In the Image target directory box click the ellipsis but
39. OCR regions the selected settings are used automatically However you can always change individual OCR region properties as you go The following options are available Preferences Set the preference values to use throughout the application as welll as the default region values to use when inserting Sani Default Region Definition OCR type Standard Orientation Left to Right lag General Set general preferences Language None Threshold 70 gig OMR regions Data type Textual Set default OMR region properties Default Grading amp Survey Analysis O Grade region O Tabulate region Sig mage regions Set default Image region properties Sig Barcode regions Set default Barcode region properties gig OCR regions Set default OCR region properties Section Option Description Default Region OCR type Sets the type of OCR to use There are two Definition options Standard Standard OCR is Remark Office OMR s built in OCR engine It tends be faster but may be less accurate Microsoft Office Document Imaging MODI MODI OCR comes with Microsoft Office 2007 and is only available if you have this software installed with the MODI option Using MODI tends to be slower but yields high accuracy rates Language Sets the default language to use when performing OCR functions Note that the available languages change based upon the type of OCR you are using Data type Sets the default OCR r
40. OMR software who hold a valid support agreement For more information about purchasing a support agreement please go to our website address provided on back of this user s guide Before contacting technical support please gather the following information e The version and serial number of the Remark Office OMR software you can find this information by selecting the Help menu and then clicking About in the software or look in the lower right hand corner of the Data Center e The steps required to reproduce the problem e The type model and configuration of your computer and scanner if applicable Gravic s technical support team provides product support to customers with valid support agreements via email web phone 610 647 8595 and fax 610 647 8771 In addition you will find free support tools on our website Remark Office OMR User s Guide Installing and Activating Remark Office OMR Chapter 2 2 1 Overview This chapter provides system requirements software installation instructions activation procedures and starting and exiting procedures Please consult your scanner s installation guide for specific scanner installation instructions 2 2 System Requirements The following section provides the system configuration for running Remark Office OMR Personal computer with 1 GHz or faster processor Windows 32 bit and 64 bit operating systems 2000 SP4 32 bit only XP SP3 Vista SP2 and Windows 7 Note SP stands
41. OMR COMPONENtS cceceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 17 3 3 Navigation T0OIS iirinn decks S EAE ANAE E ee eee eens 18 3 4 Using the Mouse and Keyboard cceeeeeeee eee e teeta eee teste eaees 18 3 4 1 Using the MOUSE ss icsieterseeersien dein aa ien its 18 3 4 2 Using the Keyboard i aaae eaaa ee eee ee eee a 18 3 4 3 Using Keyboard Shortcuts c eceeeeeee eee ee eee eee eeeeaees 19 34 4 SCrOllin Gs cevicee acces ov idee cadnas a EA AA EAA EAA EENET AENEA AEE ang 19 SiS Men TEMS evara sa REEE EEEE E sale A NA 20 SSA FUE MENU wcandececuns oseon ra E a A AaS 21 3S2 Edt MEN a a a a p aaa a E a aa aaa 23 3 5 3 View MENU iresi arnan aa e a aa a aea ia 25 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 3 5 4 Tools MENU kiwis e scan Ses hed a vale ches a aeh 26 3 5 5 Page and Region MENUS ceeeeceee eee eeeeee test eeeeeeaees 29 3 5 0 Help M nU neier inia ainin owas iat eaa avin eco REEERE 30 3 6 Accessing the Software Help File sssssssssssrrrssserrrrrsrerrrrrsrerrnnns 31 Setting Up Your Scanner 33 4 T OVERVIEW E E E A E A EAE 33 4 2 Scanners General Information ssssssssssssrsrrrsrrssrsssrsrresrrerrren 33 4 2 1 Scanner Connections cece cece irie imn rA nnrir Enne ER REKEREKE 33 d 22 Scanner Drivers iieri Eas E NANESENE AERE ATE N 34 4 3 Selecting Your SCANNED iecisccetacereeaseda gers nia aai NENA aeni 34 4 321 TWAIN SOUCO eves eE A ES AREKEA esa eae ed ise eae EREE 34 4 3 2 Configuring a TWA
42. OMR software by setting up preferences Preferences allow you to set the way the software functions by default which can facilitate your use of the software Important Note The Preferences are global software settings When you make a change to the Preferences it affects all actions from that point forward It does not affect anything you have already completed To access the Preferences 1 Inthe Remark Office OMR Data Center select the Tools menu and then click Preferences Use the links in the left Task Pane to access all of the available preferences Note Each component of the software has its own set of preferences The Remark Office OMR Template Editor preferences are covered in Section 6 7 Template Editor Preferences The Remark Quick Stats preferences are covered in the Remark Quick Stats User s Guide PDF file which can be accessed by clicking Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation The available Data Center preferences are described in the sections that follow Recognition Preferences are covered in Section 7 14 10 2 General Preferences General preferences allow you to setup defaults for basic software functions The following options are available 215 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Application Preferences General Preferences General Set the generic application preferences iW File storage locations Set target file storage locations Aa Custom font Optionally choose a custom font and
43. Recognition Errors Form Error BLANK Yellow ERROR Red various code numbers may appear Unanswered questions Response not completely filled Forms that have been enlarged reduced offset or skewed by more than 3 8 inch could result from photocopying or reprinting Improperly or carelessly placed forms in the automatic document feeder of the scanner where they are pulled in crookedly and skewed images result Could also be a result of a mechanical issue with the scanner in which case you should have your scanner cleaned and serviced Forms that have text or lines placed too close to markable areas causing the text or lines to be interfere with the marks bubbles checkboxes Images scanned with brightness setting too high or low Carelessly marked forms Forms processed with wrong form template file Forms that do not follow the design guidelines outlined in Chapter 5 Image Regions None Light Blue Signifies a data entry image region where handwriting was found You need to type the information found in the region or apply a code if using qualitative coding Database Lookup Errors Selected Responses Purple Response not found within the selected database to which the region is linked 129 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Text 2 Color Dark Orange Error Type Barcode Errors Possible Causes Used a barcode type that Remark Office OMR cannot recogniz
44. Spell Check Remark Office OMR has a spell check feature that can be used to check spelling on region names question text and labels in the template regions You can specify the dictionary to use by clicking Tools Preferences General To use spell check 1 With a form template open select the Tools menu and then click Perform Spell Check or click a 2 Mark the options you wish to use while checking the form template b Spell Checker a Use this tool to check spelling for question text region names and possible responses Preferences Search question text and names Ignore words with numbers H H H Search region names Ignore words in upper case 3 Click the Start button to begin searching the iapus Eeee form template 4 When a spelling error is detected you are SS prompted with the word in question and pees suggestions if they are available The item containing the word is in the title bar Using the Template Editor Grammar Spelling Question Region Item 5 You may choose to ignore the word once Ignore or all times Ignore All in the a eS ere form template add the word to your dictionary Add change this Change or all p Change All occurrences of the word in the oo form template or Cancel the spell check operation 6 When the entire form template has been searched click the Finish button to close the Spell Checker window Add Cancel 6 4 10 Response Scales
45. This feature is used in conjunction with the Database Lookup feature FI Perform Spell Checks the selected data file for spelling errors Check F7 Recognition Allows you to draw form template regions and re Tools recognize regions and entire form pages to accommodate changes in filled in form images Recognition Allows you to view modify the default recognition Settings settings if no form templates are open If a form template is open allows you to view modify the recognition settings used for the active form template J Scanner Accesses the Scanner Properties window so that you aid Properties can set up a scanner or make changes to the current F8 scanner setup Preferences Allows you to modify settings that control the way the F9 Data Center looks feels and performs Use the Task Pane in the Preferences to perform software customization Remark Office OMR saves any changes you make and applies them to future actions 3 5 5 Page and Region Menus The Page and Region menus are available in the Template Editor as you are creating or editing a form template These menus give you options to add delete edit and view the properties of regions in the form template The items change depending on whether you have selected a Page node or a Region node in the tree view Tool Menu Page or Region Page amp Region Menu Pull Function Down Item Insert Inserts a page or region before or after
46. To use Review Duplicates 1 Open a form template and process forms by either scanning or reading pre scanned images See Section 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard for information about using the Read Wizard to process forms Once the data is collected and cleaned select the Tools menu and then click B Review Duplicates Review Duplicates or click Pane Alternatively select Review Duplicates from the Task Pane In the Review Duplicates Task Pane on the left side of the window use the Unique respondent identifier drop down list to choose a region or image files from your data that you want to check for duplicate entries Using the image files option is useful if an entire set of forms was accidentally processed twice If the same set of images exists more than one time based on the image file names the images are flagged as duplicates Click the Search button to begin the search for duplicate entries The gold bar underneath The Unique respondent identifier box tells you whether duplicates were found The data is sorted based on the duplicates that are found Determine the action you wish to take If you want to review the duplicates before taking action choose Review duplicate records in the Action drop down list and then click the Execute button Remark Office OMR highlights any sets of duplicate records it finds You may use the green arrows in the Navigate area to move between records The Next Record arrow takes
47. When exporting data to some gradebook packages you may also be required to set an Analysis Respondent ID Note Analysis Respondent IDs are included as identifiers in the analysis but they are not tabulated or graded In order to set a region as an Analysis Respondent ID make sure it is set to Do not grade this item and Do not tabulate this item To set an Analysis Respondent ID 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane 3 Inthe Analysis Respondent ID section mark the checkbox for Designate as a respondent ID 4 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view 6 3 1 e Recognition Threshold The Recognition Threshold setting allows you to compensate for degraded images and poorly marked forms assists with the recognition of text in OCR regions and assists with the recognition of handwriting in Image regions Use the Recognition Threshold setting to increase or decrease standards for mark and text recognition You can set the Recognition Threshold on a region by region basis For OMR and Image regions the Recognition Threshold setting ranges from 1 to 6 with 3 being the default setting It is recommended that you use the default values unless you encounter problems Use a lower Recognition Threshold to compensate for errors when reading light pages degraded images or pages where the respondent has not filled th
48. add data to this database you must first reduce its size by deleting data 7004 You tried to add new records to a Microsoft Excel version 3 or version 4 file but the file is full Files of these types can hold a maximum of 16 384 records 7005 You tried to perform a Btrieve operation that involves too many Memo or OLE object regions Reduce the number of Memo and OLE object regions and then try the operation again 7006 234 You tried to perform an operation that involves more than 255 regions Reduce the number of regions and then try the operation again Class Category 7100 Database Syntax Errors Error 7100 Understanding Error Messages Error Text A syntax error occurred Check the data to make sure it was entered correctly This error can occur if an incorrect value type is provided as part of an expression For example textual data entered into a numeric field 7101 Unable to locate specified table field or index Check the name to make sure it was entered correctly and then retry the operation 7102 The specified file table or region name doesn t follow standard naming conventions Enter a new name and then try the operation again Consult your database s documentation for information on valid names and naming limitations 7200 Database Read Errors 7200 You tried to access a database that is currently in use by another user or application Wait for the othe
49. any items that are left blank If you are using Review Exceptions during form processing the processing stops so that you may review the unrecognized item If you are using Review Exceptions after form processing Remark Office OMR includes the unrecognized item during the review operation To set an item as required 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane 3 Mark the checkbox for Required item 4 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view 6 3 2 Question Text and Names The Question text and names section of the Question Properties window allows you to enter custom question text and question names Question text is displayed on reports and exported to certain formats such as SPSS Question names are used as column headers in the template grid and are exported along with your data Question names are limited to 60 characters Important Note The Question text and names section differs slightly when adding fields as opposed to editing them This section covers adding fields When editing fields Question text and names becomes Question text names and responses this screen is covered in Section 6 6 Editing an Existing Form Template 6 3 2 a Question Text Question text may optionally be added to make reports more meaningful When question text is present it is used on the reports to identify the question
50. are grouped together for processing Without the use of Respondent Tracker if pages from differing respondents are mixed together you are prompted and form processing stops You need to re sort your forms so that each respondent s pages are processed together an individual respondent s pages can be out of order within the same form but a single respondent s pages cannot be interspersed with another respondent s pages Auto Page ID regions can be OMR OCR or Barcode regions To use Auto Page ID 1 Outside of Remark Office OMR create a form that contains a unique identifier on each page that can be captured as an OMR OCR or Barcode region in the Remark Office OMR template Remember that if you are also using Auto Form ID you need a second unique identifier to be used as the Page ID Each Page ID must be unique from page to page Tip The Page ID region could be a series of bubbles that represent page numbers such as 1 4 Or it could be an OCR area or barcode that identifies a specific page 2 Create a form template for each form you wish to process using automatic page detection When creating the form template set the region to be used as the Page ID region in the Tracking section of the region s properties Mark the checkbox for Use Region as a Unique Identifier Then select the radio button marked Page ID See Section 6 3 3 b Page IDs for further information about setting up ID regions in the form template 3 When you are r
51. automatically However you can always change individual Barcode region properties as you go The following options are available Preferences Preferences Set the preference values to use throughout the application as well as the default region values to use when inserting Preferences Set default Image region properties Barcode regions Set default Barcode region properties ig OCR regions Set default OCR region properties Default Region Definition Barcode orientation Horizontal E Data type Textual E Default Grading amp Survey Analysis D Grade region O Tabulate region Section Option Description Default Region Barcode Sets the default orientation to be used when Definition orientation creating new Barcode regions Horizontal or Vertical Data type Sets the default Barcode region data type to be used when creating new Barcode regions Textual or Numeric The data type is used when exporting data Default Grading amp Survey Analysis Grade region Mark this checkbox to grade Barcode regions by default when performing a grade operation Tabulate region Mark this checkbox to tabulate Barcode regions by default when performing a survey operation 111 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 6 7 5 OCR Region Preferences The OCR Region screen allows you to setup default settings to be used when creating new OCR optical character recognition regions When creating new
52. box click the OK button to return to the Read Wizard al Please note that image names will also contain the corresponding form template page number if Form template contains multiple pages Processing Forms 12 In the Saved image type box select an image type to use for storing images The choices are PCX DCX PDF TIF or JPG 13 When saving to the PDF or TIF formats you can choose the compression level under Image compression level Uncompressed Group 3 Group 3 2d Group 4 and LZW Group 4 creates the most compressed image smallest file size that takes up less space on your computer 14 Mark the checkbox for Save multiple page form templates as multiple page image files if you are scanning with a multi page template and would like all of the images for one complete form to be saved as one image file 15 If you would like to configure Review Exceptions options click the Next gt gt button to continue Otherwise click the Read button to begin scanning pages Note If using Review Exceptions during Server Mode scanning stops each time an exception is found until the exception is reviewed If you turn on Review Exceptions in the Read Wizard all scanning stops when an exception occurs and does not start again until the exception is addressed You may wish to run Review Exceptions after form processing so that Server Mode can run uninterrupted see Section 7 6 Reviewing Exceptions for more information about Review Exceptions after
53. changes to the individual data sets are not saved 5 Click the OK button 6 Select the desired directory location using the Look in drop down box 191 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 192 7 Enter a name in the box titled File name 8 Select the desired file format in the box titled Save as type 9 Click the OK button to save the file All selected data sets are saved to the file specified and closed in the data grid The combined data set is opened 8 6 6 Save Data Builder The Save Data Builder option allows you to fine tune the data saving process by building dynamic file folder and table names Using the Data Builder options you can use information directly from your data set to name the data file storage folder or table within the file This functionality is similar to the Name Builder in the Read Wizard that is used to name scanned and repackaged image files see Section 7 3 for further information To use Save Data Builder 1 Select the File menu and then click Save Data Builder The Save Data Builder window opens allowing you to choose a file name a file type the folder in which you would like the file saved and table name saving options The first step is to choose a file type and location for the data 2 Under Base Save File and Type click the Browse button to select a file name and format for your data Eee m y Select the appropriate file type and file name and then click OK 3 Select the de
54. connection SSL encrypts data as it is SSL transmitted Your SMTP server must be configured to use SSL in order connection for this feature to work Use the If you need to use authentication for your SMTP server you can enter default credentials or use those of the user logged in to the computer Mark credentials of the currently the Use the default credentials of the currently logged in user checkbox to utilize the user s credentials e g the person logged in logged in when sending the emails from Remark Office OMR Otherwise user continue to the next step to enter specific credentials Username If authentication is required and you are not using the credentials of and the currently logged in user enter the Username and Password as Password supplied by your network email administrator 220 Throttle rate The throttle rate adds a delay while sending emails The default setting is 500ms meaning that one email is sent every 500 ms in other words two emails are sent per second Throttling emails keeps the SMTP server from being overloaded when sending large numbers of emails Unless you plan on sending hundreds of emails at one time the default setting of 500 is likely fine To choose your default email client in the Email client drop down list choose Default to use your SMTP server or Outlook to use Microsoft Outlook 2007 2010 If using your SMTP server click the SMTP Server button and put in the settings as des
55. degraded Cannot locate marks Possibly scanned incorrectly 3102 MULT Multiple answers were entered for a region in which multiple responses were not permitted 3103 BLANK No response was given 231 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 232 Class Category Error 3104 Error Text Unable to locate the region on the page Possible causes scanning a page that is smaller than the form template or scanning pages with the wrong template 3200 Barcode Errors 3200 Unable to recognize barcode Check to ensure it is a supported barcode type and printed at a minimum of 24 points If using the Code 3 of 9 barcode type make sure that you used the required beginning and ending asterisks in your barcode 4000 Scanner Errors 4000 The scanner is not ready Check to make sure it is connected correctly and that the power is turned on 4100 TWAIN Errors 4001 4100 No scanner is selected A scanner cannot be used until it is selected in the Scanner Properties window No TWAIN sources are available on your system Make sure that sources drivers have been installed correctly Check the documentation that came with your scanner for more details about installing it 4101 Could not select the specified source scanner Check that the scanner has been installed correctly 4102 Could not communicate with the TWAIN source manager Make sure that the file TWAIN_32 DLL i
56. drag it to another position within the tree The order of the regions in the tree view determines the order of the fields in your data set You may set the order of the regions on a page without regard to where the region is located on the image When using drag drop you can either move a node or copy a node To move a node using drag drop 1 Select the node representing the region you would like to move 2 While holding down the left mouse button drag the region to its new desired location 3 When you have reached the new location release the mouse button A dialog box appears confirming whether you want to move the region to the new location 4 Click the OK button to move the node Tip You can press the Shift key on the keyboard as you drag a node to toggle between Move Before and Move After options By pressing Shift you can move a region before the selected region otherwise the region is placed after the selected region automatically To copy a region using drag drop 1 Select the node representing the region you would like to copy 96 Using the Template Editor 2 While holding down the left mouse button drag the region to its new desired location and then press the Ctrl key while still holding down the left mouse button 3 When you have reached the new location release the mouse button A dialog box appears confirming whether you want to copy the region to the new location 4 Click the OK button After copying a reg
57. e The image used for the form template is degraded When scanning forms the quality of the resulting image is sometimes not as clear as expected The marks may break up meaning that they have tiny gaps in them You can use the zoom options on the toolbar to zoom in on your image to see if your marks are complete When marks are not complete Remark Office OMR cannot properly recognize them If this problem occurs reacquire your form template image by scanning it at a darker brightness setting sometimes called threshold on your scanner Note that you may save templates that have solid red OMR regions but you should correct the problem before you begin processing forms to have the software recognize the forms properly To reposition or redefine a region 1 Ifa region is solid red in color place your mouse over the region to see the tooltip describing the problem Then review the previously listed potential reasons for the red color If you need to move the entire region place the mouse over the region and drag the entire region with the left mouse button to its new position and release the mouse If you need to move a portion of the region drag the box where you see the Ce a rcae white image handle boxes You can drag oT right left up down or diagonally to adjust the region s borders You know you have the image handle selected correctly when the mouse turns into a double arrow 2 If the region appears to be positioned properly but s
58. field in the Replace list 14 If desired select database fields from the Additional Return Fields list to insert additional information from the database into the data grid during form processing You may look up a field once but return several database fields worth of information This is a quick and easy way to get information out of the existing database and into your processed data Fields are listed in the data grid in the order in which they appear in the Additional Return Fields list 15 If desired use the Return Names column to specify region names for the Return fields By default the name is taken from the external database to which the region is connected You may type a new name in the Return Names cell if desired 16 Use the drop down arrow to select Yes in the Respondent ID box to include the Return field in the reports as a respondent identifier If this setting is set to Yes the data collected from this region is used on the appropriate reports to identify the respondent 17 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view When you process your filled in forms Remark Office OMR looks up the captured data in the database and if found returns your Replace and Additional Return Field data Using the Template Editor 6 4 Additional Template Editor Features The Remark Office OMR Template Editor provides several other features and functions to help make it user friendly The following featur
59. fill in bubbles corresponding to their name and allow for ten characters If a name only contains five characters the region may come up as blank simply because the respondent did not utilize all ten characters Or you may have questions that are often left blank due to the nature of the question e g it will not apply to many respondents In such a case you can replace blank characters with Nothing and use the Flag Blanks parameters to further define the output The options are as follows Option Always Description If any character in the region is left blank or the entire question is left blank regardless of the replacement characters being used the region is considered blank Replacement characters if used are still utilized but the region contains the yellow BLANK exception color Ignore leading trailing If a leading or trailing character in the region is left blank it is ignored This allows you to capture data smaller than the allotted region without it being considered blank You will see whatever data is captured and the region will not contain a yellow BLANK exception color This setting applies to Grid regions only 84 Using the Template Editor Option Description Never If any character within the region is blank or the entire 5 question is left blank Remark Office OMR ignores it The region never appears with a yellow BLANK exception color in the data grid Click the OK button to
60. first Add button to move your selections into the configuration window Optional If you have additional files not generated by Remark Office OMR or very specific files that you want to include click the Add button next to the File list window Optional In the Open window select the files you wish to include Once you have all the files you wish to include visible in the File list window click the Next button Under Send type choose Email to send the files via email Optional If you would like to compress the files first mark the checkbox for Compress Files into a Zip Archive Custom filter Note Your organization or the recipient s organization may have restrictions on the types of files that can be sent via email If the file is restricted and you do not zip it the email may never reach the intended recipient If you are unsure whether the selected file type is restricted use the ZIP option The recipient must have a Zip program to unzip the file and view it whether you want each file in its own zip file Stes Create a separate zip archive for each sabe pet een te es Pale se file or to combine all files into one zip file e Create a single zip archive for all files F enai Compress Files into a Zip Archive C Create a separate Zip archive for each file name for the file in the Zip file name box A p pr a Note when archiving each file individually e EAT the zip file is automatically
61. flagged green for review Having all the responses expedites the cleanup process and allows you to easily change your mind about allowing multiple responses after processing forms Note If you were using a previous version of Remark Office OMR any form templates that you convert still have the previous default replacement of MULT If you would like to change old form templates to use the new ALL functionality open the form template in the Template Editor and change the Replace with setting under Region item properties Note that any new form templates you create use the ALL option by default 5 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view 85 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 86 To set duplicate response settings The word DUP is inserted for Rank questions when more than one response is chosen You may choose to customize the output for duplicate rankings 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 Set it to the Rank OMR type Ranking questions only allow one response per answer item 2 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane 3 Inthe Duplicate Response Handling section choose a value from the Replace with drop down list or enter a unique replacement of your own Pre set choices include DUP Asterisk Nothing Space Character and Tilde 4 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view Properties OMR Region Inst
62. for Service Pack o Remark Office OMR will run on Windows Server 2003 SP2 and Windows 2008 SP2 but please note the software is not a client server application 1 GB RAM 1 GB free fixed disk space CD ROM drive for installation purposes Screen monitor resolution of 1024x768 or higher and at least 32 bit color Mouse or other pointing device Supported scanner recommended Windows supported printer optional Internet connection recommended for initial software activation optional PDF viewer required to view installed documentation optional Microsoft Outlook 2007 or greater can be used for email functionality if not present an internal Remark Office OMR email client using your SMTP server may be used optional Remark Office OMR User s Guide 2 3 Installing the Software 10 You must run the Remark Office OMR installation program in order to use the software Install Remark Office OMR on a fixed drive with at least 1GB of free disk space To scan directly into Remark Office OMR you must install the software on the same system to which the scanner is attached Note Scanners can be used if they are not connected to the PC running Remark Office OMR You must first scan forms and save them as image files outside of Remark Office OMR Then the software reads those images Before installing the software make sure you are an administrator on your computer Each single license of the software can only be installed on a sing
63. form However they should be unique from any other types of identifiers you are using 89 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 90 such as Page IDs or Respondent IDs on this form or other forms An example could be the words Form A in barcode format Alternatively you could place bubbles on the form and mark them as A B C etc depending on how many forms you want to automatically recognize to identify each particular form Note If using barcodes as identifiers and the barcodes contain multiple pieces of data within a single barcode called Barcode Contains Multiple Items in the Barcode Properties window you can set up tracking after creating the barcode region Set up the barcode as usual You then see it listed in the tree view with a plus sign Click the plus sign to expand the barcode showing its separate pieces of output Then select the individual item from the tree view to which you want to apply the tracking To set up an Auto Form ID region 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 From the Properties window click the Tracking link in the left Task Pane 3 Mark the checkbox for Use Region as Unique Identifier 4 Select the radio button for Form ID region s value identifies this form during the read operation Auto Form ID 5 If using an OMR region type in the ID value Note that the ID value for an OMR region must be one of the labels you defined for the region If using a barcode or OCR click th
64. form processing Office Read Wizard 16 In the Review Exceptions window specify vew xcentions options Select the desired items to be flagged when running Review Exceptions whether to review exception cases during Review Exceptions amp Unrecognized Images the reading process by marking the Diiia brs ar aa ger aaa ame Activate Review Exceptions checkbox SEEGER E ra Gang AR rm meer te 17 In the Review Exceptions Options area ee AE mark the checkboxes for those cases that 5 ar ese you wish to review during reading The following options are available Multiple responses Blank responses Recognition errors Image regions Database Lookup regions Barcode regions OCR regions Repeated rank responses or Required items Note Review Exceptions can also be run after all the forms are processed if you prefer not to stop processing when problems occur 18 Place the completed forms in the scanner 19 Click the Read button to begin processing pages When you click the Read button in the Read Wizard window Server Mode begins and you may continue working in other Windows applications By default Remark Office OMR polls the scanner every five seconds for pages If you want to change the number of seconds between polls select the Tools Menu and then click Preferences You will see the System poll interval during Server Mode setting under the General section To read image files using Server Mode 1 Open the correct
65. found and you can review all of the exceptions e Logging of Changes Changes to data sets can be logged in a password protected Access database e SPSS File Format Enhancements o The eight character region name limit has been removed Region names up to 64 characters are now supported when saving to the SPSS format o You no longer have to set up questions that allow more than one response as Boolean regions The software breaks apart the multiple responses into separate questions when saving to the SPSS format o Numeric fields that contain missing data now use the designated missing value e g 1 99 etc instead of O when exporting to SPSS Remark Office OMR Overview o The Advanced window is now available when saving data to the SPSS format so that you can chose what regions to include and set field sizes for your data set e Saving Images with Data You may now save images or other files into databases along with the rest of the scanned data In order for the file to be saved as binary data in the database you must change the field type of the database to Binary using the Advanced window and make sure the field is set to be included If the field corresponds to a page image the software extracts just the individual page from the multiple page image files and stores just the page image in the database e Freezing Columns Rows You can now freeze columns and rows in the Data Center so that when scrolling they are always visib
66. from a scanner or image files and place the data into the data grid sg Easy Scan Begins the scanning process based on the last settings EA Ctrl F12 used in the Read Wizard Note that you cannot adjust the settings If you are unsure of the last settings used you should use the Read Wizard to scan your forms 27 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 28 Tool Menu Pull Down Item Function El Re readBatch Re read Processes the entire batch of images again which is Batch particularly useful after you have made adjustments using the Recognition Tools End Read Stops the process when scanning forms or reading Saas image files Ed Review Searches the open data grid and allows you to correct cm Exceptions exception cases e g blank or multiple responses and F4 enter image region information The Task Pane on the left shows the available options FaReview Duplicates Review Searches the open data grid and allows you to correct Duplicates duplicate entries e g two records in the data set belonging to the same respondent based upon the respondent ID The Task Pane on the left shows the available options Review Unrecognized Images REV iG w Easy Grade ia Grade Wizard if Easy Survey jj Survey Wizard Unrecognized Images Analysis When processing forms with Auto Form ID Auto Page ID or Respondent Tracker regions unrecognized images enter a queue for later review Use this
67. in the directory you have selected in the Image target directory box Tip We recommend using the Save images in a subfolder based on the form template s name feature for easier organization of image files Use of this feature keeps all images associated with this form template in one folder for easy access The unique date and time portion of the image names prevents images from being overwritten 11 OPTIONAL If desired click the Name Builder button to further customize the stored image names and locations e Inthe Image Base Name area you may choose to add a region from the processed data to the image base name Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button For example if processing tests you o gt could add a Student ID that is being N ona kia aeta lna ane ani fai lesia fr sornas ni ce gt collected from the form so that your Image Base Name processed images all have the Sen Nane Student ID number in them Studer Nane x bd In the Image Target Directory i a C Browse area you may choose to add a region 3 from the processed data to the folder structure that holds the processed images Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button For example if processing tests you could add a Teacher ID that is being collected from the form so that each student s form images are stored in a folder containing the Teacher s ID number e Inthe Name Builder
68. is used to create form templates for the forms you process in Remark Office OMR You must create one form template file for each form that you process with the Remark software The form template file defines all of the information needed for the software to process your form correctly Once a form template is created the form can be used as often as desired without needing to create a new form template as long as the form does not change Example If processing student exams you can create form templates for various forms e g 25 questions 50 questions and 75 questions and then use those form templates as often as needed The form template file holds information about where the marks barcodes and text are located on the page how many pages your form contains and what type of output you would like A single template can hold up to 150 pages Tip The form template is the key to accurate recognition in Remark Office OMR When creating form templates be sure to use the same quality form as you will be distributing to respondents e g if you are photocopying forms use a blank photocopy for the form template Also use the same scanner and scanner settings for both the form template and filled in forms e g resolution brightness The following topics are covered in this chapter e Understanding the template editor interface Section 6 2 1 e Creating form templates Section 6 2 e Region types Section 6 2 2 e Creating regions Sectio
69. it was defined in the form _ template Hover your mouse over any column header to see information pertaining to the specific item question The grid employs two cell types to store 173 Remark Office OMR User s Guide data text and list The cell type depends on the kind of region being used Barcode regions Image regions that do not contain Database Lookup or qualitative response code information OCR regions and OMR regions set to the Grid Add or Binary Data Type use text cells Text cells are used to type information manually All other OMR regions and data entry Image regions that utilize qualitative response codes use list cells List cells contain a drop down list of possible answer items labels as they are defined in the form template See Section 8 3 2 Changing Cell Contents later in this chapter for information on how to edit individual cells If an individual region contains more than one question by default the corresponding column headers also contain question numbers For example Eval2 would correspond to the second item of a region titled Eval If you entered individual Question Names in the OMR region properties of the form template these Question Names appear instead See Section 6 3 2 6 Question Names for more detailed information about Question Names 8 3 Editing the Data Grid 174 The data grid window behaves like a spreadsheet You can cut copy and paste selections to and from the grid Ad
70. mouse button twice Right click Press and release the right mouse button Press Press and hold the mouse button Drag Move the mouse while holding down the mouse button 3 4 2 Using the Keyboard You can use the keyboard or the mouse and the keyboard to make selections and perform functions within Remark Office OMR Navigating Remark Office OMR To use the keyboard to select objects 1 Press Tab to activate the next item in a window 2 Press Shift Tab to activate the previous item 3 4 3 Using Keyboard Shortcuts Most menu items and window objects provide shortcut keys as an alternative to using the mouse An underlined letter in the label indicates the shortcut letter for the particular object or menu item To pull down a menu item using keyboard shortcuts 1 Press Alt the shortcut letter of the menu item shown on the menu bar For example press AIt F to access the File menu 2 Press the underlined letter of the desired item from the pull down menu Many Remark Office OMR menu pull down options also employ hot key shortcuts e g use Ctrl X for Cut 3 4 4 Scrolling When you select a scrolling list the Up Down arrow keys the Page Up Page Down keys and the Home End keys perform the following actions e The arrow keys move the list up or down a line at a time e The Page Up Page Down keys move up or down a page window of text at a time e The Home End keys move to the top or bottom of a
71. named with the file Zppassnord se name Zip file name MyData Delete local files after successful send zip file to be encrypted and password protected mark the checkbox for Encrypt and Password Protect the Zip Archive s 13 Optional Enter the password required to open the zip file in the Zip password box 201 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 202 14 Optional If you would like to delete the original files stored locally once the files are sent via the Send Wizard mark the checkbox for Delete local files after successful send If a problem is encountered sending the files the original files are not deleted In the Email Message window format your email 15 Enter a recipient s address in the To box separate multiple recipients with a semi colon i 16 Enter the sender s email address in the From box 17 Enter a subject of your choice in the Subject box 18 Compose your message You may use the toolbar buttons to add formatting to your message 19 Click the SMTP Settings tab to enter information about your SMTP Server You must have a valid SMTP server set up independently of Remark Office OMR SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol and is the Internet standard for transmitting email across networks It is likely your organization has a running SMTP server already set up You just need to find out general information about the server You will likely need to consult with your network email
72. of order When you design your paper form you add the tracking identification to each form e g bubbles or barcodes indicating form or page numbers These features can be used with OMR OCR or Barcode regions If using OMR bubbles do not pre fill the bubbles on the form being used to set up the form template they should be blank like the rest of the form used to create the form template When combined the three types of tracking allow you to process forms without pre sorting and Remark Office OMR is able to match each page to the correct form template page number and respondent within the appropriate template grid n question sheet Fill in the entire circle that corresponds to your answer for each npletely to make a chang Tip You can use delimited barcodes as identifiers Delimited barcodes contain multiple items within a single barcode When set up in the Template Editor you can tell the software which part of the barcode to use as the Form Page or Respondent Identifier 6 3 3 a Setting up an Auto Form ID Region You must have a form identifier on each page of your form to use the Auto Form ID feature When you create a paper form place optical marks e g bubbles computer generated text OCR or barcodes on it that identify the form If you already have an existing form you wish to process add the bubbles text or barcodes to the form so that they identify the form These markings must be the same on each page of the same
73. on which to begin To overwrite data 1 Highlight the data grid row s containing the data you wish to overwrite by clicking in the row header s x Si Read wizard 2 Select the Tools menu and then click Read Wizard or click Alternatively you may select the Read Wizard link from the Task Pane 3 Inthe Read Method window select the radio button for the option you wish to use Read from scanner or Read from image files 4 Optional If using a multi page template and pessmetnoa W you only want to overwrite a portion of the ERE S A data record in the Advanced Collection n aae ae Options area mark the checkbox for Start reading from form template page Enter D server tate o the page number at which to start U P z processing You may use the up and down arrow keys or type a number If you are using a single page form template or overwriting the entire data grid row you do not need to use this setting 5 Configure the remaining Read Wizard options by clicking the Next gt gt button see Section 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard for detailed information about using the Read Wizard If processing image files click the Next gt gt button to choose the image files 6 If scanning forms place all pages to be read in the scanner starting with the page corresponding to the form template page entered in step 4 and then click the Read button Note If you place more than one page in the scanner the Data Center continues
74. or ID number 9 If using a database format that requires a table name go to the Table Name area of the window The name you chose for Table piety ae acer se E A nian ea OO Name when initially setting up the file in Step 4 is listed as the Table Name You may modify it by typing in the box You may also use the drop down list to add a region from the processed data to the file base name Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button Continuing with our example if processing student test forms you could add a student name region that is being collected from the form so that your data file table name includes the name of the students 10 Click the OK button to save the data The data file s is saved based on your specifications If you named files or folders based on data from your data set you may see separate folders and files For folders there is a separate folder for each unique entry in your data set Within each folder you find the appropriate data file For data files the data file names begin with the region data you chose during the set up process 8 7 Printing Data The Remark Office OMR Data Center allows you to print grid data on any Windows supported printer To print the grid data 1 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the File menu and then click Print or click to display the Print 2 Print Options Options window Print Data Options Set the printing propert
75. order to maintain a level of consistency and achieve optimum recognition rates 4 3 2 a Controlling the TWAIN User Interface Not all TWAIN drivers support having their user interface hidden We recommend that you turn on the option to Show TWAIN interface in the Scanner Properties window When you scan the scanner manufacturer s TWAIN interface appears In this interface you can specify TWAIN settings The following table recaps the settings of which you should be aware Option Appropriate Setting Resolution 200 DPI recommended 300 DPI recommended if using barcodes or OCR Scan Mode Black and White or Line Art the software converts grayscale and color images to black and white but scanning in black and white mode is faster ADF Yes On Page Size Letter or your specific paper size Once you have scanned a page successfully it may be possible to hide the scanner s user interface in Remark Office OMR by turning off the Show TWAIN interface checkbox in the Scanner Properties window If any problems occur you need to show the scanner user interface again Tip If your scanner is used for scanning in programs other than Remark Office OMR there is a good chance its settings will be altered In this case Setting Up Your Scanner we recommend that you make a note of what settings you are using in Remark Office OMR Keep the Show TWAIN interface option on at all times so that you can see what settings are being used a
76. overwriting data Allows you to repackage the processed image files in a new location new format or with new parameters from your data set Applies when processing image files only This feature is useful for archiving images or for placing images in specified locations for later distribution See the next few pages for more details Allows you to delete the originally processed pre scanned images once they have been repackaged into your desired format This feature allows you to maintain only one copy of the images Use caution when using this feature the original images are permanently deleted 7 Click the Next gt gt button to continue 8 In the Select Images to Read area use the drop down list to locate the folder on your computer or network that contains the images you wish to process 9 Once you have located the correct folder select the images you wish to process You may make multiple selections by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking images or holding down the Shift key and selecting a range of images click the first and last image and all images in between are selected 10 Click the Add Selected Images button to move the images into the bottom window Office Read Wizard Image Selection Select the images that you would ike to read Select the Images to Read E Exam Demonstration Files 79a 8n8 Alternatively you can select an entire folder s set of images by clicking the bottom
77. periodically needs to be updated to the latest version when maintenance releases are made available The option to Check for Updates is listed under the Help menu If you are experiencing any problems with Remark Office OMR we advise checking for software updates prior to contacting Remark support This step avoids contacting support for known issues that are already corrected within the software In addition you can have the software automatically check for updates each time it starts up To enable this feature select Tools Preference Check for Updates Then turn on the checkbox for Check for updates when starting The Remark Office OMR Automatic Update collects some system configuration data in order to provide you with updates that apply to your installation This information includes e Product Name e Remark Authentication Code e License Key e Software Version and Build Number e Remark Serial Number e System Finger Print same as activation Gravic Inc is committed to helping protect your privacy Using the automatic update feature does not collect your name address email address or any other form of personally identifiable information Your Internet Protocol IP address is logged when you connect to the Gravic website but this address is only used to generate aggregate statistics Remark Office OMR User s Guide To check for updates manually 1 Select the Help menu and then click Check for Updates You must have an active
78. processing TIF images but want to repackage them as PDF files for others to view e When saving to the PDF or TIF formats you can choose the compression level under Image compression level Uncompressed Group 3 Group 3 2d Group 4 and LZW Group 4 creates the most compressed image smallest file size that takes up less space on your computer e Mark the checkbox for Save multiple page form templates as multiple page image files if you are processing a multi page form and would like all of the images for one complete form to be saved as one image file Using this option creates fewer image files and is recommended 13 If you would like to configure Review Exceptions options click the Next gt gt button to continue Otherwise click the Read button to begin processing image files Note If using Review Exceptions during Server Mode processing stops each time an exception is found until the exception is reviewed If you turn on Review Exceptions in the Read Wizard all processing stops when an exception occurs and does not start again until the exception is addressed You may wish to run Review Exceptions after form processing so that Server Mode can run uninterrupted see Section 7 6 Reviewing Exceptions for more information about Review Exceptions after form processing 14 In the Review Exceptions window specify whether to review exception cases during the reading process by marking the Activate Review Exceptions checkbox 15
79. reading pages and placing data across the selected grid row sequentially However the Data Center does not read past the last highlighted grid row s Advanced Collection Options EZ Start reading from form template page 2 Package and rename images Processing Forms 7 When prompted to overwrite the data click the Overwrite button If you do not wish to overwrite the data for any reason click the Cancel button The Data Center continues processing forms beginning on the selected form template page until all selected pages in the data grid row have been replaced 7 9 Using Form Page and Respondent Detection Remark Office OMR allows for three types of automatic tracking and detection to assist with form processing Auto Form ID Auto Page ID and Respondent Tracker With Auto Form ID Remark Office OMR can automatically recognize a form and match it to its form template allowing you to process various form types at once without pre sorting the forms With Auto Page ID Remark Office OMR takes it a step further and identifies specific page order within a form template if the pages are scanned out of order With Respondent Tracker Remark Office OMR recognizes a specific respondent s page and places it in the correct data grid row with the rest of that respondent s data if the pages are processed out of order Form Page or Respondent IDs can be OMR OCR or Barcode regions Tip You can use delimited barcodes as identifier
80. recommended that you a use the same quality form that you distribute for your form template image and b use the same scanner settings such as brightness for the form template image and the scanned forms However due to real world circumstances that may be beyond your control the filled in forms returned for processing may have some differentiation in brightness For example they may have been photocopied or printed at a lighter density setting Or they may have been scanned on a different scanner or with different scanner settings than those that were used for the form template While Dynamic Brightness Compensation cannot compensate for every instance of form differences it can help you in these situations If the filled in form image is darker or lighter than the template image the software tries to still recognize the regions on the form The Brightness Compensation Threshold determines when to compensate If the brightness of the filled in form image is more than the specified percentage lighter or darker Remark Office OMR attempts to compensate for it when producing data The default percentage is 5 Use a lower percentage to make the software more sensitive to lightness darkness changes compensating more frequently Use a higher percentage to make the software less sensitive to lightness darkness changes allowing larger differences in image brightness before compensating 165 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 166 To use Dynam
81. replace operation However you can search a specific region by highlighting the area you would like to search prior to using Find and Replace See Section 8 3 1 See Making Grid Selections To find text 1 Select the Edit menu and then click Find or click Find Replace 2 If searching for text enter the search Find what ome Word text in the box titled Find what 3 Select the other options you want to Use Daane matches to control th e search ee Search Option Result Case sensitive Mark this checkbox to make the search case sensitive Include partial Mark this checkbox to search for part of the text does not matches require the entire contents of the cell to match what you have entered in the Find what box Search for values If searching for numeric data mark this checkbox to search for greater than or numeric values that are greater than or equal to the value you equal to specified have typed in the Find what box value Search selected Mark this checkbox to search in the selected cell s only block only 4 Click the Find Next button If Remark Office OMR locates a match the grid scrolls to display the cell where the match is found 5 Make any necessary changes to the grid 6 Click Find Next to continue searching 7 When you have completed searching the data click the Close button 178 Working with Your Data To find and replace text 1 Select the Edit menu and then click Repl Rep
82. results see the Remark Quick Stats User s Guide PDF file under Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation for further details e Qualitative response coding allows you to set up codes for the responses you expect to get from your returned forms Instead of typing long responses you can code them into categories or themes When entering the data during form processing you can select a pre defined code from a drop down list as you read the response on screen An additional benefit of qualitative response coding is when you analyze the data in Remark Quick Stats you can run item analysis reports to see a breakdown of the codes chosen for the particular question As an example of qualitative response coding suppose you have a comments question on your survey form You probably want to read those comments However you also might want to be able to quickly see how many responses were positive negative or mixed In the Remark form template you could enter pre defined codes of Positive Negative and Mixed When you process the filled in forms you could read each comment on screen and then choose whether it was a positive negative or mixed response When you analyze the data you could quickly see the number of responses that fell into each category You can also allow more than one coded response per comment You can even combine image clipping and qualitative coding so that you can see a report of the handwritten comments and apply codes
83. reviewed in the section called Review Exceptions Then run Review Exceptions 2 To move to the next exception case on the current form click the Search Forward button re 66 at the bottom of the window You may also press the Enter key on your keyboard to advance to the next exception 3 To skip any remaining exception cases on the current form and move to the next form containing exception cases click the Next Row Next Column button at the bottom of the window 4 When you have completed reviewing exceptions click the Finished button Tip If you need to return to the processed data at a later point to complete reviewing exceptions save the data to the Remark or Remark Archive format These formats save the exception case colors and links to the stored images so that you may continue reviewing the data If the data is exported to other formats these colors and image links are not included in the exported data file See Section 8 6 Saving Data for complete details on saving data 7 7 Using Collate Mode Scanning Double Sided Forms with a Single Side Only Scanner 136 The Remark Office OMR Data Center provides Collate Mode to read duplex double sided forms when you have a simplex single side only scanner Therefore if you do not have a duplex scanner one that reads both sides of a form in a single pass you can still process double sided forms in the software Note If your scanner can scan in duplex mode meaning it sc
84. that it may slow down the processing speed To show and hide the Graph Viewer select the View menu and choose Graph Viewer The Graph Viewer has many options which are summarized in the following table 127 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Icon Option Saj Copy Description Click the Copy button to copy the graph to the Windows clipboard The graph can then be pasted into another application r Oe Print Click the Print button to print the current graph If you drop down the arrow on the Print icon you can choose whether to print in monochrome or color if your printer supports it ee Graph a Title Toggle the Graph Title icon to turn the title over the graph on and off Click the down arrow on the Graph Title icon to choose what to display None no title Question Name or Question Text Please note that the font size used for the Graph Title updates automatically based on the amount of text being displayed fa Graph Type Click the Graph Type icon to cycle through the various graph types Alternatively use the drop down arrow on the Graph Type icon to choose a graph type 3D Bar 2D Bar 3D Pie 2D Pie 3D Area 2D Area and Line EA Graph Data Click the Graph Data icon to cycle through the various graph options Alternatively use the drop down arrow on the Graph Data icon to choose what to graph Frequency base the Y axis on the data set using frequencies Percent Auto Scal
85. the Template Editor window You then need to position the region correctly in the image representation area by dragging it with the mouse 95 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 6 4 2 Copy Special Paste Special If you would like to copy regions from one form template to another you may use the Copy Special and Paste Special features To use copy special and paste special 1 Open the Remark Office OMR Template Editor twice 2 Open one form template in the first instance of the Template Editor and another form template in the second instance of the Template Editor 3 Select the region or regions in the first instance of the Template Editor that you want to copy by clicking them in the tree view Tip You can select multiple regions by holding down Ctrl on the keyboard and clicking each region or by clicking a region holding down Shift on the keyboard and then clicking another region all regions in between the selections are highlighted 4 Select the Edit menu and then click Copy Special 5 In the second instance of the Template Editor select the node in the tree view after which you want to paste the new region s 6 Select the Edit menu and then click Paste Special The new node s region s are pasted after the highlighted node You then need to position the region s correctly in the image representation area by dragging it with the mouse 6 4 3 Drag Drop The drag drop feature allows you to click a region in the tree view and
86. the form template s region properties such as which questions to tabulate and then launches Remark Quick Stats The Survey Wizard allows you to customize the tabulation process by choosing which regions to include assigning numeric values to answer items assigning benchmarks adding question text specifying question groups and more To access survey tabulation features 1 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center open a form template and either open an existing data file or process forms 2 Select the Tools menu then select Analysis and then click Easy Survey or Survey Wizard Alternatively select the Analysis tab in the Task Pane and then choose an analysis option In addition the analysis options are available on the i Easy Survey ij Survey Wizard toolbar Waaa MARA Remark Quick Stats opens allowing you to configure and display reports Please consult the Remark Quick Stats user s guide PDF for further details about using Remark Quick Stats Tip The Survey Wizard and Easy Survey screens and functions are described in complete detail in the Remark Quick Stats User s Guide PDF file Access the file by clicking Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation Remark Quick Stats Data Analysis 9 3 Grading Tests with Remark Quick Stats Tests can be graded in two ways Easy Grade and the Grade Wizard Easy Grade uses the parameters specified in the form template such as which questions to grade and their point values
87. the next step Tatra 500 If you have chosen the Default client click the SMTP Server button Fill in the settings as described in the previous table You will need your network email administrator to provide this information to you Click the OK button SMTP port 25 E IT Enable a secure 8 8 2 Using Email to Send Data Files Once you have set up your email preferences in Tools Preferences see previous section you are ready to start emailing data files To email data files using Microsoft Outlook 1 After processing forms saving data or opening a data file select the File menu and click Email Note If you choose the toolbar option or Task Pane option to send email the file is always in zipped format Choose Data as Attachment to attach the native file to an outgoing email message Choose Data as ZIP Attachment to first zip the native data file compress it into a zip file and then attach it to an outgoing email 195 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Note Your organization or the recipient s organization may have restrictions on the types of files that can be sent via email If the file is restricted and you do not zip it the email may never reach the intended recipient If you are unsure whether the selected file type is restricted use the ZIP option The recipient must have a Zip program to unzip the file and view it The Email Data window appears Email Data Select the appropriate f
88. the tree view of the Template Editor is the order in which they are processed e g the order in which the data appear in your data set You can move regions in the tree view using drag and drop or cut and paste to reorder them Ifyou need to make a change to the form template remember that major changes do not change data that have already been processed thus invalidating your processed data These types of changes include changing Labels rearranging the order of regions and changing the size of a region If you make such changes you need to process your forms again because the existing data no longer matches the form template You can either scan the forms again or read the stored image files from the original scans to recreate your data file If you change your form slightly but have already created a form template you do not have to create a new form template You can scan the new page with the existing form template by using the Reset Images feature in the Template Editor or by editing the page properties and acquiring a new image Once you have scanned or imported a new image use the Auto Align feature to move the existing regions to their proper location on the new image double check positioning after using the Auto Align feature and adjust as needed Test your form and form template with the software before duplicating and distributing forms Create a form template and fill in a few forms to get an idea of how well the form w
89. their extensions and a brief description 203 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 204 File Format Extension Description Remark RMK Remark Office OMR format saves grid exception colors and image links Remark Office ROA Remark Office OMR Archive format combines Archive template data and stored image files into one file Saves grid exception colors and image links Web Survey RWD Remark Web Survey format SQL Server 2000 MDF Microsoft SQL Server format 2005 Oracle 7 4 amp later Oracle format Access 2007 2010 ACCDB Microsoft Access 2007 2010 format only available if the Access 2007 or 2010 database engine is installed Access 2000 2003 MDB Microsoft Access 2000 2003 format Access 95 97 MDB Microsoft Access 95 97 format Access 2 0 MDB Microsoft Access 2 0 format Access 1 0 MDB Microsoft Access 1 0 format Excel 2007 2010 XLSX Microsoft Excel 2007 2010 format only available if the Access 2007 or 2010 database engine is installed Excel 97 2003 XLS Microsoft Excel 97 2003 format Excel 95 XLS Microsoft Excel 95 format Excel 4 0 XLS Microsoft Excel 4 0 format Excel 3 0 XLS Microsoft Excel 3 0 format SPSS SAV SPSS 16 format SPSS Legacy SAV SPSS 6 format Survey Pro SRV Survey Pro standard format Apian Software ASCII commas ASC Comma delimited ASCII ASCII tabs ASC Tab delimited ASCII Spreadsheet TXT Comma delimited ASCII with quotes aro
90. to access help when running Remark Office OMR To access online help 1 To view context sensitive help on the current window press F1 2 To view the main help contents window for Remark Office OMR select the Help menu and then click Contents 31 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 32 Setting Up Your Scanner Chapter 4 4 1 Overview This chapter provides general information about scanners and how to configure your scanner in Remark Office OMR You should already have your scanner connected to your computer and the drivers installed that allow the scanner to work before attempting to use your scanner with Remark Office OMR 4 2 Scanners General Information A scanner is a peripheral device that is attached to a computer to scan paper based documents photographs etc in order to produce equivalent image file representations Remark Office OMR works in conjunction with image scanners which are the type of scanners that are also used for scanning pictures or pages of text and are readily available from your local computer dealer or via mail order and online companies Scanners come in many different models and fall into many different price ranges depending on their performance and features For Remark Office OMR purposes it is recommended that you use a scanner with a sheetfeeder ADF Automatic Document Feeder which allows you to scan multiple pages in batches thus facilitating the data collection process 4 2 1 Scanner C
91. used for new 1 Under Tools Recognition Settings Image Pre Processing mark the checkbox for een ee Deskew Images During Recognition to turn ibe on the deskew image feature 2 Click the OK button r Maximum speckle size to remove pixels 2 x The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again 7 14 k Despeckle Images During Recognition The Despeckle Images During Recognition option applies to pre processed images only Use the Despeckle Images During Recognition option to correct an image that has specks on it Specks are typically caused by colored paper shading on the form using a dark brightness setting on your scanner or a dirty scanner The default setting is off You only need to adjust this setting if your image comes in with speckles To use Despeckle Images During Recognition 1 Under Tools Recognition Settings Image Pre Processing mark the checkbox for Despeckle Images During Recognition to Default Image Pre processing Settings Default Image Pre processing Settings turn on the deskew image featu re Ten oeiee erene ane 2 Choose the Maximum speckle size to Image Pre processing Settings remove in pixels 2 is the default setting If sal the specks are larger you can use a higher Z Deskew images during recognition number A Despeckle Images During Recognition j Maximum speckle size to remove pixels 2 3 Click the OK button The adjusted
92. window opens allowing you to choose a file name a file type the directory in which you would like the file saved and advanced saving options 2 3 4 Select the desired directory location using the Look in drop down box Select a file to update which fills the File name box Select the Database Update ACCDB MDB XLSX XLS format in the box titled Save as type Click the OK button A wizard opens to walk you through the next few steps If you have used the Database Update format previously and have a saved configuration file that applies to this data set click the Load button to locate the configuration file Otherwise go on to step 7 Note You are prompted to save a configuration file with your settings after saving the data In the Update Options area select the number of records contained in each row of the data set e g if multiple respondents answers are on a single form you would have more than one record per data row If each record in the data set corresponds to one respondent s submission use 1 for the value In the Update Options area mark the Add database records for missing record identifiers checkbox if you would like to create new records in the database when an identifier is not found In the Field Mapping area map the regions from Remark Office OMR to the fields in the external database The target database fields are listed in the first column called Database Field and the Remark Off
93. you may turn off the Task Pane by clicking View Task Pane The right side of the window contains an eesaearoesiss image representation of your form You provide this image via the scanner or a saved image file You may use the tree view and the image representation area to work with your form template Each region in the tree view contains the properties of that region which are accessed by double clicking the region You may think of a region as a question or item on your form You may also double click within a region in the image representation area to view the region s properties Continue with the following sections for specific instructions on using the Template Editor 6 2 2 Region Types Regions are explained in more detail later in this chapter but it is worth providing an overview here There are four basic region types that Remark Office OMR can process Region Type OMR Optical Mark Recognition What is on Your Form Bubbles checkboxes or any other complete shape often used for answering multiple choice questions filling in names and codes etc Using the Template Editor Description OMR regions are used to capture marks such as bubbles and checkboxes on your form Marks can be used to collect many varying types of information ranging from multiple choice questions to ID numbers to names Barcode Horizontal or Barcodes are used to encode just about any vertically desired inf
94. you are capturing Be sure to make the OCR region large enough to capture the longest text you plan to recognize Using the Template Editor 3 Inthe Properties OCR Region box enter the appropriate properties for the region on the OCR region properties screen as described previously There are additional more advanced features that may be defined These features are discussed in detail beginning with Section 6 3 1 4 Click the OK button RA After creating an OCR region you see the region in the image representation area and a new node is added to the tree view Each OCR region is purple to differentiate the regions 6 3 Advanced Region Options Each region type OMR OCR Image and Barcode has a set of more advanced properties associated with it that are optional When creating fields you see only those options appropriate for the type of region you are creating Use the navigation bar in the left section of the region properties window to access the additional features Each advanced option is explained in detail in the following sections 6 3 1 Region Item Properties The Region item properties section of the Region Properties window allows you to define test and survey analysis options recognition thresholds and exception handling Each item is described below 6 3 1 a Test Settings Remark Office OMR provides useful test grading features that you can customize You decide which regions to grade and set t
95. you may modify For example you could write an Access report to provide change information by user by form template etc Note If you change the structure of the Access tables from what was originally designed the database may stop functioning with Remark Office OMR Remark Support cannot troubleshoot Access features or issues 209 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 210 Remark Quick Stats Data Analysis Chapter 9 9 1 Overview Remark Quick Stats is an analysis package that ships with the Remark Office OMR software Remark Quick Stats allows you to tabulate surveys and grade tests right in the software An overview of Remark Quick Stats is provided here a complete user s guide is installed in PDF format with the software and can be found by clicking Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation Remark Quick Stats User s Guide Depending on the report selected Remark Quick Stats can include the following statistics Survey statistics and reports include For each item Remark Quick Stats calculates Mean Variance Standard Deviation Standard Error Min Max Range Median Skewness Kurtosis T Value Percentiles Confidence Intervals For each answer choice Remark Quick Stats calculates Frequencies Percentages Valid Percent A Response Report displays the responses for any particular question on one easy to read report primarily used for open ended questions Crosstabs A Group Report displaying means for
96. you plan to scan duplex now mark the checkbox for Scan arte sucrats tothe comecei seanar duplex m aes 6 Enable or disable the checkbox for Show aaa api TWAIN interface by clicking the checkbox As v Sa stated earlier we recommend turning on this caret Bk hte option the first time you scan in order to CHECK _ pins races onion Seamer opten Despeckle Images scanner settings 7 Optionally set any other parameters as needed D ostow image based on the previous descriptions Many T settings do not need to be adjusted unless you encounter difficulties 8 Click the OK button to save the scanner settings Important Note It is important to make note of the settings you choose for your scanner When you create a form template in Remark Office OMR you will be using these settings When you are ready to scan filled in forms you need to use the same settings that you used to create the form template If you change scanner settings you run the risk of creating images that do not match the form template thus making it difficult for Remark Office OMR to accurately read the forms 4 3 2 Configuring a TWAIN Driver Most TWAIN drivers do not require any special adjustments but some drivers may have special requirements If you experience problems scanning in Remark Office OMR with your TWAIN driver use the following sections for assistance 39 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 40 When scanning in Remark Office OMR with
97. you to the next duplicate record within the same group The Next Group arrow takes you to the next group of duplicates you may have more than one set of duplicates within the same region Similarly the Previous Record arrow takes you back to the previous duplicate record within the same group and the Previous Group record takes you back to the previous group of duplicate records If you have chosen to review the duplicate records you have two options You can choose a specific record and delete it manually by clicking the Delete button Or you may click the Finish button and then review the region again Then to perform a mass function in the Action drop down list choose the appropriate action Keep only first duplicate records Keep only last duplicate record or Delete all duplicate records Any one of these three choices applies to all sets of duplicate records within the region If you choose any action that causes records to be deleted you receive a warning message to ensure that you want to delete the records Note that once the records to launch the Review Duplicates Task 159 Remark Office OMR User s Guide are deleted they cannot be recovered unless you process the forms again If you are sure you want to proceed click the Yes button The requested action is taken 8 Ifyou wish to search for more duplicates in other regions repeat steps 3 through 7 9 When you are finished reviewing duplicates
98. 180 Remark Office OMR includes a Spell Checker that checks Data Entry Image regions Barcode regions OCR regions and OMR regions for misspellings The spell checker works from the dictionary in the Remark Office OMR Preferences To choose a dictionary select Tools Preferences File Storage Locations or click To use the Spell Checker 1 Select the Tools menu and then click Perform spell check or click 2 Inthe Spell Checker window choose the desired options Option Description Search data entry Mark this checkbox to perform spell checking on Image regions regions set to the Data Entry type Search barcode Mark this checkbox to perform spell checking on Barcode regions regions Working with Your Data Option Description Search OCR Mark this checkbox to perform spell checking on OCR regions regions Search OMR Mark this checkbox to perform spell checking on OMR regions regions Ignore words with numbers Mark this checkbox to skip spell checking any numeric text Ignore words in upper case Mark this checkbox to skip spell checking on words that begin in upper case Ignore words in mixed case Mark this checkbox to skip spell checking on any words that use mixed case capitalization 3 Click the Start button to begin the search When an item matches your specified criteria the Spell Checker shows you the flagged word and offers suggestions if possible You may choose a suggestion or
99. 6 Click the Next gt gt button to continue The Se eee Detection Results window appears Print or export the respondent detection results below Detection Results 80 16 out of 20 respondents detected in the database 7 Use the Detection Results window to view your results The main region on which you are basing the detection is listed first You then see a Detected column that marks the values that were detected The Duplicates column is next which marks any duplicate values that are found After the Duplicates column you see any additional return fields from the external database that you selected in Step 5 if you selected any 8 If desired use the Export button to save the results to an external file You may click the Export button to export the entire set of results or use the arrow on the Export button to select which portions of the results to export The export options are as follows Student ID Detected Duplicates Name L Denna Smal Thomas Jone Rachel Marks O BobLee O Jonathan Fin Mark Smith Lauren Browr oO Jay atkins O Bill Brooks Sean Wilson Linda Bayer OO Dan Fields oO Amy Johnsor May Newcom Greg Robinsc ORARAA DOA AOA NA R RK R lt lt Back Option Function Export Exports all results region detected missing duplicates and additional fields Export Exports only the missing respondents those that ex
100. A ESEE neve TATE ses 279 8 10 Opening Dala vievis nuo aT OA a ea A A es 288 8 11 Data Center LOJIO cerra anana Aaa eea NAAA ARa TEDAN PEDIR 206 Remark Quick Stats Data Analysis 297 OAL OVERVIEW besscrinaate Soutit else Suvike ode tos A sure oualy ouites TTE 297 9 2 Tabulating Surveys with Remark Quick Stats cceceeeeeeeeeee reas 212 9 3 Grading Tests with Remark Quick Stats ceceeeeee eee e eee ees 213 Remark Office OMR Data Center Preferences 301 LO sd OVE VEW ore aao OAE Vale wen OE teu Punk OE EN 301 10 2 General Preferences ssssssrssrssrrerrssrssnsensensennornorrorrnernnnranean 302 10 3 File Storage Location Preferences s sssssrrssserrrrrsrerrnrrnrerinrns 304 10 4 Custom Font PreferenceS sssssssssrssrsssrssessrrsrrrerrrnrnrrrrrrrnnann 219 10 5 Email Preferences anniina a o e A A AE A a A A 307 1076 CHANGE LOG rarena nann a vacds ga AEEA KATERA TAE RNANA NEATE 221 10 7 Check for Updates siiani tanii disaat biana a eia aaa i Madea 311 Tips and Helpful Hints 313 Acl OVErView ir TEAG EEAO O AENA 313 A 2 E E E A E E E E N eis EE 313 A3 FORMS seua Aan Ra aaa nia aide EEA ARa 224 A 4 Form Templates e a a O E aAA RAAE ADEA EE AREEN 316 A S Reading FOM Savanna ea e AA A A dart tae a a 318 A 6 Working with the Dat a sssssssssrrrrsserrrrnseurrrrnneurrrrnrsnerrnrrnnns 319 ALTSAMALYSIS a A tine sansa sige A eda AA D EEEE 228 Understanding Error Messages 321 B 1 Error Message Detalls
101. Add All Images button The ett ian ie eo images are moved to the Images in ee a Read Order box The selected images are k a amp Image Files pox tif pdF bmp dex jpg ipeg png tiFF x E Exam Answer Sheet2010 01 12_ he Sheet2010 01 1 Sheet2010 01 1 Exam Answer Sheet2010 01 1 Exam Answer Sheet2010 01 1 Exam Answer Sheet2010 01 1 xi Exar E Exam Answer Sheet2010 01 12_10 46 07 46 tif I Exam Answer Sheet2010 01 12_ et2010 01 12_10 46 00 15 tiF E E eet2i j over Sheet2010 01 1210 46 08 82 8f E Exam Acer SheetZ010 01 12 t2010 01 1 s Remark Office OMR User s Guide processed in the order in which they appear in this box 11 If an image appears in the Images in Read Order box and you wish to remove it select the image and then click Remove You may make multiple selections by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking images or holding down the Shift key and selecting a range of images click the first and last image and all images in between are selected You can also remove all images by clicking the Remove All button 12 Click the Next gt gt button to continue If you are using the Package and rename images option proceed to step 13 If you are not using this feature proceed to Step 14 13 OPTIONAL If you chose the Package and rename images option on the first step of the Read Wizard the Image Naming Conventions window appears The Image Naming Conventions window allows you to specify optio
102. An Image region has the following basic properties Property Function Region name A name assigned to an Image region Region names are used as grid column headers in the data grid window and are exported when saving data to common file formats Region names are limited to 60 characters Region type Sets the type of Image region Image Clip Data Entry or Data Entry and Image Clip Use Image Clip to have Remark Office OMR capture an image of the region for later viewing and output the location of the image in the data grid e g C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Images image1 pcx Use Data Entry to hand enter the data that is captured in a region Use Data Entry and Image Clip to both hand enter information e g apply qualitative response codes or use a default fill and store clipped images of the handwritten information 71 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 72 Property Data type Data Entry Image region only Default fill Data Entry Image region only Function Sets whether the data should be considered textual or numeric when saved exported Sets a default entry to be used in the Image region The information typed here is automatically output to the data grid when forms are processed You may also select one of the following items from the drop down list to be used as a default fill option Time Stamp Date Stamp Time and Date Stamp Record Number Page Number Record and Page Number
103. Editor The software automatically converts older form templates to the new version Form template files are not backward compatible Once a form template has been converted to the new version it cannot be opened in a previous version of the software Always make copies of form templates before converting them Tip If you accidentally convert a form template without backing it up first and then want to use it in the previous software version you will find a file with a old extension in your form templates folder the folder from which you originally opened the form template You may rename this file with a omr extension and then open it in the previous version of Remark Office OMR To edit a form template 1 If not already running start the Remark Office OMR Template Editor program 2 Select the File menu and then click Open or click a You may also use the Recent Files option under the File menu or the Task Pane to open files 3 Select the form template you would like to edit 4 Click the Open button The form template is displayed in the tree view with the image representation area on the right 5 Double click within the boundaries of any region you want to edit or double click the node representing the region in the tree view to display the Region Properties window If you would like to rescan the pages of the form template select the Tools menu and then click Reset Images 6 Make the desired changes to the region s pr
104. Guide 236 Class Category Error 7210 Error Text The installable ISAM you are using does not allow updates and or deletes to records in external tables You can add new records though 7211 You cannot use ODBC to access an external Microsoft Access or ISAM database table Use Remark Office OMR s direct support of the database instead 7300 ODBC Errors 7300 7301 Using ODBC you tried to perform an operation on data in a SQL database This error may occur when the SQL database is on a network drive and the network is not connected or when the path specified is invalid An error occurred attempting to update the ODBC table Possible causes could be the database is read only the database is on a network drive and the network is not connected or the update would have caused a rule violation 7302 The ODBC remote query timeout expired The ODBC server may not be properly installed or a required network connection isn t active Check the network connection or contact your system administrator and then try the operation again 7303 The ODBC table definition has changed since you created the link End the current operation and then retry 7304 An error occurred attempting to lock records in the ODBC database All records in the database cannot be locked 7400 Database Index Errors 7400 An error occurred attempting to create an index for the database because the inde
105. ID and subjective regions learning objectives benchmarks multiple test versions custom report headers and a grade scale in the answer key file Use the program s Preferences to set global options so that you can take advantage of Easy Survey and Easy Grade for fast and simple reporting These reports utilize the settings in your Remark Office OMR preferences and the associated form template file Save reports as internal report files from within Remark Quick Stats if you feel that you will need to recall them Saving a modified report can save a great deal of time if you need to reuse it When grading tests remember that you can select an answer key in one of several ways 1 scan the answer key as the first grid row of the data 2 scan the answer key when you perform the grade operation 3 import an image of your form with the correct responses 4 enter a grid row containing the answer key when you perform the grade operation 5 reopen an answer key file that contains the answer key when you perform the grade operation or 6 utilize a generic answer key file setup ahead of time in the Grade Wizard Grade Wizard Utility Take advantage of the Report Batch Wizard to display print and or export multiple reports at one time This wizard also allows you to auto filter data based on the values in up to three template regions saving you time as compared to using the regular filter options Understanding Error Messages Appendix B B 1 Er
106. IN Driver sssssssssssrsssssrnrnsrnrrrrrrnserran 39 4 3 2 a Controlling the TWAIN User Interface 40 4 3 2 b Obtaining Updated TWAIN Drivers 055 41 4 4 Multi Functional PeripheralS ccccccscceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeenaes 41 Designing Scannable Forms 43 Bel OVERVICW se eesiveins eerie kav owls Yds Cane levi ieee eau ey 43 5 2 Finding an Application for Designing FOrms seceeeeeeee eee ees 44 5 3 Mark Selection for OMR Optical Mark Recognition c ceeeeeees 44 5 4 Character Selection for OCR Optical Character Recognition 45 5 5 ROP SPacinG a towasececcuvowles eeaea a O NA EEEE AEAEE EEA aia 45 5 6 Grouping QUESOS s oeren ak rran eee eee EALES R IRER EANES EERE EEEF EENE 46 57 Shading iiair ea a EAA E ube AE E aa G 46 5 8 MARGINS sirvitetierndd ee cecevawerevsccweas na tinge n a ded aaae eei 47 5 9 orgel e E A A A A wicleledate gd ach 47 5 9 1 The Code 3 of 9 Barcode sssssssserrsrrsrrsrrsrrsrrrerresres 48 DIO PADET onenaren nanan T EA AA Aaaa AA a REAT E AAA 49 l F fmM DUPIIGATION te e a weed E TA sais TAARA A RATA 49 pL Forme teStihg sicccterccetatieitinnaiee E aE A EEEE ORNEK eee 50 5 13 F rm Review SEnVvViCe Loin narrar ois tee tine uae EERE RA Sates 50 Using the Template Editor 51 G FOVET EW pasie e EENET ERIEIN ENEA 51 6 2 Creating Form Templates ssssssssssrrrrssrrrrrnusrrrrrnnsrerrnnnurerrnnns 52 6 2 1 Understanding the Template Editor Interface
107. If you wish to allow multiple response codes to be applied to each question click the Region item properties link in the Task Pane Under Multiple Exception Handling select the number of multiple responses allowed choose Allow all for no limit 7 Optional If you want to be able to tabulate the question with the qualitative codes while on the Region item properties screen mark the radio button for Tabulate this item Image regions are not set to tabulate by default 8 Click the OK button After creating an Image region a new node is added to the tree view Image regions are blue in the image representation area 74 Using the Template Editor 6 2 10 Barcode Regions Barcodes are a reliable way to capture information from a form while using a small amount of space Barcodes can be placed directly on a form or on a sticker that is placed on a form The barcode must be located in the same position on each form You can create barcodes using special barcode generation software or by using a barcode font in a word processing program Barcodes can be placed horizontally or vertically on the form The barcode should be at least 26 points in terms of size about 1 4 inch high A single barcode can contain one or more pieces of data If using multiple pieces of data within one barcode you must separate the data with a delimiter e g comma space tab etc When separating the data make sure you choose a delimiter that
108. Mark the checkbox for Save images in a subfolder based on the form template s name to have the Data Center automatically create a folder in which to store these images The folder name is the name of the form template and the folder is created in the directory you have selected in the Image target directory box Tip We recommend using the Save images in a subfolder based on the form template s name feature for easier organization of image files Use of this feature keeps all images associated with each form template in one folder for easy access The unique date and time portion of the image names prevents images from being overwritten e Optional If desired click the Name Builder button to further customize the stored image names and locations o Inthe Image Base Name area you may choose to add a region from the processed data to the image base name Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button If you already added a region on the previous screen the Name Builder allows you to add additional kretesem m nape arifa ante sirro tosses n ler anti regions For example if See processing tests you could exo add a Student Name field Bauder that is being collected from a the form so that your Suse Ser Eee nae repackaged images all begin with the students names a Pienso nota tht nape names wl aleo conan the corresponding fom templeto page umber E form tong o Inthe Image Target a Directory area you ma
109. Note If desired you can click the drop down arrow on the Read button and choose Save or Save and Read If you choose one of the save options your Read Wizard settings are saved as an Automation Wizard file rez The Automation Wizard is used to automate form processing Please see the Remark Office OMR Automation Wizard User s Guide pdf file Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation included with your software for more information about the Automation Wizard The Data Center continues processing images until all of the specified images are read You then see a spreadsheet of data Each row represents one complete form and each column represents each question you defined in the form template 7 4 Image Viewer 126 Remark Office OMR includes an Image Viewer at the bottom of the screen that displays an image of each processed form It is used to view handwritten comments for data entry and qualitative coding as well as for reviewing exceptions and making corrections The Image Viewer eliminates the need to refer back to the original megnem Ammen paet paper form To show and hide the Image Viewer select the View menu and choose Image Viewer The following options are available a om on the Image Viewer Processing Forms Icon Option Description Print Click the Print button to print the current image A printer window appears where you can choose and configure a printer Rotate Click the Rot
110. Office OMR User s Guide 92 respondent See Section 7 9 for further details about processing forms using Auto Page ID regions Tip Page IDs can be used alone if you only want to recognize various pages within the same form If you want to be able to recognize various pages within different forms at the same time you need to use Form IDs as well 6 3 3 c Setting up a Respondent Tracker Region Respondent Tracker regions can be setup to identify each respondent s form To use Respondent Tracker you must also have a page identifier on each page of your form see previous section When you create a paper form place optical marks e g bubbles computer generate text or barcodes on every form page to identify the individual respondents For example if the respondent fills in an identifier such as name or ID number on each page or you have such information captured in a barcode these regions could be used as Respondent Trackers These markings must be unique from any other types of identifiers you are using such as Form IDs or Page IDs Each respondent identifier must also be unique among all respondents However the Respondent Tracker output must be the same for each page within a particular respondent s form Note If using barcodes as identifiers and the barcodes contain multiple pieces of data within a single barcode called Barcode Contains Multiple Items in the Barcode Properties window you can set up tracking after creatin
111. Region Page Tip There are several ways to create regions menus toolbar right clicking in the image representation tree or the Task Pane These options are covered in greater detail in Section 6 2 4 Creating Regions Try creating regions using each method and then decide which way you prefer 2 Use the mouse to drag a box around the image region in the image representation area Capture the entire area in which you expect respondents to write Comments 3 Inthe Properties Image Region box enter the appropriate properties for the region on the Image region properties screen as described on the previous page There are additional more advanced features that may be defined These features are Veter vm discussed in detail beginning with Section Region type image dip o E Attempt to detect the presence of hardwriong n the regon 6 3 1 4 Optional If you would like to enter response Eitsi regon n son codes for qualitative analysis click the Question text names and response ES codes link in the Task Pane on the left side Of m the Properties window a 5 Optional Enter the desired codes you wish to use for qualitative analysis in the Codes column Assign a numeric value to each code for statistical analysis in the Values column e g for calculating means Note that you may also use pre defined codes in the Available scales drop down list to quickly fill the Codes and Values columns 6 Optional
112. Remark Office OMR Version 8 User s Guide GRAVIC Remark Products Group 301 Lindenwood Drive Suite 100 Malvern Pennsylvania 19355 1772 USA www gravic com Remark Office OMR User s Guide Disclaimer The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Gravic Inc who assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions Gravic Inc reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes to the products described herein for the purpose of product improvement at any time without obligation to notify any person of such revisions or changes Notice The information contained in this document is the exclusive property of Gravic Inc This work is protected under United States Copyright Law and other international copyright treaties and conventions No part of this work may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording or by any information storage or retrieval system except as expressly permitted in writing by Gravic Inc All requests should be sent to Gravic Inc 301 Lindenwood Drive Suite 100 Malvern PA 19355 USA Attention Product Manager Trademarks Remark Office OMR Remark Web Survey Remark Classic OMR and Remark Quick Stats are registered trademarks of Gravic Inc Other products mentioned are trademarks of their respective holders Copyright Copyri
113. Remark Quick Stats can then use the region to sort the tests into their respective groups so that they are Properly peer graded pese ms 4 Inthe Test Point System section select the type of question Objective item or Subjective item 5 If using an Objective item enter the values for Correct points Incorrect points and No Response points that are appropriate for the region You may use a negative number i ma deamnn to subtract points for incorrect or unanswered ed 80 Using the Template Editor questions if desired You may also use decimal places Note A single question can have multiple correct responses which you can designate when scanning the answer key or using the Grade Wizard However you cannot utilize partial credit on a per response basis e g a 1 point b 2 points c 3 points etc 6 If desired mark the All points awarded should be treated as extra credit checkbox to mark the question as extra credit Note you can also mark regions as extra credit in the Grade Wizard when grading 7 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view 6 3 1 b Survey Settings Remark Office OMR provides useful survey tabulation features that you can customize You decide which regions to tabulate The following table lists the region types and their default survey settings Region Type Survey Status OMR Multiple Rank Boolean and List Tabulated Grid Add and Binary Not Tabulated
114. Template Editor If you already have an existing form you wish to process add the bubbles text or barcodes to the form to identify the individual form pages These markings must be unique for each page on the form They should also be unique from any other types of identifiers you are using such as Form IDs or Respondent Tracking identifiers An example could be the words Page 1 in barcode format Alternatively you could place bubbles on the form and mark them as 1 2 3 etc depending on how many pages you have in a particular form to identify each particular page Note If using barcodes as identifiers and the barcodes contain multiple pieces of data within a single barcode called Barcode Contains Multiple Items in the Barcode Properties window you can set up tracking after creating the barcode region Set up the barcode as usual You then see it listed in the tree view with a plus sign Click the plus sign to expand the barcode showing its separate pieces of output Then select the individual item from the tree view to which you want to apply the tracking To set up a Page ID region 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Tracking link in the left Task Pane 3 Mark the checkbox for Use Region as Unique Identifier 4 Select the radio button for Page ID region s value identifies the specific page during the read operation 5 If using an OMR region type in the ID value
115. Test MRG 9 Report RPT 10 Spreadsheet Commas TXT 11 Spreadsheet Tabs TXT 12 SPSS Legacy SAV 13 Survey Pro SRV SRV 34 35 36 37 38 36 39 40 41 43 44 ODBC Custom ASC TXT Survey Pro STL STL ST3 HTML HTM HTML Lotus WK4 WK4 WKS Survey Pro STL STL ST3 Lotus WK3 WK3 Lotus WK1 WK1 XML XML Remark Office Archive ROA Questionmark QSF 207 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 14 Survey System DAT 15 Access 2000 2003 MDB 16 Access 95 97 MDB 20 dBase V DBF 21 dBase IV DBF 23 Excel 97 2003 XLS 24 Excel 95 XLS 31 Paradox 5 DB 45 46 47 48 49 52 53 54 Database Update ACCDB MDB XLSX XLS ODBC Database Update Access 2007 2010 ACCDB Excel 2007 2010 XLSX Paradox 7 8 DB SQL Server Oracle SPSS SAV Flags Table The Actions Table displays the list of possible exception flags that are logged 0 None 1 Blank Response 2 Multiple Response 4 Recognition Error 8 Barcode Error To turn on logging 16 32 64 128 256 Data Entry OCR Error Database Verification Duplicate Response Required 1 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the Tools menu then click Preferences then Change Log 2 Mark the checkbox for Enable Change Logging 3 Ente
116. The log file contains the work you were doing so that it can be restored when you restart the software You are prompted to load the log file in the event of an unexpected termination Use of this feature is strongly recommended Dictionary Dictionary Use this setting to specify where the spell Settings location checker dictionary is located The default location is the Windows System32 folder Active dictionary Use this setting to choose the dictionary you want to use for the spell checker Any dictionaries installed on your system are displayed in the list 6 7 2 OMR Region Preferences The OMR Regions screen allows you to setup default settings to be used when creating new OMR regions When creating new OMR regions the selected settings are used automatically However you can always change individual OMR region properties as you go The following options are available Section Default Region Definition Using the Template Editor Preferences Preferences Set the preference values to use throughout the application as well as the default region values to use when inserting Preferences Default Region Definition i General Set general preferences sic OMR regions Set default OMR region properties Sig Image regions Set default Image region properties Sig Barcode regions Set default Barcode region properties gig OCR regions Set default OCR region properties Option OMR type OMR type Mu
117. There are two tutorials included with the software which are accessed by clicking Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation Tutorials The tutorials are PDF files that can be printed or read on screen you need the Adobe Acrobat Reader to use these files www adobe com This User s Guide contains answers to many of the common questions and or problems users potentially face and includes Understanding Error Messages and Tips and Helpful Hints appendices to help you solve and avoid problems 1 1 What is Included with your Software Each purchase of Remark Office OMR includes the following e One copy of the software on CD ROM or via download e Five user s guides all in PDF format all files install with the software o Remark Office OMR 8 user s guide o Remark Quick Stats user s guide o Remark Office OMR Automation Wizard user s guide o Remark Office OMR FTP Utility user s guide o Understanding File Formats user s guide Remark Office OMR Overview 30 days of free technical support from the date of purchase see Section 1 3 for further details regarding technical support 1 2 New Features in this Version Remark Office OMR 8 has many new features The following list provides an overview of what is new in this version Please see the specific sections of this user s guide corresponding to the listed feature for complete details All of the new features in this version are too numerous to mention We have hi
118. Unrecognized Image Utility appears If you have chosen to review unrecognized images during form processing the window appears for each unrecognized form ID region If you have chosen not to review during form processing the images are stored in a queue so that you can process them all at once later To use the Unrecognized Image Utility for Auto Form ID regions 1 Follow the directions in Section 7 9 Form Page and Respondent Detection to begin form processing using Auto Form ID 2 When the Unrecognized Image Utility appears for an unrecognized image the Form Templates list is empty Click the drop down list to choose the correct form 145 Remark Office OMR User s Guide template for this image Use the Image Viewer in the right portion of the screen to assist with understanding which form has been processed 3 Optional If desired click the Cancel button to skip recognizing this image This might be appropriate if the wrong form was scanned or the wrong image was processed If desired use the Skip Image or Discard Image options 4 Once you have matched a form to its form Ti pe el ct pepe any template click the Read button to continue processing TE ee 5 If using the Unrecognized Image Utility during form processing forms continue to be read until you end the read process If reviewing unrecognized images after form processing once all forms have been identified the Unrecognized Image Utility closes automatically
119. a set If saving for the first time or using Save Data As the Save Data window opens allowing you to choose a file name a file type the directory in which sepata se you would like the file saved and Advanced saving options Look in E Data 71CeCa Gb B D 2 Select the desired directory location using the Look in drop down box 3 Enter a name in the box titled File name 4 Select the desired output format in the box titled ra mex Save as type Save as type Remark RMK 5 If saving to a database type that supports internal table names enter a table name in the box titled Table name Note Each database format has different table name limitations Refer to your database documentation for information on table name limitations When saving to a database where one or more fields are too small to hold the data being saved Remark Office OMR attempts to resize the database column so that it can hold the data being saved 6 When exporting you can save the column headers for certain formats by selecting the Save headers checkbox The Save headers checkbox only displays when appropriate 7 Click the OK button to save the file 8 6 1 Advanced Saving Options When saving data to certain formats you have the option of setting advanced parameters The Advanced Save window shows you each question and pertinent information about the question region You can then choose options about the region that you want incl
120. a TWAIN driver there are several basic settings that you want to use Remark Office OMR supports color and grayscale scanning However it is not necessary Most scanners achieve optimum scanning rates when used in black and white scanning mode sometimes called line art If you choose to scan in grayscale or color you will likely experience slower scan rates The resolution on the scanner measured in dots per inch DPI should be set at 200 300 DPI 200 DPI is usually sufficient but you may wish to use 300 DPI if you are scanning barcodes or using OCR optical character recognition If your scanner allows you to adjust the scaling setting you want it to be set at 100 You should also verify that the page size your scanner is using matches the actual paper size you are scanning You can also utilize the scanner s brightness sometimes called threshold and contrast settings to make scanned images lighter or darker Under normal conditions you want to use the scanner s default brightness and contrast settings If however you need to make shading or a lightly colored paper background drop out disappear you could raise the brightness setting to accomplish these tasks On the same token you could set the brightness setting to a darker level to help compensate for light marks or lightly filled marks on forms Tip It is important to remember that the settings used to create the form template should also be used to scan the filled in forms in
121. a blank response but there is no text indicating that the question was required Flagging required questions is particularly useful when you use the Review Exceptions function during form processing meaning the processing stops so that you can review the problem Note that you should use caution when making questions required and using the Flag Blanks setting If Flag Blanks is set to Never anything left blank does not display as a required item exception Multiple None Gray Signifies that multiple exceptions were exceptions found in the region For example an OCR region that is also being used as a Database Lookup region might not be recognized properly In this case it is both an OCR recognition exception and a Database Lookup exception The gray color lets you know that more than one issue was found Remark Office OMR offers image assisted exception reviewing using the Image Viewer which eliminates searching through paper forms to make corrections to the data You can resolve exception cases in one of two ways editing individual cells or using the Review Exceptions feature during or after form processing Note The exception colors in the grid are only retained if you save data to the Remark or Remark Office Archive data formats Once you export your data to another format if you reopen that format the grid colors are not present Please see Section 8 6 for detailed information about saving data 7 6 1 Reviewing Ex
122. abels on this screen Question text and names are only displayed for the selected question s Using the Template Editor 4 Make the desired changes 5 Click the OK button to save your changes and return to the tree view 6 7 Template Editor Preferences The Remark Office OMR Template Editor comes with a set of preferences to help you use the software optimally Use these preferences to customize the software to the way you use it By setting defaults the software works in a way that you use most often Keep in mind that these are only default settings you can change individual form templates at any time There are five preference areas you can customize General OMR regions Image regions Barcode regions and OCR regions Using the Template Editor preferences 1 Select the Tools menu and then click Preferences or click a to access the preferences 2 Select the link in the Task Pane corresponding to the preference you wish to edit 3 Make the appropriate changes 4 Click the OK button to save the changes Preferences are global changes and take effect the next time you use the applicable feature Changing the preferences does not affect existing form templates and regions 6 7 1 General Preferences The General screen allows you to customize general features of the Template Editor The following options are available Preferences Preferences c Set the preference values to use throughout the application as
123. administrator to obtain information about your SMTP server Please use the following table as a guide to have your administrator provide the proper settings Email Message Provide the information needed to send your emai il message EmailMessage SMTP Settings someone example com From someone example com Subject My Data rmk Attachments My Data rmk Tahoma Here is the data file you requested SMIP Server Specify the settings needed to send messages through your SMTP server Email Message SMTP Settings be sent through your SMTP server SMTP port 25 IT Use the default credentials of the currently logged in user caitiseconds Throttle rate 500 Option Description SMTP This is the name address or IP address of the mail server Server SMTP port The SMTP port is usually 25 but may vary with your email server Enable a If desired use a secure connection by marking the checkbox for secured Enable a secured SSL connection SSL encrypts data as it is SSL transmitted Your SMTP server must be configured to use SSL in order connection for this feature to work Use the If you need to use authentication for your SMTP server you can enter default credentials or use those of the user logged into the computer Mark credentials the Use the default credentials of the currently logged in user of the checkbox to utilize the user s credentials e g the person logged i
124. age If you leave the Begin image names with option blank your images only have the page number if applicable date and time as the name of each image NOTE If you are processing images for multiple form templates using the Auto Form ID feature as long as all open form templates have a region name in common you may use that region as your Begin image names with choice Remark Office OMR names the images appropriately by pulling the data from the corresponding form template file e Inthe Image target directory box click the ellipsis button to select a location in which to store the repackaged images for this form You may use the default directory for images or select a different directory on your computer external drive or network Read Note Choose the image location carefully The images should remain in this location once the data is saved using the RMK format if you want to retain the link between the processed data and each image file This link allows you to view the forms on screen as you click through the data grid making it easy to correct exceptions in your data Therefore you should plan ahead on how you will store these images when the forms are processed Tip If you are sharing files with other Remark Office OMR users you may wish to save the repackaged image files on a shared network drive that all users have access to in the same manner e g through a mapped network drive 124 Processing Forms e
125. age file and is useful if your form has changed slightly but you have already created a form template Response Scales Response Accesses the Scales that have been saved so that you Scales may edit them or create new scales Scales are used as Ctrl Q Labels when creating OMR regions and Image regions using qualitative response codes and are the output you see when processing forms Auto Align Remark Office OMR attempts to align regions based on Form where they were originally created and the current form Template image This feature is useful after resetting images If there are slight differences between the original image and the new image the regions are adjusted accordingly Note You should review the form template after aligning to ensure regions are positioned correctly Z Perform Checks the open form template for spelling errors in the Spell Check region names labels and question text F7 EJ Scanner Accesses the Scanner Properties window so that you Properties may set up a scanner or make changes to the current F8 setup z Preferences Allows you to modify settings that control the way the F9 Template Editor looks feels and performs Use the Task Data Center Options Pane to perform software customization Remark Office OMR saves any changes you make and applies them to future actions Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item read wizard Read Wizard Opens the Read Wizard so that you may read page s F5
126. ame The question name region name of the applicable question that was changed e Question Text The question text if applicable of the corresponding question that was changed e Original Value The original value stored prior to making any changes e Original Flag If an exception flag existed originally e g BLANK it is listed Note that this is a numeric value that corresponds to the items in the Exceptions Working with Your Data Legend in the Data Center For example a MULT is the first item in the list so it is listed as 1 See Flag Types Table below for a complete listing e New Value The text that was entered during the change process e New Flag If a new exception flag was applied it is listed See Flag Types Table below for a complete listing e System Name The name of the system where Remark Office OMR was running during the change process e Windows User The Windows name of the logged in user who made the changes e Change Date The date and time the changes were made Actions Table The Actions Table displays the list of possible actions that are logged 0 Modify 1 Insert 2 Delete 3 Clear Sort Open Save Read File Types Table The File Types Table displays the list of data file types that are displayed in the Actions table when data is saved or opened 2 Remark RMK 3 ASCII Commas ASC 4 ASCII Tabs ASC 5 CCI Assessment DAT 6 DIF Files DIF 8 LXR
127. an entire batch of forms using the adjusted positions Suppose you discover that the new batch of forms was created off of a different printer or photocopied from a new photocopier You may wish to save the adjusted form template so that you can continue using it with the newly offset forms or to re read the current batch with the modified form template If you attempt to re read a batch without saving your modifications the changes are lost and not applied while reading Note The newly saved templates have the new region locations saved with the original form template images Therefore if the newly modified template is opened in the template editor the regions may or may not line up correctly Ideally you should replace the image with a more appropriate one if you want to edit the template in the template editor See Resetting Template Images in Section 6 4 7 To use Recognition Tools 1 After processing data or opening an RMK ROA data file click the Data tab in the Task Pane if it is not already active 2 Select the link called Recognition Tools The Task Pane changes to reflect the available options If the Image Viewer is not showing click View Image Viewer 3 Determine what you want to view based on the descriptions above Draw Active Region Draw All Regions and or Draw Template Regions 4 Once you have viewed the desired regions make adjustments to the regions by clicking them with the mouse and dragging them to the desire
128. an replace these values on a region by region basis You may choose one of the default options listed or type in a custom value 83 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Note In previous versions of Remark Office OMR the word MULT was output when multiple responses were found and not permitted If you were using a previous version of Remark Office OMR any form templates that you convert still have the previous default replacement of MULT If you would like to change old form templates to use the new ALL functionality open the form template in the Template Editor and change the Replace with setting under Region item properties Note that any new form templates you create use the ALL option by default To set blank response settings 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane 3 Inthe Blank Exception Handling section choose a value from the Replace with drop down list or enter a unique replacement of your own Pre set choices include BLANK Asterisk Nothing Space Character Tilde and VOID 4 You may optionally use the Flag Blanks setting to further refine how blank responses are handled Using this setting allows you to further customize how Remark Office OMR interprets blank responses Grid regions are often used to capture data that vary in length which can lead to unintended blank responses For example you may have respondents
129. an store images in any directory using the Read Wizard However providing frequently used directories in the Image Directory Search List aids the Remark software in finding images to display whenever a data set is opened 218 Remark Office OMR Data Center Preferences Preference Option Description Active Dictionary Sets the active dictionary to be used for Spell Checker Click the down arrow to view any dictionaries that are currently installed in your default Dictionaries directory 10 4 Custom Font Preferences Custom Font preferences allow you to setup the default fonts to use throughout the application Mark the Use Custom Font Settings checkbox to choose a font to use throughout the application allowing you to customize the software s look You may choose a character set font and font size You should choose a font that is supported by your operating system Please note that not all fonts look optimal in the software You should restart the application after making any font changes Application Preferences General Preferences Use Custom Font Settings General Custom font character set ANSI 0 Set the generic application preferences Custom fone nee Tahoma my File storage locations Defauk Custom Font size eFaul Set target file storage locations fan pt Na Aa Custom font Use this option to choose an alternate font and character set to use throughout the application Not all Fonts will display appropria
130. and whether to replace the output with a field from the external database and or append additional fields from the external database For example suppose you are grading tests and you have the students fill in their ID numbers on the forms being processed You could verify the ID numbers in a database to ensure the right forms are being scanned and then specify another value that corresponds to the ID number e g a name If the ID number is found in the database Remark Office OMR automatically displays the corresponding value student name in this case for that ID number in the data When you run your grade reports they are produced with each student s name yet you did not have to type in that information or have students bubble it in on the form To use database lookup 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Database lookup link in the left Task Pane 3 Mark the checkbox for Use Database Lookup 4 Inthe Database Selection area use the Type drop down list to select the type of database to which you want to connect this region e g Access Excel etc 5 Click the Browse button to locate and select the database file 6 Select a file and then click the Open button or double click the file name 93 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 94 If using an ODBC connection perform the Steps 7 9 you need to obtain specific information from your database administrator to complete t
131. ans both sides of a page in one pass through the scanner you do not need to use Collate Mode Instead turn on the duplex capability in the scanner s TWAIN interface or the Remark Office OMR Scanner Properties window Tools Scanner Properties To use Collate Mode you perform three basic steps place a stack of forms in the scanner s automatic document feeder and scan the odd numbered pages flip the stack over and then scan the even pages The forms are placed in the scanner in regular page order The Data Center reads all odd numbered pages first regardless of how many sets of forms you place in the scanner The software then reads the even numbered pages in reverse order so that the data are written to the correct position For example suppose you have a six page double sided form You would first scan pages one three and five then flip the stack over and scan pages six four and two When scanning in Collate Processing Forms Mode make sure the forms are in regular page order with all pages belonging to one complete form together Note If your form does not have an even number of pages e g the last page has a blank backside Remark Office OMR automatically compensates for the blank backside You do not need to create a blank form template page To process pages using Collate Mode 6 Open the correct form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template Select the Tools menu and then click Read Wizard or clic
132. arcode Image 2 OCR recognition regions Jow rode imece oc The mouse cursor turns to a crosshair indicating you need to drag a box around the region in the image representation area of the screen When you drag a box around an OMR region do not include any surrounding text lines or graphics 2 3 The Region Properties box appears Region types and properties are Place the crosshair in the top left corner of the region hold down the left mouse button and drag a box to the lower right hand corner of the region Release the mouse button explained in the following sections Using the image representation area to create regions 1 Right click the mouse in the image representation area and then click Insert 2 Select the type of region you want to create The Region Properties box appears Tip Right clicking anywhere in the image representation inserts the new region after the last region that was defined on the page To insert a region in a specific order first select a region then right click and choose Insert Next make the selection that best indicates where you want the new item to be placed relative to the selected region Page After OMR Region After etc Region types and properties are explained in the following sections 57 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Using the Task Pane to create regions 1 If the Task Pane is not visible select the View menu and then click Task Pane The Task Pane updates
133. as many people already have this software and are familiar with using it If you are comfortable with word processing software this may be the best choice for you Software created specifically for survey design and analysis can offer the additional benefits of question banks the ability to draw and save questions to and from a question library layout assistance and analysis components Form design software can give you advanced layout tools to create professional looking forms Determining what software application to use is an individual decision You should base your decision on what you are comfortable with using your budget and your overall data collection needs No matter what your choice the design guidelines set forth in the next several sections apply Please read through them thoroughly before undertaking your own form design You may wish to consult the Gravic website for up to date partner information about survey and form design software We provide links to manufacturer websites many of which have demonstration software you can try By seeing what tools are available you can make an educated decision on what is the best solution for your needs 5 3 Mark Selection for OMR Optical Mark Recognition Forms need to be created so that Remark Office OMR can recognize the data on them Remark Office OMR recognizes optical marks which include bubbles a circle or oval checkboxes etc that respondents darken with a pen or penci
134. as printing faxing copying and scanning Some MFPs connect directly to a computer through a USB cable and others are connected through your network If connected directly to a PC running Remark Office OMR you can scan right into the software If the MFP is on the network you scan forms and save them as image files independently of Remark Office OMR and then Remark Office OMR processes those image files unless the MFP has a network TWAIN driver If you plan to scan double sided forms invest in a scanner with duplex capabilities can scan both sides of a sheet of paper in one pass through the scanner There are three major points to consider when purchasing a scanner your budget the volume of forms you are processing and whether the scanner will be used for purposes other than scanning forms in Remark Office OMR If you have low volume e g a few forms processing applications a year a few hundred forms each time a low end scanner may be fine For moderate volume e g several forms processing applications a year a few thousand forms each time look into a mid range scanner For high volume e g a many forms processing applications a year several thousands of forms total look into a high end scanner Note that price goes up considerably with speed If the scanner will be used for other purposes as well look into its color and resolution capabilities Remember that you get what you pay for when it comes to scanners Know what you need
135. ased upon an image of the problem area If you want to review the data after scanning you must save your data to the Remark RMK or Remark Office Archive ROA formats These formats preserve the links between the data and stored images as well as the exception case colors If you receive a recognition error consider the following when trying to resolve it 1 Did you use the same quality forms for the form template and filled in forms 2 Did you set up the region properly in the form template 3 Have you changed any settings on the scanner since you scanned the form for the form template 4 Did you use the ADF for both the form template and the filled in forms 5 Does your form follow our form design guidelines If you want to scan your forms in batches over a period of time use the Remark RMK format to save the data This format allows you to save the stored images with the data so that you can make corrections at a later time Once you have scanned all of your forms you can resave the data in another format for exporting if desired If you are scanning double sided forms with a duplex scanner you do not need to use the Collate Options when reading Instead turn on the duplex capabilities of your scanner in the Scanner Properties window or your scanner s TWAIN interface If you are experiencing recognition errors read Section 7 14 to learn how the software s recognition settings may be able to assist with your form A 6 Worki
136. ast and a negative number to darken the contrast Image Processing Options Despeckle Images Mark the Despeckle Images checkbox to remove speckling from the image If you scan your forms and see black specks on the form this is speckling Note that sometimes scanning at a lighter brightness setting on your scanner can also remove speckling We recommend only turning on this feature if you are having trouble with speckled forms Content Area Option Maximum speckle size to remove Deskew image Setting Up Your Scanner Function Use the Maximum speckle size to remove option to select the pixel size to remove when using the Despeckle Images option A pixel by definition is the smallest piece of information in an image Pixels are represented using dots or squares The default setting is 2 pixels Use a higher number to remove larger speckles Note that if you go too high you run the risk of removing or damaging the marks bubbles checkboxes on your form image Use the Deskew image option to have Remark Office OMR automatically correct for skewing during the scanning process Skewing can occur when pages are not fed neatly in the scanner s ADF or if your scanner pulls in the pages unevenly in which case you may want to have your scanner serviced In either case the result is a crooked image which can make it hard for the software to read the marks on the image We recommend only turning on this feature if you a
137. asthe corresponding The default base name is the form template name however you may use any name you like We suggest using something that identifies to you that the images belong to a certain form The images that are stored all begin with this base name and then have the page number if scanning a multi page form date and time appended to them to keep track of the various images You may optionally choose a region from the form template to use as the base name The value that is collected from the form for the specified region is used as the base name for the corresponding stored image For example if scanning student tests you could use a Student ID region to name the resulting image files by student If you leave the Begin image names with option blank your images only have the page number if applicable date and time as the name of each image In the Image target directory box click the ellipsis button to select a location in which to store the images for this form You may use the default directory for images or select a different directory on your computer external drive or network lles Gravic Remark Office OMR B Images Exam Answer Sheet Exam Answer Sheet f i e C Program Files 2010 07 21_10 41 44 59 ti Note Choose the image location carefully The images should remain in this location once the data is saved using the RMK format if you want to retain the link between the processed data and each image file Thi
138. ate Image icon to rotate the active image 0 Image 270 180 or 90 degrees Toggle Click the Toggle Image Color button to show the image Image in its native color if it was originally scanned in color or Color grayscale or show it in black and white format what Remark Office OMR uses to read the image Zoom to Click the Zoom to Region on Selection button to have Region the colored area on the Image Viewer zoom to the selected on region in the grid This feature is useful when correcting Selection exceptions so that you can see the exact cell contents where the error occurred Zoom Click the Zoom In button to zoom in on the image make In Zoom _ it larger and click the Zoom Out button to zoom out on Out the image make it smaller Note that Remark Office OMR only holds your zoom settings as you click cells in the data grid if you do not have Zoom to Region on Selection selected xj Close Click the X to close the Image Viewer You can always Image reopen it using the Tools menu Viewer 7 5 Graph Viewer Remark Office OMR includes a Graph Viewer at the bottom of the screen to view quick results of processed data The graph viewer displays a graph of the data being processed indicating the frequency of each response chosen an item analysis Click in any szhviewer Ga G Oy Gy Bi cell containing data to view a graph of the Sample question text for question 1 responses Please note that the graph viewer is not grading data and
139. ate if the wrong form was scanned or the wrong image was processed If desired use the Skip Image or Discard Image options Once you have entered the correct Respondent Tracker click the Read button to continue processing If using the Unrecognized Image Utility during form processing forms continue to be read until you end the read process If reviewing unrecognized images after form processing once all forms have been identified the Unrecognized Image Utility closes automatically Midterm_ID Tracking Midterm Processing Forms 7 10 Batch Processing The Remark Office OMR Data Center includes a batch processing feature that allows you to process batch header forms along with your forms Batch header forms can provide further information about the group of forms being processed that make your data more meaningful For example if you are processing student tests or course evaluations you can process a batch header form containing information such as instructor name class name class section and so forth The batch header form is processed once at the beginning of each batch Then the forms that correspond to that batch header form are processed subsequently The data from the header form is pre pended to added to the beginning of each data record You can start processing a new batch and its corresponding forms at any time The header data is also available when it comes time to report on the data in Remark Quick Stats
140. ats User s Guide PDF file under Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation for further details about setting up answer keys When grading Remark Office OMR displays the overall objective and subjective scores Extra credit is available in the Region item properties using the All points awarded should be treated as extra credit checkbox This feature allows you to use Easy Grade to grade the tests and still designate a question as extra credit When this checkbox is selected any points awarded for the question are added to the total score therefore it may be possible to score greater than 100 Using the Test Settings section sets the options on an individual region basis You can change the default setting for whether to grade each region type globally in the program Preferences under the Tools menu To set grade options 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane 3 Inthe Test Settings section mark the radio button for Grade this item Note If grading tests and using multiple answer keys there is a third option for Designate as key identifier Use this option when creating a region that contains the test answer key version information For example if you distribute three versions of the test A B C you can use the Designate as key identifier property on the region that contains the particular test s test version A B or C
141. attempting to read any pages from the scanner turn on your scanner ensure it is set up in Remark Office OMR and open the form template that corresponds to your forms See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template Note The forms you wish to process must correspond to the selected form template The Data Center places the recognized data in the open data grid All data obtained from reading one form appear in a single grid row Each column of the data grid corresponds to each variable question defined in the form template Every time you open a form template file and launch the Read Wizard the settings used with the same form template during the previous Read Wizard session are automatically loaded As you move through the Read Wizard steps your settings are automatically saved for the form template file For example if you are scanning and store the images to a specific network folder the next time you open the same form template that file storage folder is automatically used Or suppose you make a change to one of the recognition settings such as Recognition Threshold Override The next time you use the same form template the Recognition Threshold Override is still turned on The storing of Read Wizard settings applies to both reading from scanner and reading from images operations Note The settings you apply to a form template are stored in each user s preferences file Therefore if you share form templates or have different users ac
142. ature To modify toolbar buttons 1 Right click the toolbar and then click Customize Go to the toolbar and right click the button you wish to modify 3 Choose the desired option from the menu N 20 Navigating Remark Office OMR 4 When you are finished modifying the toolbar click the Close button on the Customize window To delete toolbar buttons Right click the toolbar and then click Customize Go to the toolbar and right click the button you wish to remove 1 2 3 Click the Delete option 4 When you are finished modifying the toolbar click the Close button on the Customize window 3 5 1 File Menu Use the items in the File menu to perform operations on files The operations include creating editing opening closing saving displaying and printing the data contained in these files Template Editor Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item a New Creates a new form template lt a Ctrl N il Open Opens an existing form template for editing Template Ctrl O Close Closes the current form template Ctrl F4 H Save Saves the open form template to a new or existing file AJ Ctrl S Clicking the Save button creates a new form template file or save the form template to the current file if one has already been established Save As Saves an existing form template file under a new name or F2 allows you to change the path to which the file saves Recent Files Displays the most re
143. back to this window to select more ag ie images in succession Page Drop out Colors A thumbnail image of the form appears in the Image window If acquiring multiple images use the Previous Page and Next Page icons under the image to view all images You may delete any images you do not wish to keep by clicking the Delete icons 5 Repeat Step 2 to add any other form images to the form template 6 If you are satisfied with the image s click the OK button Otherwise click Acquire Images from File again to reselect an image You may be prompted to have the software attempt to move your existing regions to the appropriate place on the new image Review changes carefully after repositioning To reset a single page You may optionally reset the image for a single page instead of using the Reset Images function 1 Double click the page node in the tree view Page 1 Properties representing the page you want to reset ESE see oy 2 Inthe Page Properties window reacquire the image via the scanner or an image file See the previous sections for information f Wags Rays Fas athe nebo ned about acquiring images PEE c m ae 3 Click the OK button to save the updated e L image Once the new image is acquired the existing image is automatically overwritten Once you have reset your images you will see all of your existing regions with the new image s You may find that you need to adjust the existing regions so that
144. bar which is completely customizable You may choose what toolbar buttons to display whether to display them as images or text and what text to include You may also drag toolbars using the mouse to the desired location To customize the tools displayed on the toolbar 1 Right click the toolbar and then click Customize 2 On the Toolbars tab choose the toolbars to display 3 On the Commands tab choose a command you wish to display and drag it to the toolbar to permanently place it on the toolbar 4 On the Keyboard tab review the keyboard shortcuts for various tools You may also create Customize Toolbars Commands Keyboard Options To add a command to a toolbar select a category and drag the command out of this dialog box to a toolbar Categories Commands new toolbar shortcuts New Form Template 5 On the Options tab choose whether to show full menus when dropped down reset the menu usage ree display large icons whether to show ScreenTips on Took tion petat foliar toolbars whether to show shortcut keys in the Recognition Templat 4 aaa ScreenTips and whether to use menu animation Help rae changes how menus drop down Note When customizing the toolbar you can see all of available toolbar options If you attempt to drag a button to the toolbar and subsequently do not see the item on the toolbar this means that the item you have selected is not valid for your setup e g a disabled fe
145. be machine or computer generated You can pre print information on your form and have the software recognize it Please note that some fonts work better than others when it comes to recognizing text Please see Section 5 4 for further details about fonts to use for optimal results Property Function Region name A name assigned to an OCR region Region names are used as grid column headers in the data grid window and are exported when saving data to common file formats Region names are limited to 60 characters OCR type Use this setting to select the type of OCR to use Remark Office OMR includes two types Standard and Microsoft Office Document Imaging MODI You only see the MODI option if you have Microsoft Office 2007 with the MODI option installed on the computer running Remark Office OMR Language Use this setting to choose the language for the characters in the region Standard OCR English French Dutch UK English MODI OCR System Default Chinese Simplified Chinese Standard Czech Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Greek Hungarian Italian Japanese Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Turkish Text Use this setting to select orientation of the text Left to right orientation Right to left Top to bottom Bottom to top Applies to Standard OCR only Data type Sets whether the data should be considered textual or numeric when saved exported Define format Mark th
146. before you begin shopping 223 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Purchase a scanner with an automatic document feeder ADF You do not want to have to scan forms one at a time The ADF allows you to place a batch of forms in the scanner at one time If you experience a problem using your scanner in Remark Office OMR verify that the scanner is working properly outside of Remark Office OMR before contacting technical support You can verify that the scanner is functioning by scanning pages in another scanning application Many scanners bundle an application for scanning with the scanner driver Or use another default Windows application that permits scanning if it is available on your computer If the scanner does not work in another program you may be experiencing a hardware problem and should contact your scanner manufacturer for assistance You should also clean and follow the maintenance guidelines for your scanner to keep it working optimally If your scanned image is unclear check the settings being used by your scanner Go to the Scanner Properties window in Remark Office OMR and mark the checkbox to Show TWAIN interface When you scan verify that you are scanning in a black and white line art mode for the best results You can also check page size resolution and brightness settings in the scanner s user interface A resolution of 200 dots per inch DPI is recommended 300 DPI if processing OCR optical character recognition regio
147. ble details the available Unrecognized Image Utility options Option Description Form Templates Provides a list of open form templates to which you can match the form that is not being automatically recognized Use the drop down list to select the correct form template for the image that is displayed in the image area and then click the Read button Pages Provides a list of pages corresponding to the form template that the unrecognized image matches Use the drop down list to select the correct form template page for the image that is displayed in the image area and then click the Read button Respondent ID Allows you to enter the correct respondent ID for the form An exception color is present to show you why the region was not automatically recognized e g BLANK or MULT colors Once you enter the correct respondent ID the software either matches it to an existing record if one exists or begins a new record After entering the correct response click the Read button 144 Processing Forms Option Description Details Lists the details pertinent to the page being read including the Form ID Number of Pages and the Page ID if applicable When a region has not been automatically recognized its details are not listed until a form template form page is selected Image Provides an image representation of the form to assist in matching forms and pages to the appropriate form template Cancel Use this button to can
148. causes the document to become the current window The software contains a menu bar a toolbar and a status bar The toolbar displays tools that when selected perform the function of an option under a menu pull down item Shifting between different types of windows causes the menu bar and the toolbar to change Tools and options that lack functionality in a particular window do not display or are disabled grayed out The status bar displays information about the active document or the selected command 17 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 3 3 Navigation Tools Remark Office OMR includes many wizards and navigation shortcuts to help you move through the software The left portion of each component contains a Task Pane that acts as a guide to help you decide what you would like to do Once you perform a function this Task Pane automatically updates with new options based on the last function you performed You may use this tool as a way to understand what options are available to you at any time Most options displayed in the Task Pane are also available from the menus or tool bar If you would prefer not to use the Task Pane you may close the window by selecting the View menu and disabling the option titled Task Pane You may also close sections of the task pane by clicking the title bar of the section In some windows you will also notice an information button Q When you see this button hover the mouse over the butt
149. cel processing of the current page The Cancel button offers three options Cancel Cancels the current image and stops the reading process If you are reviewing images after form processing the review process ends Skip Image Skips the current image but continues with the unrecognized image review This option is only available when using the Review Unrecognized Images utility after form processing Discard Image Skips the current image and 1 if reviewing images created while scanning forms deletes the corresponding image or 2 if reviewing images created by processing saved image files does not place the image into the Unrecognized Image queue for later review the actual image file is not deleted Read After matching a form page or respondent to its form template click the Read button to continue processing forms When using multiple tracking regions you match one region at a time For example if a form template page and respondent are all not recognized you first match the form template then the utility appears again so that you can match the form template page and finally the utility appears again so that you can match the respondent ID Continue to the next sections to understand how to use the Unrecognized Image Utility when both forms and pages are not recognized automatically 7 9 5 a Reviewing Unrecognized Auto Form ID Images If the Data Center cannot automatically match a form to its form template the
150. centage to require more errors on the page before the image is sent to the unrecognized images queue To use Page Error Detection 1 Mark the checkbox for Page Error Rail ana ae add images wth too mary recognition ears to the unrecognized mages queue Detection peee 2 Choose the desired Page error threshold 40 is the default as previously described 3 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change e them again m Cee 7 14 h Bit Depth Reduction When using color or grayscale images with Remark Office OMR they must first be converted to black and white before they can be properly recognized The software has to figure out which pixels are black and which are white Tip A pixel is the smallest single component of a digital image Therefore a single image is made up of many pixels Remember that if you use black and white native images this conversion does not need to happen this is why we recommend using black and white images to reduce the processing load whenever possible Generally the software can do this conversion automatically However if the standard conversion produces images that are too light or too dark you can use the Bit Depth Reduction settings to fine tune the conversion process There are individual settings for black and white conversions Use the Black Bit Depth Conversion Threshold to adjust the thresholds for convert
151. cently used files Click a file to open it Launch Launches the Remark Office OMR Data Center with the Remark current form template file open Office OMR Cal Properties Displays the properties for the open form template x F12 Exit Exits the Remark Office OMR Template Editor Alt F4 21 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 22 Data Center Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item a New Form Launches the Remark Office OMR Template Editor in the lt Template new template state so that you may create a new form Ctrl N template Open Form Opens an existing form template for processing forms aj Template opening data and running reports Multiple form Ctrl O templates can be opened simultaneously and the same form template can be opened multiple times dal Edit Form Launches the Template Editor with the active template Template automatically open for editing Ctrl E Asconettowdsuvey Convert to Converts the form template file to a Remark Web Survey Web Survey file for use in the Remark Web Survey application This option only appears if you have Remark Web Survey installed on the same computer as Remark Office OMR F open Data Open Data Opens an existing data file and displays the data in the Ctrl O current template grid window Remark Office OMR can read and save data in dozens of different file formats Worenkepot Open Report Opens an existing report file that was saved i
152. ceptions by Modifying Individual Cells One way of correcting exceptions is by individually clicking the cell you wish to change You can use the drop down arrow to select correct responses or type the desired text into the cell As you click in a cell the Image Viewer at the bottom of the screen updates automatically select View Image Viewer if you are not seeing the Image Viewer You may also zoom to the selected region by enabling the toolbar button for Zoom to Region on Selection on the Image Viewer toolbar Note Editing a cell removes any error colors 131 Remark Office OMR User s Guide To reconcile cells individually 1 Click the cell that you wish to change 2 If the cell contains a drop down arrow click the arrow and choose the correct response from the list 3 If the cell does not contain a drop down arrow type the appropriate response in the cell and press Enter or click another cell Note Each cell contains either a text box or a drop down list box depending on its region type Grid Binary and Add OMR regions Barcode regions OCR regions and Image regions that are not using the Database Lookup or qualitative response coding features are considered text regions You do not have a drop down list box for these region types All other types of OMR regions and Image regions using qualitative response codes are considered list regions and have a drop down list from which you can choose responses 7 6 2 Using Revi
153. cessing the same form template on the same machine the Read Wizard settings could vary Be sure to coordinate any changes you make to the Read Wizard settings with any other Remark users Tip You may wish to read section 7 14 Recognition Settings to understand the possible recognition settings that can be stored with your form template 7 3 1 Scanning Forms with the Read Wizard Forms can be scanned with most TWAIN compliant scanners See Chapter 4 for more information about scanners and how to set them up in Remark Office OMR As the forms are scanned images of each form are stored on your computer These images are used to review the data for easy clean up 117 Remark Office OMR User s Guide To read pages from the scanner 1 Open the correct form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template 2 Select the Tools menu and then click Read X Read Wizard Office Read Wizard Wizard or click Alternatively you may select the Read Wizard link from the Task Pane 3 Inthe Read Method window select the radio button for Read from scanner ee a Read Method Select the method to use for data collection Select Method to Use for Data Collection Read from scanner Scanner Properties Recognition Settings O Read from image files Advanced Image Recognition Properties Auto Form 1D Mode Note If you need to configure your scanner click the Scanner Properties link to view its setup see Chapter 4
154. ch as skewed forms Update the Graph Viewer During Read Operations Mark this checkbox to have the Graph Viewer update with a new graph per question each time a form is processed The Graph Viewer is located beneath the data grid window It provides a quick glimpse into your data by graphing the active question Review Exceptions Auto search the response combo box when typing Mark this checkbox so that you can type the first letter s of a response into the Response box of Review Exceptions and the software automatically selects the response that begins with those characters This option applies to questions that employ list box style cells only Multiple List Rank and Boolean OMR regions and Image regions that utilize Database Lookup or qualitative response coding Review Exceptions Play sound on review exceptions startup Mark this checkbox to play a sound when Review Exceptions first starts This feature is useful as an alert if you are processing forms in an unattended manner Review Exceptions Play sound when an exception case is located Mark this checkbox to play a sound every time an exception case is located in Review Exceptions Click the button to select a wav sound file You may also click the button to preview the sound 216 Preference Option Review Exceptions Clear exceptions after they have been reviewed Remark Office OMR Data Center Preferences Description Mark th
155. ch you would like the file saved and advanced saving options 2 3 4 5 NO 9 Select the desired directory location using the Look in drop down box Enter a name in the box titled File name Select the desired output format in the box titled Save as type If saving to a database type that supports internal table names enter a table name in the box titled Table name Click the Advanced button OPTIONAL If you have previously saved a definition file for this data set click the Load button to locate the appropriate INI file containing your settings Otherwise continue to Step 8 to build a new data file Make any desired changes in the Include Name Data Type or Size columns Optionally configure the following advanced properties for the export file type Advanced Properties Nam J student Name KW a St Ger lat e Select All Deselect All esfcspcs cscs cs cafcs cscs fica is Note You can save the path of the form images or the actual form images to the file by using the Advanced options Scroll to the bottom of the Names list to mark the form images If you want the actual image to be stored change the data type to binary If the data type is not binary the path to the images is stored Optional If desired click the Save button to save the settings to a configuration file ini file You can then open this configuration file for future save operations with
156. ches An adjustment is made so that the image does not start at the leftmost part of the scanner and cutoff a portion of the image which can happen on some scanners even if the ADF is in the center position Please note that some scanners have this property built in to their drivers and some do not support this feature at all 38 Setting Up Your Scanner Content Option Function Area Scan Ahead Mark the Scan Ahead checkbox if your scanner supports this feature Scan Ahead allows the scanner to scan pages faster than processing occurs It keeps the scanning moving so that there are not significant pauses while any processing takes place Tip We recommend that you initially show the scanner s TWAIN interface so that you can set the scanner settings Once you have successfully scanned a page many scanners support turning off the interface If you disable this feature you may use Remark Office OMR s resolution contrast and brightness settings in the Parameters section of the Scanner Properties window 4 Inthe Hardware Options section choose the type of scanner you are using Flatbed ADF or Flatbed and ADF Note The Hardware Options setting refers to the type of scanner you are using not whether you will scan a page using the ADF or flatbed of the scanner 5 If you have a duplex scanner one that scans both sides of a sheet of paper in one pass through the scanner mark the checkbox for Duplex scanner In addition if
157. ck and select Paste from the menu or press Ctrl V on the keyboard to 88 Using the Template Editor paste the contents of your Windows clipboard into the cell 5 Press the Enter key on the keyboard or click in the next cell going down to continue adding question names only applies to regions with more than one question 6 Once you have entered all of the desired question names click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view 6 3 3 Tracking Remark Office OMR offers three types of tracking to assist with the automation of forms processing e Auto Form ID Provides automatic identification of a form when processing multiple form types at the same time e Auto Page ID Provides automatic identification of pages within a form template e Respondent Tracker Provides automatic identification of respondent data With Auto Form ID Remark Office OMR can automatically recognize a form and match it to its oat oot e template allowing you to process various form types eeHictary 2 Final Exam z Answer Sheel at once without pre sorting the forms With Auto Page ID Remark Office OMR takes it a step further and identifies specific page order within a form TT T template if the pages are processed out of order With Respondent Tracker Remark Office OMR recognizes a specific respondent s page and place it in the correct grid row with the rest of that respondent s data even if the pages are processed out
158. command to review images that Remark Office OMR did not recognize when processing the forms Accesses the grade and survey options in the software Easy Grade grades the current data set using the first grid row as the answer key and grading options as defined in the form template F6 Grade Wizard launches the Grade Wizard for customized grading Ctrl W Easy Survey tabulates the current data set using tabulation options as defined in the form template Ctrl U Survey Wizard launches the Survey Wizard for customized survey tabulation Ctrl I Analysis Preferences allows you to modify settings that control the way Remark Quick Stats looks feels and performs automation wizard Automation Launches the Automation Wizard which allows you to Wizard set up executable files that automate basic Remark Office OMR functions Send wizard Send Wizard Launches the Send Wizard which allows you to email a data set or send it to an FTP site FTP Utility Launches the FTP Utility which allows you to setup a Windows service on your system to move files automatically from Remark Office OMR to another computer using File Transfer Protocol FTP Tool Menu Pull Down Item Respondent Detection Res pon dent Detection F11 Navigating Remark Office OMR Function Allows you to determine which respondents in your data have been processed not been processed or have been processed multiple times
159. creen Step 1 Configuration File Use the Browse button to locate a Configuration previously saved configuration file that File you created when using the Custom Wizard optional Step 2 File File Type Delimited Fields are separated by a Type and delimiter such as a comma or tab Start Row Fixed Width Fields are aligned at fixed character spaces Automatically format Mark the Automatically format questions that allow questions that allow multiple multiple responses responses checkbox to automatically set formatting for questions that allow more than one answer choice e g 1 5 12 becomes 1 5 12 Start export at row Enter the row number that you want to use as the first record in the exported data file All rows from this point forward are included in the data file Enter 0 to include field names as the first record 187 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Custom Option Wizard Screen Description Note Step 3 changes based on whether you select Fixed Width or Delimited for the File Type in Step 2 Items that correspond with each type are noted Step 3 Column Delimiter Column Delimiter and Text Qualifier Delimited Fields Only Select the character to use to separate the columns in the data file Comma Tab Semi colon Space Other Text Qualifier Select the character to use to qualify text Textual responses are encapsulated within these characters Options include None double quote sing
160. cribed in the previous table for your SMTP server These settings apply to both the email option from the File menu and the Send Wizard Remark Office OMR Data Center Preferences 10 6 Change Log As changes are made in the Remark Office OMR Data Center they can optionally be logged allowing you to see what changes were made and who made them Logging is turned on and off in the Remark Office OMR Preferences It can only be turned off if you know the password used when turning on the feature Changes made to the data grid edits review exceptions review duplicates clipboard open save etc are logged ina password protected Access database in the following location Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Change Logs where C is the drive on which Remark Office OMR is installed Windows Vista Windows 7 C ProgramData Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 change log note you must have the option to show hidden folders and files on to see this location When the database is initially created it uses the date of creation as the filename From that point forward all changes to all templates data files are stored in that Access file as long as the feature is turned on Data file types exception flags and actions are all listed with a numeric equivalent in the database The additional tables in the database explain each of the numeric values Once a database reaches 10MB in size a new database is
161. d on data where the links to the images are intact You can use the feature with data you just scanned or read from image files as well as with data saved to the RMK or ROA formats If the data is saved to a different format where the link to the processed images is no longer present the Recognition Tools feature has no effect on the data Tip It is useful to review the previous section on Recognition Settings before attempting to use the Recognition Tools Combining Recognition Settings with the Recognition Tools can provide the most assistance with processing forms that are generating recognition errors The Recognition Tools draw feature allows for three basic activities all of which are visible in the Image Viewer 1 Draw Active Question Highlights the active question so that you can see where Remark is attempting to find data on the image Active questions display in a dark yellow color 2 Draw All Regions Highlights all regions on the image so that you can see where Remark is attempting to find data on the image These regions display in a light yellow color 3 Draw Template Regions Highlights all of the form template regions as they were defined when you created the form template By viewing the defined form template regions and the current form template regions on the selected image you can easily see any offset Form template regions display in a gray color When viewing regions if you notice that the image is significantly
162. d place on the image Remember that only the Draw All Regions option allows you to move regions in order to re recognize them 5 If you wish to save the changes to a new form template click the Save Template 171 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 172 Changes link in the Task Pane Select a template name and location for the new file We do not recommend overwriting the original template file If you do not save the form template all changes are lost Tip If you are working from a saved data file and save the new form template when you open the new form template with the old data file together you receive an error stating that the files do not match As long as you did not change the structure of the form template file in the Template Editor you should be able to click OK to attempt to open the data file anyway Remark Office OMR is only displaying an error because the data was not originally saved with the new form template 6 If you want to re read the images choose one of the available options based on the previous descriptions Re read Region Re read Page or Re read batch 7 You receive a warning message allowing you to choose whether to continue and overwrite the existing data in the grid Click Yes to continue or No to stop the re reading process Note If you choose to re read the batch a preliminary warning asks if you want to save the changes to a new form template file Click Yes to save a new for
163. ditionally you can change the contents of individual grid cells by clicking in a cell This section explains the basics of manipulating data within the grid and includes the following e Making selections e Changing cell contents e Cutting copying pasting and deleting e Resizing inserting and deleting rows e Using find and replace 8 3 1 Making Grid Selections The following table lists the different methods for making selections in the grid Selection Area Method Single Cell Click in it Use the mouse tab or arrow keys to move from cell to cell Double clicking within a cell puts you in edit mode Multiple Cells Click the upper left hand corner of the desired selection drag the mouse to the lower right hand corner and release Single Column Click the column header Multiple Columns Click and drag a range of column headers or click a beginning column header press and hold the Shift key and then click an ending column header Single Row Click the row header Multiple Rows Click and drag a range of row headers or click a beginning row header press and hold the Shift key and then click an ending row header Working with Your Data Selection Area Method Entire Grid Select the Edit menu and then click Select All or click the upper left most grid header cell 8 3 2 Changing Cell Contents The data grid allows in cell editing by clicking within a particular cell The grid employs two cell types to s
164. e Used the Code 3 of 9 barcode type without using beginning and ending asterisks Barcode does not fit within region definition area Barcode is printed too small on the form Extraneous marks are located within the Barcode region Scanning resolution is too low should be at least 200 DPI 300 DPI recommended Miscellan Dark Blue eous characters OCR Region Optical Character Recognition DUP Pale Orange Repeated Rank Responses The font used for the text does not create readable text e g a handwriting style font Text is too small to be read Region border created in the form template does not properly encapsulate the text OCR region threshold setting in the form template or program preferences is too high or too low Printed text on form is in an unsupported language Trying to recognize handwriting ICR instead of machine printed text Scanning resolution is too low should be at least 300 DPI A duplicate rank was given to a Ranking style question For Ranking questions each response can only have one rank assigned and each rank can only be used once 130 Processing Forms Error Type Text Color Possible Causes Required None Exception Signifies that a required region was not item Color properly answered Typically this means that another exception occurred such as a Blank Mult or Error The data grid cell takes on the color of this exception e g yellow for
165. e Try changing your selection for the Show TWAIN interface option in the Scanner Properties window 6000 Output File Errors 6000 Error saving because the template grid contains no data You cannot save an empty grid 6001 Error saving the data because the specified data do not correspond to the selected form template file The data may contain misplaced characters such as commas periods semicolons and parentheses Use Find and Replace to remove any invalid characters for your database type 6002 6005 6006 Error saving the data in the selected file format because a cell exceeds the maximum size for storage Edit the text in the grid or save to another file format Some file formats maintain a maximum cell size question number etc See Section 8 6 Saving Data Too many questions to save in dBase DBF format Maximum of 128 questions permitted Try saving the data to another file format 6007 Too much data to save in dBase DBF format Maximum of 4 000 bytes per record Try saving the data to another file format 6008 6009 Unable to save to Fixed SDF file format because responses are not of a fixed size Data in each column must contain the same number of bytes For example if the possible answers for a question are 1 10 you should set the region up using the labels 01 02 03 09 10 so that each answer item will contain two bytes 6100 File Import Errors
166. e allow Remark Office OMR to choose the best Y axis percentage scale for your data or Percent Standard Scale use a standard percentage scale for the Y axis such as 0 100 x Close Graph Pane Click the X to close the Graph Viewer You can always reopen it using the Tools menu 7 6 Reviewing Exceptions As forms are processed exception cases can occur You should edit cells containing exception cases to validate your data before performing any analysis operations or exporting the data to another application Each exception case is Exceptions Legend Multiple responses Blank responses Recognition errors assigned a specific color so that you can easily Image regions distinguish different types of exceptions There is Database lookup regions a legend depicting the types of exceptions and Barcode regions their accompanying color in the Task Pane of the Data Center if you cannot see the Exceptions Legend click View Legend The following table OCR regions Repeated rank responses Multiple exceptions summarizes the types of exception cases and their possible causes 128 Error Type Multiple Responses Too Many Responses Text Color All multiple Green responses or MULT Processing Forms Possible Causes More than one answer selected when multiple responses are not permitted Partially erased forms Carelessly marked forms Blank Responses No Response
167. e but not all of the responses is a large mark Questions that contain only large marks report all of the responses selected Therefore if a respondent uses all X s or slashes on the form they are not accidentally misinterpreted as large marks This option is on by default when the Ignore Large Marks feature is turned on Note If you are using this feature and respondents large X or slash go into or very close to an adjacent bubble you risk that Remark Office OMR also ignores the adjacent bubble When designing your form be sure to allow 164 Processing Forms enough space in between bubbles both vertically and horizontally to allow respondents to make a large mark To use Ignore Large Marks 1 Mark the checkbox for Ignore Large Datat Recognition Settings Optonaly ignore Fed bubbles thst have a large X or slash through them Marks 2 Choose the desired Large mark threshold 2 is the default as previously described 3 If desired mark the checkbox for Only ignore large marks if the question contains multiple responses as previously described recommended 4 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again 7 14 e Dynamic Brightness Compensation The Dynamic Brightness Compensation feature automatically compensates for processed form images where the brightness of the image differs from that of the form template image It is always
168. e detailing the steps that will happen to transfer the license In short you first transfer the license from the current computer Then you gt install Remark Office OMR on the second a a aii E E computer and activate it there using the same pEr eres license key Once you have read the full E AEAEE instructions on this screen click the Continue Suare on enam ache T ea ad diete ho button fod thea oe Bas ea theme oan The license is transferred You may now install the E Rc Rei cc oa ea software on another machine using your original ra ey rah ceo license key Use the activation procedures described in Section 2 5 1 to activate the software on the new computer Read Internet Activation Transfer Disclaimer Continue Cancel 2 5 3 Missing or Corrupt License File In rare cases an instance may arise where the main license file is missing or corrupt e g if the license file was deleted by mistake 2 M Z License Recovery x If you receive a Missing License error a eer Ree OTC a message please contact Gravic technical Please follow the directions below to complete the license recovery process support for assistance We will diagnose the Ga EA issue and then if applicable send you a file PRS 5 4 The software license has become corrupt To recover the software license containing the information you need to recover sa e e ra A i 7 5 a x 7 recover the corrupt software license your license In the Missing License windo
169. e different directory different file type etc The following table lists the different save file formats their extensions and a brief description 181 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 182 File Format Extension Description Remark RMK Remark Office OMR format saves grid exception colors and image links Remark Office ROA Remark Office OMR Archive format combines Archive template data and stored image files into one file saves grid exception colors and image links existing files may only be overwritten there are no append options optionally includes support information for troubleshooting SQL Server 2000 MDF Microsoft SQL Server format 2005 Oracle 7 4 and T Oracle format later Access 2007 2010 ACCDB Microsoft Access 2007 and 2010 format only available if the Access 2007 or 2010 database engine is installed Access 2000 2003 MDB Microsoft Access 2000 2003 format Access 95 97 MDB Microsoft Access 95 97 format Access 2 0 MDB Microsoft Access 2 0 format Access 1 0 MDB Microsoft Access 1 0 format Excel 2007 2010 XLSX Microsoft Excel 2007 and 2010 format only available if the Access 2007 or 2010 database engine is installed existing files can only be appended not overwritten Excel 97 2003 XLS Microsoft Excel 97 2003 format Excel 95 XLS Microsoft Excel 95 format Excel 4 0 XLS Microsoft Excel 4 0 format Excel 3 0 XLS Microsoft Excel 3 0 forma
170. e is fine and recommended However if your scanner supports grayscale or color scanning you may select to use it here without having to do so in your scanner s TWAIN driver Scanning in color or grayscale may be appropriate if you plan to use the images outside of Remark Office OMR or have dropout colors on your form Note that scanning in color or grayscale slows down scanner and software performance Brightness Use the Brightness setting to set the scanner s brightness We recommend scanning at your scanner s default brightness setting unless you encounter problems The default setting in Remark Office OMR is 0 This setting is not available if you have chosen to show the scanner s TWAIN interface you select brightness when you scan a page Use a positive number to scan lighter and a negative number to scan darker Contrast Contrast is the difference between the color or shading of printed material on a document and the background on which it is printed Most scanners can adjust contrast for a sharper image Use the Contrast setting to set the scanner s contrast when scanning in grayscale or color We recommend scanning at your scanner s default contrast setting unless you encounter problems The default setting in Remark Office OMR is 0 This setting is not available if you have chosen to show the scanner s TWAIN interface you select contrast when you scan a page Use a positive number to lighten the contr
171. e rA Note The data contained in the file must Ss correspond to the currently active form 4 template or an error may occur Te Files of type Supported Files 4 If opening a database file select the appropriate table from the Table name drop down list 5 Click the OK button to open the data file Caution When opening a database file type the Data Center attempts to match grid column headers region names to the database s field names If any column headers cannot be matched an error occurs Grid column headers do not need to appear in the same order as the database fields 205 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 8 11 Data Center Logging 206 As changes are made in the Remark Office OMR Data Center they can optionally be logged allowing you to see what changes were made and who made them Logging is turned on and off in the Remark Office OMR Preferences It can only be turned off if you know the password used when turning on the feature Changes made to the data grid edits review exceptions review duplicates clipboard open save etc are logged ina password protected Access database in the following location Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Change Logs where C is the drive on which Remark Office OMR is installed Windows Vista Windows 7 C ProgramData Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 change log Note you must have the option to show hidden
172. e software to be more lenient when reading light text or image regions with smaller amounts of text Higher thresholds force the software to be stricter and therefore less likely to pick up stray or light markings within the region Use the default setting of 3 unless you encounter problems when processing forms Use caution when using extremely low or high thresholds Low thresholds cause the software to be very sensitive possibly picking up items such as erasures High thresholds may cause the software to not detect handwriting within light or less filled Image regions Default Image Target directory Clip Options Clip file type Sets the default storage location for the images that are captured when using Image Clips Sets the default image file format to use when capturing image clips You may choose TIF PCX PDF or JPG If using the TIF or PDF formats you may also select the compression level Default Grading Grade region amp Survey Analysis Mark this checkbox to grade Image regions by default when performing a grade operation Section Option Tabulate region Using the Template Editor Description Mark this checkbox to tabulate Image regions by default when performing a survey operation 6 7 4 Barcode Region Preferences The Barcode Region screen allows you to setup default settings to be used when creating new Barcode regions When creating new Barcode regions the selected settings are used
173. e File name file format using Save as type and if using a database format the Table or Sheet name You do not need to specify a location for the file as it is automatically Se cae attached to an email message s 4 Click the OK button aes Email Message Provide the information needed to send your email message 5 The Email Message window appears ao ae oe g A Tahoma 975 B2 U o A Oo E 6 Enter the recipient s email address in the To Hore she asta fle you requested box Separate multiple recipients with a semi colon 7 Enter your return email address in the From box 196 Working with Your Data 8 Accept the default subject which is the file name or enter a new one in the Subject box 9 Inthe rich text box type your message to the SMP Server recipient s You may use the toolbar to format a eee ee your message as desired cael saree SMTP Server 10 If you have already configured your SMTP sy ona set ee el fa Fer ih Yar sy settings in Remark Office OMR as described in g section 8 8 1 you do not need to click the 1 Uss the defaut credentials of the curr logged in user SMTP Settings tab However if you have not entered your SMTP settings or need to modify Thoterate 50 them click the SMTP Settings tab to enter the SMTP server information You will need to obtain this information from your network email administrator 11 Click Send when you are ready to send your message
174. e Recognize button to have Remark Office OMR automatically recognize the Cx ee region s value This value acts as the identifier for this particular form All forms that you wish to process with this form template using Auto Form ID must have this value present 6 If desired mark the checkbox for Insert ID data into the grid during the read process Viewing the ID data captured along with the rest of the data can be useful for verification of processed data 7 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view When you are ready to process forms open any form templates containing Auto Form ID regions in the Remark Office OMR Data Center In the Read Wizard turn on the Auto Form ID feature Remark Office OMR begins processing the forms searching for the Auto Form ID regions first When it matches a region on the form to the region in the form template it automatically places that data in the corresponding data grid Any regions that are not recognized are flagged for your review or placed in the Unrecognized Images queue See Section 7 9 for further details about processing forms using Auto Form ID regions N 6 3 3 b Setting up a Page ID Region You must have a page identifier on each page of your form to use the Auto Page ID feature When you create a paper form place optical marks e g bubbles computer generated text OCR or barcodes on the form pages that identify each individual page Using the
175. e are several ways to create regions menus toolbar right clicking in the image representation tree view or the Task Pane These options are covered in greater detail in Section 6 2 4 Creating Regions Try creating regions using each method and then decide which way you prefer 2 The mouse changes to a crosshair Use the mouse to drag a box around the marks in the region in the image representation area Only select the marks do not capture Using the Template Editor any text near the marks Place the box around the region so that it is not right against the bubbles yet is also not too far from the bubbles as shown in the following example You want to create about 1 8 inch padding around the marks Example Rate the following on a scale of 5 Strongly Agree to 1 Strongly Disagree Question 1 Question 2 Question 3 Question 4 3 Inthe Properties OMR Region box enter the appropriate properties for the region on the OMR region properties screen as described on the previous page There are additional advanced features that may be defined These features are discussed in detail beginning with Section 6 3 1 4 Click the OK button to create the region After creating an OMR region you can see the region in the image representation area and a new node is added to the tree view Each OMR region in the image representation area is green to differentiate the regions When you select a region it has white image handles ti
176. e for this image Use the Image Viewer in the right portion of the screen to assist with understanding which form has been processed NOTE If the form is automatically recognized you do not see this step Optional Once the correct form is identified or if you are not using Auto Form ID you may select the page being processed if it is not recognized Click the Pages drop down list and then select the correct page for the form being processed Use the Image Viewer in the right portion of the screen to assist with understanding which form has been processed NOTE If the page is automatically recognized you eee do not see this step ores ther ind a When the Unrecognized Image Utility N pe EEF appears for an unrecognized Respondent m en isa desig aa Tracker region the Respondent Tracker box shows an exception color indicating s gp Section Number 10 iio why the software could not recognize the region e g BLANK MULT etc Enter the rms correct response for this image in the Pan Na Respondent ID box Use the Image Viewer in the right portion of the screen to assist with understanding which form has been processed Once the response is entered the software either matches the record to an existing data record or begins a new record if the Respondent Tracker is unique to the existing data Optional If desired click the Cancel button to skip recognizing this image This might be appropri
177. e marks completely Use a higher Recognition Threshold to compensate for errors when reading dark pages or pages with many erasures Note The Recognition Threshold can only be set on a region basis If you have a region containing multiple OMR questions the Recognition Threshold setting applies to all questions in the region For OCR regions the Recognition Threshold setting ranges from 1 100 default setting is 70 The threshold applies to each individual character The software returns a confidence value for each character recognized e g 62 certain it is a G If any Using the Template Editor character returns a confidence value lower than the specified threshold the OCR field is flagged as an exception for your review Recognition Threshold settings can also be adjusted on a global scale Please see section 7 14 a for more information To set the Recognition Threshold 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane 3 Inthe Recognition Threshold applies to region section set the Threshold value to the desired number For OMR and Image regions choose a higher value to have the software be less sensitive and choose a lower value to have the software be more sensitive when processing forms Tip Use caution when setting extreme OMR Recognition Threshold values Decreasing to 1 causes the software to be quite s
178. e responses Image regions Dorr regions Blank responses Database lookup regions Repeated rank responses N ote z Re vi e Ww E x Cc e pti 0 n sS Cc a n a sS o b e Recognition errors Barcode regions O Reguired items run after all the forms are processed if you prefer not to stop processing when problems occur 17 Place the completed forms in the scanner 18 Click the Read button to begin processing pages Note If desired you can click the drop down arrow on the Read button and choose Save or Save and Read If you choose one of the save options your Read Wizard settings are saved as an Automation Wizard file rez The Automation Wizard is used to automate form processing Please see the Remark Office OMR Automation Wizard User s Guide pdf file Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation included with your software for more information about the Automation Wizard Remark Office OMR continues scanning pages until the scanner s sheetfeeder is empty 19 After processing all of the pages you are prompted to continue scanning Click Yes to scan more pages or No to end the scanning process 7 3 1 a Scanning Using Default Settings Easy Scan Once you have run the Read Wizard you may optionally scan using default settings without running the Read Wizard each time This method is called Easy Scan and scanning occurs using the last settings specified in the Read Wizard If you are using a form template you have used previously t
179. e sure you take that step in addition to using the email function Saving data is covered in Section 8 6 Your SMTP Server If you use your own SMTP server you must have a valid SMTP server set up independently of Remark Office OMR SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol and is the Internet standard for transmitting email across networks It is likely your organization has a running SMTP server already set up You just need to find out general information about the server You will likely need to consult with your network email administrator to obtain information about your SMTP server Please use the following table as a guide to have your administrator provide the proper settings Option Description SMTP Server This is the name address or IP address of the mail server SMTP port The SMTP port is usually 25 but may vary with your email server Enable a If desired use a secure connection by marking the checkbox for secured Enable a secured SSL connection SSL encrypts data as it is SSL transmitted Your SMTP server must be configured to use SSL in order connection for this feature to work Use the If you need to use authentication for your SMTP server you can enter default credentials or use those of the user logged in to the computer Mark credentials of the Use the default credentials of the currently logged in user the currently checkbox to utilize the user s credentials e g the person logged in logged in whe
180. e than one piece of data the barcode must include a delimiter to separate the pieces of data You can choose the delimiter that separates the pieces of data in the barcode using the box marked Item delimiter Your choices are comma tab space tilde carriage return line feed carriage return line feed Make sure you set up the barcode with a delimiter that is supported by your specific barcode type In the Number of items box enter the number of pieces of data contained in the barcode You may use the up down arrows or type a number in this box Delimited barcodes display in the tree view with an expandable plus sign You can expand the barcode node to see the separate pieces of data within that barcode Opening the properties for one of the expanded nodes provides access to certain advanced features only for that piece of data see Section 6 3 for full explanations of these features Include region in read operation Mark this checkbox to include data from this region when processing forms If this checkbox is not marked the region exists in the form template but no data is captured during form processing This checkbox is on by default To create a barcode region 1 From the Page or Region menu choose Insert and then select Barcode Region After Selected Region Page or Barcode Region Before Selected Region Page Tip There are several ways to create regions menus toolbar right clicking in the image representation tree
181. e the LCK file and then try the operation again 7503 An unexpected error occurred when you tried to access data in an attached Btrieve table Try the operation again or contact your system administrator or network administrator 7504 7505 You tried to perform an operation that requires the Btrieve engine To access Btrieve files you must have purchased and installed a copy of the stand alone Btrieve for Windows engine This file must be in your Windows System directory Cannot perform this operation with an unsupported database version Convert the file you want to use to a supported version and or data type and then retry the operation 7506 The operation stopped before its normal completion Some data changes may not have been saved 7507 The external database driver returned an error This error can be caused by performing an operation not supported on this type of external database 7508 The database you are attempting to use has an unspecified problem and as a result it is marked as corrupt Check your database s documentation for this error code 7600 Database Record Errors 7600 The database you are attempting to use has an unspecified problem and as a result it is marked as corrupt Check your database s documentation for this error code 237 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 238 Class Category Error 7601 Error Text You defined a table with
182. e the desired percentage of questions in which errors are found that should trigger the rotation 25 is recommended 3 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again 7 14 c Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings features include some behind the scenes advanced processing techniques and the ability to compensate for degraded marks Enhanced Reading Mode is on by default and we recommend keeping it on Compensate for Missing and Damaged Marks is not on by default You should turn it on when you encounter forms that have degraded images such as optical marks bubbles that have been whited out or erased Enhanced Reading Mode Enhanced Reading Mode allows the software to do more in depth recognition of uncertain regions Compensate for Missing and Damaged Marks The Compensate for Missing and Damaged Marks setting allows Remark Office OMR to still recognize responses when marks bubbles are missing or partially missing For example respondents may have tried to erase an incorrect response taking some of the mark with them Or they may have used white out to remove a mark altogether Without this feature these cases would result in recognition errors You can set a tolerance for missing and damaged marks on a region basis and on a question basis The default setting for regions is 30 This setting means that if 30 or more of a single regi
183. eady to start processing forms open the form template s you wish to use with Auto Page ID in the Data Center see Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template 4 Read forms from either scanner or image file by selecting the Tools menu and then clicking Read Wizard or by clicking Sii See Section 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard for more details about processing forms Make your selections and then click the Read button After recognizing the page the Data Center places the data into the appropriate template grid section Any images that the Data Center cannot recognize enter a queue of unrecognized images You can review these images during or after form processing See Section 7 9 4 Reviewing Unrecognized Images for further information about reviewing unrecognized images 7 9 3 Respondent Tracker The Respondent Tracker feature allows you to scan respondents form pages in any order Remark Office OMR uses the respondent identifier region of the form template to determine the appropriate record for each respondent This feature is only useful for multi page forms Therefore you need to also use the Auto Page ID feature along with Respondent Tracker Remark Office OMR first identifies the page being processed and 141 Remark Office OMR User s Guide then the respondent Optionally you may use Auto Form ID as well Using all three features allows you to process various forms form pages and individual respondent pages in any
184. eate the form template scan a blank copy of the form into the software and use the mouse to drag boxes around the areas you want recognized You then provide the software with information about the area including what type of data to output Each form you wish to process requires a form template but the form template is a one time setup that tells the software how to read your particular form Process filled in forms using a scanner or saved image files Remark Office OMR provides flexibility in terms of how you process images For example you can use a desktop scanner connected to the PC running Remark Office OMR or scan with a networked multi function peripheral MFP and save image files on your network which Remark Office OMR will read Remark Office OMR displays the data in a spreadsheet style grid based on the form template you created Each row of this grid corresponds to one scanned form in its entirety and each column corresponds to one question or variable on the form Remark Office OMR User s Guide e Correct any exception cases Remark Office OMR denotes exceptions with color coded data grid cells and by providing a descriptive word in the answer cell e g BLANK for a question that was not answered The software provides a Review Exceptions function to correct exception cases as you process the forms or after the forms are processed Remark Office OMR assists you in the data cleaning process by storing an image of each fo
185. ectory that you wish to process Only images corresponding to these file types are read all others are ignored Tip The last item in the Image Filters list is meaning all image types Mark this checkbox if you want all images in the source directory to be read Note that only images of the software s supported file types are processed 9 If desired you may use the Custom Filters box to further refine your file list You can specify specific cases here by using wildcards For example if you wanted to process all images that start with English 101 you could enter English Office Read Wizard Image Filters and Source Directories 101 as a custom filter Only images Select the source decries and the corresponding image types to be processed during Server Mode that start with this text are processed Type the custom filter into the Custom a ciate Trpo Filter box and then click the Add Ee button The filter is added to the Image Ess Filters list and automatically selected a ia Unused custom filters are removed from SoA EOE Sr rpc the list automatically the next time you run the Read Wizard sed TF 10 If desired mark the checkbox for Delete images after they have been processed to remove the images from the specified directories after the Data Center has processed them Note Marking this checkbox permanently deletes the images However if you do not delete the images and stop and start Server
186. ed An alternative to barcodes is OCR Optical Character Recognition OCR recognizes machine printed text not handwriting which is called ICR You can pre print text on a form and have Remark Office OMR recognized it Be sure to follow the form design guidelines in Chapter 5 for OCR areas on a form Take advantage of our free form review service Fax or email forms to Gravic Support before you duplicate them The support department provides feedback on your form s compatibility with Remark Office OMR and suggestions if necessary Test your form with the software before duplicating and distributing it Create a form template and fill in a few forms as you expect to have them returned not perfectly to get an idea of how well the form works Tips and Helpful Hints Understand the process that is used once you have a form defined Sometimes a poor process can cause a well designed form not to work Distribution of the form is key Ideally you want to scan forms all from the same method of distribution e g printed on the same printer photocopied once on the same copier etc If you cannot control distribution ensure that for each batch of forms you receive you have at least one blank copy This copy can be used to reset the form template image if the batch does not match that which was originally used for the form template e g form shift due to variances in printers or photocopiers A 4 Form Templates The form template is anothe
187. ed OMR region Tip Only regions of the same OMR type data type and orientation can be linked However the columns rows of marks do not have to have the same number of answer choices in order to be linked Using the Template Editor To make changes to a region that is already linked first separate the regions by breaking the link then make the changes and relink the regions Many properties can only be accessed by first separating the linked regions To break a linked region 1 Use the tree view or image representation area to select one of the OMR boxes within the linked set you want to separate ag 2 Select the Region menu and then click Break Region Link or click i The regions are separated into individual OMR regions If you need to make changes to the regions edit the regions and then relink them To relink regions 1 While holding down the Shift key select each OMR region to be linked by either clicking its node or clicking it in the image representation area 2 After all regions are highlighted select the Region menu and then click Link ae Regions or click 6 2 8 OMR Region Colors Region Positioning Each region in the form template has a different color so that you can tell one from the other easily As indicated OMR regions are green If you create an OMR region and it turns a solid red this is an indication that Remark Office OMR cannot properly recognize the region as it is set up When a solid red regi
188. eded use the Up and Down arrow Sheet Name Template Name b u tto ns to move d a ta S ets Th eo rd er i n IFE xam answer Sheet omr Exam rn C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 7 Data Exam Answer Sheet omr Exam Answer Sheet omr Exam C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 7 Data Exam Answer Sheet omr which the files appear on the Possible Data Sets window is the order in which they are saved ap 4 If any of the open data sets had changes made to them prior to the save operation and were not saved you receive a warning The warning lets you know that during the save operation all of the data sets being combined are closed Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the operation allowing you to go back and save the individual files first Save All Warning Caution During the Save All operation the individual data sheets will be closed and then re opened as a single combined data sheet One or more of the data sheets that you are trying to save have been changed since the last time they were saved individually If you continue those individual changes will be lost You may wish to cancel this operation save the individual data files and then choose the Save AIl option Would you like to continue with the Save All operation Yes No Note If you made changes to your original data files and want those changes to be saved save the individual files before using Save All Data If you choose to ignore the warning the
189. ee 86 6 3 1 Required ItemS ssssessessessesserserrsrrrerrrrres 86 6 3 2 Question Text and NAMES cceccceseeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeanes 87 6 3 2 Question Text kiret Erri e EETA vac RAE 87 6 3 2 b Question NAMES ssssssssrsrssserrrrrsrerrrrrsesres 88 6 3 3 Mra KNO ea aea te EAA AE ALAE DESA A ces 89 6 3 3 a Setting up an Auto Form ID Region 89 6 3 3 b Setting up a Page ID Regi on ssssssssssrrressre 90 6 3 3 c Setting up a Respondent Tracker Region 92 6 3 4 Database LOOKUP aroro aE aAA AA TEREA 93 6 4 Additional Template Editor FeatureS ssssssssssssssssrerrrrrrrrrrrrens 95 6 4 1 Copy Paste s cacsieiviieei dative AERE EEEE NEN EARRAN 95 6 4 2 Copy Special Paste Special ccccccesceeeeseeeeseeeesaeeees 96 oy ABIT ey AD 50 o E E E A 96 6 4 4 Deleting REGIONS arisini a ea aaa ENa EAEE AEN 97 6 4 5 U do RedO n Aeiiaan ten ane aa ae Aisa aoe ely 97 6 4 6 Adjusting Region Borders cecceeeeeeee eee eee eee eeeeaees 97 6 4 7 Resetting Form Template Images ccceeeeeeee eee ee ees 98 6 4 8 AUtO Alig Miian a E yy eit yy AAAA a ede E 100 6 49 Spell CHECK mirsiiisiiisetii titrati einen aCA 100 6 4 10 RESPONSE ScaleS sssssssssssrsssrssrssrrsrrrnrrrrrnrrrrrrrrnenn 101 G24 LL ZO OMe a a A A Taa E A E A A TAA 102 6 4 12 File Properties sssssssserrssrssssensensensornorrorreerenrrenean 102 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 6 5 Saving a Form Template
190. eeseeee eee teens eee eee eaees 160 7 14 a Threshold Overrides ccceee eee e eee e eee ee eee ee eee eeeaees 161 7 14 Auto Rotate nnani a torn clei eeee a eae ack ve lates 162 7 14 c Advanced Settings ecceee eee e cence eee eee ee nets A aa 163 7 14 d Ignore Large MarkS ccecceee eee e cece e eee ee eee ee eee teeta ees 233 7 14 e Dynamic Brightness Compensation cccesceeeeeeeeeeaes 234 7 14 f Blank Page Detection ceeeee eee ee eee ee eee teense ee eens 166 7 14 g Page Error Detection ccecceeeeee eee eee eee e eee eeee eae 236 7 14 h Bit Depth Reduction ssssssssssssssssssrssrrrnrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrens 237 FAFA INVGRUCIM AGG mikeae maa n dda hi aN anaia tale beled 238 7 14 j Deskew Images During Recognition ceeeeeeee es 169 7 14 k Despeckle Images During Recognition 169 ZAS RECOGNITION TOO Sirisiri tia oie cedg Eon dee nseniiulaierdeame ges 170 7 15 a Using the Recognition Tools in Conjunction with Recognition SOQUEINGS osgan ia a Cereal N a e Cave dle alee neta elas adda eres 244 Working with Your Data 245 81 OVERVICW iederen aana a had AAE TE E aa cea taees 245 8 2 Understanding the Data Grid ccc cee eee eee eee eee eee eee een ees 245 8 3 Editing the Data Grid ec ce cece e ee renee ee eee eee ee eee eee neta ees 174 8 3 1 Making Grid Selections c cece cece eee eee eee teen ea ees 174 8 3 2 Changing Cell Contents
191. efined bubble that scans consistently Important Keyword Mark A mark is any type of complete shape used on a form Respondents darken the marks to indicate their answer choice Marks are typically bubbles or checkboxes on OMR forms 5 4 Character Selection for OCR Optical Character Recognition Remark Office OMR includes the capability to recognize machine printed text This functionality is called OCR or optical character recognition Note OCR does not include handwriting recognition commonly called ICR or intelligent character recognition In order to use the OCR feature the text must be machine or computer generated While the software s sensitivity level can be adjusted certain fonts and font sizes recognize better than others We recommend using a common font such as Arial or Times New Roman You do not want to select a handwriting style font The font size should be a minimum of 12 points even larger is better and you do not want to use bold underline or italics formatting If you notice areas where letters almost touch each other due to the shape of the letter we suggest increasing the character spacing slightly which is supported by most word processing applications When scanning forms a scanning resolution of 300 DPI dots per inch is recommended Always test your forms with the Remark software to ensure that the characters are recognized properly before you print and distribute large quantities see Section 5 12 fo
192. egion data type to be used when creating new OCR regions Textual or Numeric The data type is used when exporting data Orientation Choose the orientation in which to read the region Left to Right Right to Left Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top Applies to Standard OCR only 112 Section Option Auto rotate region image Threshold Using the Template Editor Description Mark this checkbox to have Remark Office OMR automatically rotate the image in order to read the text captured in the OCR region If the software cannot read the text in one direction it rotates the image to try again Applies to MODI OCR regions only Select a threshold to use for the software to determine whether it recognizes the printed text The threshold applies to each individual character The software returns a confidence value for each character recognized e g 62 certain it is a G If any character returns a confidence value lower than the specified threshold the OCR field is flagged as an exception for your review Default Grading Grade region amp Survey Analysis Mark this checkbox to grade OCR regions by default when performing a grade operation Tabulate region Mark this checkbox to tabulate OCR regions by default when performing a survey operation 113 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 114 Processing Forms Chapter 7 7 1 Overview This chapter explains how to process forms in the Remark Of
193. elect the bubble for Female Enter all of the region details as previously described For the region size only enter what pertains to what you have defined thus far in the previous example the region is only one row by one column at this point 2 After defining the first part of the region select the Region menu and then click Append Linked Region or click The mouse turns into a crosshair 3 Drag a box around the second area to be defined in the previous example you would select the OMR bubble for Male When you release the mouse button the Properties OMR Region window appears This window contains the same settings that were defined for the first part of the region that you selected You need only define the Labels and Values if desired section of the window unless the number of bubbles in each appended region varies 4 Make any necessary changes to the region definition and then click the OK button J Afopg rat Kg kon dme dioe OR Ew Mg AD riia Cetin F IIe Regions that are defined with the Append Linked muck uu seat aead Region feature are automatically linked to the Wea Survey previous region These regions are a green color ner in the image representation window like OMR regions but also have a dashed line around them and a plus sign in the tree view to represent their linked status If you click a linked region its square image handles are gray instead of white like an unlink
194. ell as long as the color completely drops out when scanned Test your paper selection with your scanner before printing large quantities of your forms Tip You can test colored paper by scanning a form in the Remark Office OMR Template Editor The resulting image should have a white background with black text If you see speckles or other black marks in the background your paper may be too dark You can try raising the brightness setting on your scanner to see if the rest of the color from the paper drops out without compromising the marks on the form Remark Office OMR supports any paper size or thickness supported by your scanner Consult your scanner s user s guide for further information 5 11 Form Duplication When reproducing forms quality and consistency can reduce form processing errors You have the flexibility to duplicate forms in several ways using a laser printer a high quality photocopier or a professional printer Consistency from form to form is important Try to use the same source to duplicate all of the forms you will need for a single form type When photocopying forms the accuracy of page placement into the photocopier and your overall form design are the limiting factors as to how large your margins must be in order to minimize errors Forms with inadequate spacing have a low tolerance for offset skew Carefully placing forms directly on the photocopy machine s glass tends to yield better copies than using the docum
195. en click the Add button If Em le pe tee te cee ere ice oe ale panes cso you already added a region in aos Step 7 the Name Builder studert Nare r allows you to add additional Student Name regions For example if Trage Tarot Decoy processing tests you could add SS eT OO oes a Student ID that is being collected from the form so that Ja Sere mage ranes vit ao contan the asprin fern tenglate page mtr Fam tengla contas mutile your processed images all have A ce the Student ID number in them e Inthe Image Target Directory area you may choose to add a region from the processed data to the folder structure that holds the processed images Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button For example if processing tests you could add a Test ID that is being collected from the form so that each student s form images are stored in a folder containing the Test ID e Inthe Name Builder box click the OK button to return to the Read Wizard 11 In the Saved image type box select an image type to use for storing images The choices are PCX DCX PDF TIF or JPG 12 When saving to the PDF or TIF formats you can choose the compression level under Image compression level Uncompressed Group 3 Group 3 2d Group 4 and LZW Group 4 creates the most compressed image smallest file size that take up less space on your computer 13 Mark the checkbox for Save multiple page form templates as multiple page image files if you a
196. en paste it into multiple cells Tip This section assumes an understanding of how to make grid selections in order to select grid cells See Section 8 3 1 Making Grid Selections for detailed information about this topic 175 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 176 To cut data from the grid 1 Select an area to cut Select the Edit menu and then click Cut click al or press Ctri X The selected data are cut from the grid and placed on the Windows clipboard To copy grid data 1 Select an area to copy Lf 2 Select the Edit menu and then click Copy click or press Ctrl C The selected data are copied to the Windows clipboard To paste data from the clipboard to the grid 1 Select the area to which you want to paste g The data on the Windows clipboard are pasted into the selected grid cell s 2 Select the Edit menu and then click Paste click or press Ctrl V Note You do not need to select the same amount of space in the grid as the amount of space you copied to the clipboard To use Paste Special 1 Select a cell containing the data you wish to copy Q 2 Select the Edit menu and then click Copy or click 3 Select the cells in which you want to paste the data 4 Select the Edit menu and then click Paste Special The data on the Windows clipboard are pasted into the selected grid cells To delete grid data 1 Select the area that you want to delete 2 Select the Edit menu and then click Delete right c
197. ensitive and it may pick up unintended marks such as erasures and stray marks Increasing to 6 may cause the software to be quite discriminate and it may choose the most filled mark for you when two marks are selected and are not permitted For OCR regions choose a higher value to have the software be more stringent and flag when uncertain and choose a lower value to make the software less likely to flag the region even if it is unsure 4 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view Tip If you are having trouble recognizing an entire form you can override the form template Recognition Threshold settings for all regions by going to Tools Recognition Settings in the Data Center 6 3 1 f Blank Multiple and Duplicate Exception Handling You can specify how Remark Office OMR should handle blank multiple and duplicate responses in OMR regions when processing forms and exporting data The default settings are e Blank responses The word BLANK is inserted for items that are not answered e Multiple responses All responses are shown but flagged with green when more than one response is chosen and not permitted e Duplicate responses The word DUP is inserted for Rank questions when more than one response is chosen Color coding is also applied to the data grid making the exceptions easier to locate yellow for blanks green for mults and peach for duplicates Also by default only one answer response is allowed You c
198. ent feeder which can skew the page as it is pulled into the copier Test your form by creating a form template in the software and processing a batch of forms that are filled out as you expect to have them returned e g not perfectly before printing large quantities Once you feel that your form design is adequate try to photocopy all of the forms that you will need in one batch This eliminates the need to make photocopies from photocopies at a later date which can lead to form inconsistencies Regardless of how you duplicate your forms be sure to keep blank copies on hand You always want to create your Remark Office OMR template using the same quality form that you distribute to your respondents For example if you photocopy your form use a blank photocopy to make the form template in the software 49 Remark Office OMR User s Guide It is best to maintain as much control over form duplication as possible However if your workflow is such that multiple locations print and distribute their own forms request that at least one blank copy of the form is returned to you with the filled in forms from each location This allows you to realign your scanning template to the printout if you find that the forms have shifted significantly Tip Save forms to the Adobe PDF format to retain original form formatting If you need to have someone else print your form this format is preferable over other native word processing formats Remember to e
199. entation we will break out the steps for each but please note you can do both operations at the same time Tip If you are not familiar with the Automation Wizard which is used to automate basic Remark Office OMR functions please read the Remark Office OMR 8 Automation Wizard User s Guide pdf file located on your Windows Start menu Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation 197 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 198 To use the Send Wizard to send files via FTP 1 Select the Tools menu and click Send Wizard 2 If you have already saved a Send Wizard configuration file click the Load button to retrieve it Otherwise continue to step 3 to begin a new Send Wizard configuration 3 Under File Name Pattern Matching using the Browse button chose a location on your computer or network for the software to search when looking for files to send 4 Under Custom Filter choose the extension of the file to send For example if you are sending Excel 2010 files to an FTP site you would enter xlsx If you want all files found in the specified directory to be included in the Send Wizard Send Files send operation enter Select the files to send or load an existing send configuration file 5 Click the first Add button to move your pals selections into the configuration window w 6 Optional If you have additional files not a generated by Remark Office OMR or very eet specific files that you wa
200. er a file base name that the software Office Read Wizard can use to name the images stored for this rere te ued When soya moss form The default base name is the form template name However you may use any oO name you like We suggest using something EX seve images in a subfolder based on the foment rane T that identifies to you that the images noe E E belong to a certain form The images that EX Save te paga form tenlstas as matipl page mage fles are stored all begin with this base name Aa and then have the page number if scanning a multi page template date and m time appended to them to keep track of the various images You may optionally choose a region from the template to use as the base name The value that is collected from the form for the specified region is used as the base name for the corresponding stored If you leave the Begin image names with option blank your images only have the page number if applicable date and time as the name of each image In the Image target directory box click the ellipsis button to select a location in which to store the images for this form You may use the default directory for images or select a different directory 10 Mark the checkbox for Save images in a subfolder based on the form template s name to have the Data Center automatically create a folder in which to store these images The folder name is the name of the form template and the folder is created
201. er a name in the box titled File name Select the Custom ASC TXT format in the box titled Save as type Click the OK button If you have used the Custom Wizard format TIE previously and have a saved configuration file that Facer Feb rs ef Vater Ser a applies to this data set click the Browse button n to locate the configuration file Otherwise click the Bie ___Fan r Next gt gt button to begin creating a new Erenn mE E Text Export Wizard OUAU ender National School Lunch Prograrr configuration file ian 7 Select the options you wish to use to customize age your data set Each option is described in the pone Sails 2360 FNRS BELSON AB 8 2 0e6 8 previous table Use the Next gt gt button to navigate ache Hacky 1540 FN RRS WILSON 87 B G DED from screen to screen E E Ba 8 When finished click the Finish button 9 When the Save Text Export Configuration window appears click the Yes button to save your settings to a file that you can use later when saving data If you do not wish to save this configuration file click the No button If you are not saving the configuration file the data file is saved when you click the No button Continue with the next steps if you are saving the configuration file 10 Optional If saving the configuration file in the Save Text Export Configuration As box select a location in which to save the configuration file in the Save in box e Enter a name for the
202. er applications using this file 1705 The disk is full Delete some files or try saving to another location 1706 Too many files are currently open on your system Close some applications and try the operation again 1707 Permission was denied or the disk was not ready 1708 when trying to write the file Also check the region names you are using in the form template for invalid characters such as commas parentheses etc 2000 Graphics 2001 The graphics file selected is not of a type File Errors 2005 recognized by Remark Office OMR Check to see that it is a supported file type You may email the file to Gravic technical support for verification 2006 Error encountered while processing the graphics 2015 file File may not be a type recognized by Remark Office OMR or may be corrupted You may email the file to Gravic technical support for verification 2016 Error encountered while processing the TIF 2031 graphics file File may not be a type recognized by Remark Office OMR or may be corrupted You may email the file to Gravic technical support for verification Class Category 3000 Form Template Training Errors Error 3000 Understanding Error Messages Error Text The number of rows specified does not match the number of labels specified Check to ensure that your marks bubbles checkboxes are not degraded 3001 The number of columns specified does not match the number of labels specified Check to ensure
203. ercentage to require more fill on the page in order for the page to be considered blank more sensitive To use Blank Page Detection 1 Mark the checkbox for Ignore Blank Pages 2 Choose the desired Blank page fill threshold 10 is the default as previously described 3 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again 7 14 g Page Error Detection The Page Error Detection option allows you to queue pages that contain many errors for later review If a page contains more OMR or barcode errors than the threshold you have set the page s image is placed in the Unrecognized Images Queue You can then review all of the images in the queue and decide whether to keep or discard them It is Processing Forms strongly recommended that before you use this feature you read Section 7 9 5 on using the Unrecognized Images Queue Note Multiple response green cells and blank response yellow BLANK cells errors are not part of the error percentage used for detecting page errors Page errors are recognition errors where the OMR region or barcode simply could not be read Use the Page Error Threshold to set how much of the page must contain errors before it is put in the unrecognized images queue The default setting is 40 Use a lower percentage to require fewer errors on the page before the image is sent to the unrecognized images queue Use a higher per
204. es and or functions are available e Copy paste e Copy special paste special e Drag drop reordering e Delete e Undo redo e Adjusting region borders e Moving regions e Reset images e Auto align e Spell check e Scales e Zoom e File properties All of these features can be accessed from the menus Many also have toolbar buttons or can be accessed by right clicking the mouse on a node in the tree view or in the image representation area 6 4 1 Copy Paste When creating regions with similar attributes using the Copy and Paste options can facilitate the form template creation process You can copy regions on the same page or on different pages within the same form template To copy and paste a region 1 Activate the region s you want to copy by clicking within the region boundaries in the image representation area or clicking its node in the tree view Lt 2 Select the Edit menu and then click Copy click vay right click the mouse and select Copy or press Ctrl C on the keyboard 3 Highlight the node before or after where you would like the region copied 4 Select the Edit menu and then click Paste Before Ctrl B or Paste After Ctrl V to place the copied node either before or after the selected node Note You may also use the toolbar button for Paste 4 or right click and choose Paste to paste the region after the highlig q node After pasting a region the region appears in the image representation area of
205. es that are not selected Each response is output to a separate cell in the data grid during form processing In comparison when you use the Multiple or List region types for questions that allow multiple responses Remark Office OMR places the data in a single cell delimited by commas The Boolean region type is useful for questions that allow multiple responses but for which you need the data in separate cells For example the Boolean region type can be used when you are exporting data to programs such as the legacy SPSS format that cannot handle multiple responses that are delimited by a comma The regular SPSS format does not require multiple responses to be output as Boolean fields 61 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Example Form In which of the following activities do you participate mark all that apply Athletics collegiate Athletics intramural Chess Team Debate Team o0 o0 o Marching Band Data Output Activity 1 Activity2 Activity3 Activity4 Activity5 No Yes No Yes No Binary Region A Binary region designation is used when you want a pre defined value 1 to be output if an answer choice is selected and another pre defined value 0 for answer choices that are not selected Binary regions output all responses to one cell Using the previous example you would have the following Example Form In which of the following activities do you participate mark all that apply
206. et style interface to display processed data Each grid column corresponds to an item or question 115 Remark Office OMR User s Guide on the form as it was defined in the form template If your form template contains multiple pages each page is separated by a blue line Important Note Form templates from previous versions of the software can be opened in the Remark Office OMR 8 software Once they are opened in the new version form templates are automatically converted Form template files are upward compatible only Once a form template has been converted to the new version it cannot be opened in a previous version of the software Always make copies of form templates from previous versions before converting them To access the Data Center 1 From the Windows Start menu click Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Remark Office OMR Data Center You can see a Task Pane on the left and an empty grid on the right This grid is where your form template is opened and data is processed To select a form template Mm 1 Select the File menu and then click Open Form Template or click le to display the Open form template window Alternatively select Open form template from the Task Pane Note Form template file names have an OMR file extension Open Form Template 7 Look in C9 Templates Tip You can access recently used form oe templates from the File menu or the MAD Reeser arenes seston ts D Task Pane Desk
207. eview Exceptions a Review Exceptions amp Unrecognized Images Re mar k Offi ce O M R b e g INS p rocessin g fo rms R ed images is the process of viewing and matching Tracking regions that are not automatically recognized during a normal ly When an image is not recog nized ognized images when using region tracking andjor page error detection Review ining data that have been flagged operation Please note that when reading in ou can review th leaning Server Made the read operation will pause so that y w the desired exceptions the Unrecognized Image Utility window oe ee appears You use this window to make changes Please proceed to Section 7 9 5 for detailed information about the Unrecognized Image Utility window To use the Unrecognized Image Utility after form processing 1 After processing forms select the Tools menu and then click Review Unrecognized Images The Unrecognized Image Utility window appears displaying any images that were not recognized during the read operation You use this window to make changes Please proceed to Section 7 9 5 for detailed information about the Unrecognized Image Utility window 7 9 5 Using the Unrecognized Image Utility When an image is not recognized automatically the Unrecognized Image Utility appears You use this window to see which specific ID region was not recognized and then match the image to the appropriate form template form template page or respondent The following ta
208. ew Exceptions Remark Office OMR provides the Review Exceptions feature as a method to validate data You may use the Review Exceptions feature to review the following exception cases blank responses multiple responses form errors barcode errors database lookup errors required items OCR regions repeated rank responses multiple exceptions or data entry Image regions The Review Exceptions feature can be used in one of two ways During Form Processing If used during the reading process whether scanning forms or processing saved image files Review Exceptions provides an option to have the Data Center pause after encountering selected exception types You can then select or enter the correct response After Form Processing Review Exceptions can also be used after the forms have been processed therefore you are not required to have the software stop processing forms when exceptions are encountered When reviewing after processing the software cycles through the data file to find exception cases and then allows you to make the appropriate changes Regardless of how you use Review Exceptions the Data Center displays a Review Exceptions window in the Task Pane The software also shows you the question region containing the exception case in the Image Viewer at the bottom of your screen You may use the image to guide you in making the appropriate updates in the Review Exceptions pane The following table details the available Review Except
209. ference Option Coe Lee Description Sets the default location in which to store form template Form templates files Highlight this selection and then click the Modify Directory button to set a directory The default directory is C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Templates Data Sets the default location in which to store data files Highlight this selection and then click the Modify Directory button to set a directory The default directory is C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Data Dictionaries Sets the default location in which to store spell check dictionary files Highlight this selection and then click the Modify Directory button to set a directory The default directory is C Windows System32 Sets the locations s in which images are stored for Image Directory Search List processed forms and Image region Image Clips When a cell in the data grid is clicked the stored image file is displayed in the Image Viewer The Image Viewer can be used for image assisted data entry Review Exceptions and in cell editing Use the Add Directory button to add any directories in which you plan to store image files for processed forms Remark Office OMR searches for these images in the order in which the directories are specified Use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order and the Remove Directory button to remove a directory from the search list Note that you c
210. ffice Archive ROA format in the box titled Save as type 5 OPTIONAL If desired mark the checkbox for Esam Select the appropriate file type and file name and then click OK Delete original images after archiving to delete the original images that are stored Lookin E bata 7ea8ben during form scanning These images are included in the archive format in case you need to access them at a later point 6 OPTIONAL If Remark Support has requested an ROA file for troubleshooting mark the Include support files checkbox This action e includes additional information for support e personnel to correctly troubleshoot your issue iyana 7 Click the OK button to save the file File name MyData Select the archive extract location Folder Data 2 Se C FormReturn To open a saved Remark Office Archive file E cae T eS pare Authentication Builder Remark FTP Utility 1 1 Inthe Data Center select the File menu and E Remark Rem Bark Remark Office OMR 7 then select Open Form Template 1 Remark Office ONR 7 Demo eo 2 Set the Files of type to Supported Files or Som Remark Office Archive Files 3 Highlight the ROA file you wish to open and then click the OK button E Reports 7 r Templates 4 A Select the archive extract location Directory C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 DatalData window appears Use this window to select a location in which to unzip the files a
211. fice OMR Data Center You should refer to your scanner s documentation for instructions on installing and using the scanner You can read forms directly from a scanner connected to the computer running Remark Office OMR or from pre scanned images you created outside of the Remark software The following topics are covered e Opening a form template Section 7 2 e Using the Read Wizard Section 7 3 e The Image Viewer Section 7 4 e The Graph Viewer Section 7 5 e Reviewing exceptions Section 7 6 e Collating forms Section 7 7 e Overwriting data Section 7 8 e Form page and respondent IDs Section 7 9 e Batch processing Section 7 10 e Server Mode Section 7 11 e Respondent detection Section 7 12 e Reviewing duplicates Section 7 13 e Software recognition options Section 7 14 e Recognition tools Section 7 15 7 2 Opening a Form Template The Remark Office OMR software requires a form template file for each unique form that you want to process This file defines all of the information needed for the software to read the form Form templates are created in the Remark Office OMR Template Editor which is covered in Chapter 6 of this user s guide Once you have a form template for your form it can be reused as often as needed as long as the form does not change To begin the reading process open the form template file corresponding to your form in the Data Center The Remark Office OMR template grid window uses a spreadshe
212. file in the File name box e Leave the Save as type box set to Text Export Configuration Files tec e Click the Save button to save the file and create the data file lt lt Back 8 6 4 Database Update Format The database update format allows you to update an existing database based on the data in the Remark Office OMR data grid Access or Excel The data are matched to the existing database by the region names and a mapping process When saving to this format you map the regions in the Remark Office OMR data to the fields in the existing database You also choose a question to be the record identifier If data corresponding to the unique record identifier exists in the database it is updated with what is in Remark Office OMR when the identifiers are matched For example if you are conducting a survey that collects demographic information and include for a respondent identifier on your form you could use the identifier as the record ID to update an external database using the Database Update format During the save process Remark Office OMR attempts to find the Student ID in the database and then updates the data fields associated with that student If the student ID is not found you have the option of adding the record to the external database 189 Remark Office OMR User s Guide To use the Database Update format 1 Select the File menu and then click Save Data As The Save Data
213. folders and files on to see this location When the database is initially created it uses the date of creation as the filename From that point forward all changes to all templates data files are stored in that Access file as long as the feature is turned on Data file types exception flags and actions are all listed with a numeric equivalent in the database The additional tables in the database explain each of the numeric values When a database reaches 10MB in size a new database is created the next time Remark Office OMR is opened Four tables are created in the Access file History Table e ID Numeric index for each action e Template File The name of the form template that corresponds to the data file that was changed e Log Action The action taken such as opening data reviewing exceptions etc e Data File The name of the data file that was changed e Table Name The name of the table if applicable that was changed e File Type The file type of the file that was changed Note that this is a numeric value that corresponds to the items in the Save as type drop down list in the Save Data window For example the Remark RMK format is the second item in the list so it is listed as 2 See File Types Table below for a complete listing e Column Number The column in the data that was changed e Row Number The row in the data that was changed e Respondent ID The respondent ID if applicable that was changed e Question N
214. for detailed information about setting up a scanner 4 If desired modify the recognition settings being used by the software by clicking the Recognition Settings link This link opens the recognition settings that apply to this form template Please see Section 7 14 for a detailed description of each option The link is provided in the Read Wizard for your convenience Note that you should not modify the recognition settings unless you experience recognition problems with your form The default settings are optimized for general use of the software If you do modify the recognition settings from the Read Wizard the settings are stored with the form template and therefore still remain in effect the next time you use the same form template 5 If desired mark the appropriate checkboxes under Advanced Collection Options The following options are available when scanning these options are covered in more depth in later sections of this chapter Recognition Settings History Exam B Optinaly gabally override the recognition thresholds saved n the form templates Option Description Server Mode Automates form processing by having Remark Office OMR run in the background using specific options See Section 7 11 Server Mode for further details Auto Form ID Mode Allows the software to automatically recognize form templates form pages and respondents through identifiers you place on the forms See Section 7 9 Form Pa
215. form template 3 When you are ready to start processing forms open the form template s you wish to use with Respondent Tracker mode in the Data Center see Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template 4 Read forms from either scanner or image file by selecting the Tools menu and then a See Section 7 3 The Remark clicking Read Wizard or by clicking Office OMR Read Wizard for more details about processing forms Make your selections and then click the Read button After recognizing the page and respondent Remark Office OMR places the data into the appropriate data grid section Each unique respondent tracker produces a new row of data in the data grid There may be times when you are Page Data Exists presented with overwrite options if a rer peony oe A tec respondent tracker data value is already Record 1 present in the data grid The message tells Ea naan you that the region s value has already been read You may Overwrite what has Overwrite the existing data with this data ignore this page s data or end the read operation f Overwrite J Ignore End Read 142 Processing Forms been read Ignore it skip the page or choose End Read to stop the read process e g in the case where you think incorrect forms might be being processed 7 9 4 Reviewing Unrecognized Images Forms that are not recognized while processing in Auto Form ID Auto Page ID or Respondent Tracker mode are stored for review You ca
216. form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template d Wizard 2 Select the Tools menu and then click Read Wizard or click a i Alternatively you may select the Read Wizard link from the Task Pane 3 Inthe Read Method window select the radio button for Read from image files 153 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 4 if desired click the link for Advanced Image Recognition Properties This link allows you to set the following options Invert image Auto deskew images during recognition Auto despeckle images during recognition Caution We do not suggest making changes to the Advanced Image Recognition Properties unless you encounter difficulties related to these settings 5 Inthe Advanced Collection Options Office Read Wizard area mark the checkbox for Server Mode pamena T The Auto Form ID and Package and r eae rer rename images options are also available 3 020 ents in Server M od e Read from image fies Advanced Image Recognition Properties 6 Click the Next gt gt button to continue SESE a o 7 Inthe Image Source Directories area E estage and terane anes use the Add Directories button to locate the folder s on your computer or network that contains the images you wish to process Any images found in the folders listed here are processed based on the filters you select in the next step 8 Inthe Image Filters area mark the checkboxes corresponding to the types of images in the Image source dir
217. formation about using Page IDs To scan forms using Server Mode 1 Open the correct form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template Tip If you want to process multiple form types simultaneously use Form IDs and each form You can then use Server Mode with multiple form templates by using the Auto Form ID feature See Sections 6 3 3 and 7 9 for further information about Auto Form ID 2 Select the Tools menu and then click Read Wizard or click SJ Read Wizard Alternatively you may select the Read Wizard link from the Task Pane In the Read Method window select the radio button for Read from scanner In the Advanced Collection Options area mark the checkbox for Server Mode Click the Next gt gt button to continue If you would like to configure image naming conventions click the Next gt gt button to continue Otherwise click the Read button to begin scanning pages Office Read Wizard Read Method B J Select the method to use for data collection Select Method to Use for Data Collection Read from scanner Scanner Properties Recognition Settings O Read from image fies Advanced Image Recognition Properties anced Collects Server Mode 151 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 152 7 8 The Scanned Image Naming Conventions window allows you to specify options about the images that are automatically stored each time you scan forms In the Begin image names with box ent
218. from one cell in the data Special grid to multiple cells x Delete Removes the highlighted information This operation does kad Delete not use the clipboard and Remark Office OMR retains no copy of the deleted information ESinsertrow Insert Row Inserts a row into the data grid based upon the active Shift cell The row is added above the row containing the active Insert cell E3 Delete Row Delete Row Removes a row in the data grid The row containing the Shift active cell s is deleted This operation cannot be undone Delete 24 Navigating Remark Office OMR Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item SE Find Displays a window asking for the search text Remark Ed Ctrl F Office OMR searches forward from the cursor position for the text requested Find Next Searches for the next instance of the previous search If F3 Find has not yet been chosen or could not locate the previous search Find Next disables Qeeplace Replace Displays the Replace text window The search text box Ctrl H contains either the highlighted text or the previous search text and the replace text contains either the previous replace text or is blank You can replace all occurrences of the search text by clicking Replace All Select All Highlights the entire data grid This is equivalent to Ctrl A clicking the top left corner of the grid and dragging the mouse to the bottom right selecting all cells in the
219. fter entering your labels in the Labels grid to save the scale for future use If your question has a Not Applicable NA answer choice and you do not want the NA responses to be included in the Remark Quick Stats statistics e g means choose the appropriate label from the NA Label drop down list This list is automatically populated with the labels you defined in the Labels grid Only one option can be selected as NA per question In the Remark Quick Stats preferences you can choose whether to include or exclude the NA responses The Define Format feature applies to Grid OMR regions only Mark this checkbox to enter a pattern for the data that is output during form processing The default setting indicates that the characters are displayed one after the other with no separators The is a placeholder for your data You may change this pattern to enter items such as slashes for a date decimal points etc Enter the appropriate character in the proper position e g fora date XK KK PRE Include region in read operation Mark this checkbox to include data from this region when processing forms If this checkbox is not marked the region exists in the form template but no data is captured during form processing This checkbox is on by default To create an OMR region 1 From the Page or Region menu choose Insert and then select OMR Region After Selected Region Page or OMR Region Before Selected Region Page Tip Ther
220. g Image regions Set default Image region properties Set default Barcode region properties ig OCR regions Set default OCR region properties Default Region Definition Image type Data entry S Threshold 3 a Data type Textual x Default Image Clip Options Target directory C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Images le Clip file type TIF Compression Group 4 highest s Default Grading amp Survey Analysis C Grade region O Tabulate region Defaults 109 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 110 Section Option Default Region Image type Definition Description Sets the default Image region type Data Entry Image Clip or Data Entry and Image Clip Data Entry regions allow you to hand enter data from the region into your data grid with the assistance of image files Image Clip regions capture a snapshot image of the information in the region and store it on your computer Data Entry and Image Clip regions allow you to capture image clips but still use other Image region properties such as default fills and qualitative coding The information captured from all types of Image regions can be viewed in reports in Remark Quick Stats Data type Sets the default Image region data type to be used when creating new Image regions Textual or Numeric The data type is used when exporting data Threshold Sets the default recognition threshold for Image regions Lower thresholds force th
221. g the barcode region Set up the barcode as usual You then see it listed in the tree view with a plus sign Click the plus sign to expand the barcode showing its separate pieces of output Then select the individual item from the tree view to which you want to apply the tracking To set up a Respondent Tracker region Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 From the Properties window click the Tracking link in the left Task Pane Mark the checkbox for Use Region as Unique Identifier Select the radio button for Respondent tracker region s value identifies this respondent during the read operation 5 If desired mark the checkbox for Insert ID data into the grid during the read process Viewing the ID data captured along with the rest of the data can be useful for verification of processed data 6 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view hWN When you are ready to process forms open the form template containing Respondent Tracker regions in the Remark Office OMR Data Center Use the Read Wizard to process your forms Remark Office OMR begins processing the forms searching for the Page ID regions first When it matches a region on the form to the region in the form template it automatically places that data in the Using the Template Editor correct page order It then searches for the Respondent Tracker and matches that respondent s data to an existing record or begins a new record An
222. gardless of the replacement characters being used the region contain a yellow BLANK flag Ignore leading trailing If leading or trailing characters in the region are left blank they are ignored This allows you to capture data smaller than the allotted region without the data being flagged with a yellow BLANK flag Never If any character within the region is blank Remark Office OMR ignores it The region never appears with a yellow BLANK flag in the data grid Select the replacement option to be used by default when a duplicate response occurs for a Rank region during form processing The text entered in this box appears as output in the data grid and is exported in any saved data files The default replacement is DUP Other pre defined options include Asterisk Nothing Space Character and Tilde You may also type characters into the Replace with box 6 7 3 Image Region Preferences The Image Region screen allows you to setup default settings to be used when creating new Image regions When creating new Image regions the selected settings are used automatically However you can always change individual Image region properties as you go The following options are available Preferences 4 Set the preference values to use throughout the application as well as the default region values to use when inserting Preferences General Set general preferences gig OMR regions Set default OMR region properties si
223. ge and Respondent IDs for further details Start reading from form template page Allows you to process forms starting with a specific form template page instead of at the beginning This feature is useful for overwriting data 118 Processing Forms Option Description Collate Mode Allows you to scan forms that are double sided without the use of a duplex scanner See Section 7 7 Using Collate Mode for further details Resume last Collate Mode Resumes scanning from the point in which you left off session in your last Collate Mode scan session 6 If you would like to configure image naming conventions for your scanned forms click the Next gt gt button to continue Otherwise skip to step 14 The Image Naming Conventions Image Naming Conventions window allows you to specify o ptio ns Select the naming conventions that willbe used when saving images about the images that are Image Naming Conventions i i Begin image names with E hest E A uto m at Ica y sto red eer h ti me yo u Image target directory C Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Images i scan forms In the Begin image re sea cree E E names with box enter a file base seinare CE x mage compression level Group 4 highest v name that the software can use to a mutiple k templates as multiple page image files name the ima ges stored for this form fal pesene that mage names vil also contain the date and tme of hen they were processed as wel
224. ghlighted some of the bigger features here Take some time to review this manual and the software to see all of the new enhancements Recognition Improvements Many improvements have been made to how your forms are recognized Some of these improvements are behind the scenes and some are available for customization in the program s recognition options such as o Ignoring Large Marks If your respondents put a large X through the answer choice they did not want to mark and then fill another bubble you can now ignore the large X You can also instruct respondents to put X through bubbles filled by mistake as opposed to trying to erase them or use white out to remove them o Dynamic Brightness Compensation The software automatically compensates for scanned images that are lighter or darker than the form template image leading to fewer recognition issues due to changes in image brightness o Blank Page Detection You can automatically ignore blank pages that might have been scanned accidentally o Page Error Detection Pages that contain more than a customizable minimum number of OMR and barcode errors are sent to an unrecognized images queue for review at a later time Recognition Tools New options have been added to the Task Pane so that you can review form template regions on the scanned image and move them to re recognize regions that did not read during the initial pass For example if form images are badly skewed or offset from
225. ght 2010 Gravic Inc All Rights Reserved Specifications subject to change without notice Contents Remark Office OMR Overview 1 1 1 What is Included with your Software ccceeeeeeeee cease eeeeeeeeaeenaes 2 1 2 New Features in this Version eceeeeeee eee eee eee e ee eee eee eeenaes 3 13 Technical SUPPO tt wcscnccatssvecaviseute tescivhalliees nator div craic aaa Saa a aaia 7 Installing and Activating Remark Office OMR 9 Zi AvOVERVIEW L EA ntiwkecladt et ene T Gelbax bdalw E TTE 9 2 2 System RECUIFEMENES 21 eee e cece cette EINIR eens eens eeeeeneeeeaeee eas 9 2 3 Installing the Software cceceeee eect ee eee eee eee eee ee teen tees 10 2 4 Uninstalling the Software c cece ceeee eee eee e eens eee teens eee ee ea ees 11 2 5 Running Remark Office OMR ccceeceee eee eens eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaees 11 2 5 1 Software Activation cceeceee cece eee eee teeta teeta teeta ees 12 2 5 1 a Manual Activation cceeceee eee eee eee eee ee 13 2 5 2 Transferring a LiICENSC ceeceee ese e eee eee eee eee ee teeta ees 13 2 5 3 Missing or Corrupt License File ccceeeeeeee eee e ee eens 14 2 6 Registering the Software cicceee cece eee eee eee teeta eens eee ee eaees 15 2 7 Updating the Software cccceceeee eee eee eee eee teeta eens eee neta ees 15 Navigating Remark Office OMR 17 Sel OVERVICW Stic crstieeeeesioinde Qird i veuetvis E EE 17 3 2 Remark Office
226. gin Reading in Other Direction Click the Continue button 10 When finished reading the even pages the backsides you are prompted to start a new batch or finish processing Continue reading forms in this manner until all forms have been processed Caution When using Collate Mode scan complete form sets in batches Complete an entire set of odd and even pages before scanning more forms in a single direction This way if the scanning process is interrupted unexpectedly you are less likely to lose any data and it is easier to recover 137 Remark Office OMR User s Guide If the scanning process is interrupted Remark Office OMR has a Resume option Follow the directions above but mark the checkbox for Resume last Collate Mode session in the Read Wizard This option picks up the scanning from where you last left off 7 8 Overwriting Data Records 138 The Remark Office OMR Data Center allows you to process forms in their original order beginning on a selected form template page This method is useful if your reading session was interrupted unexpectedly and you need to resume form processing midway into your data To use this method you must first select a grid row You can then use the Read Wizard to process new forms either at the beginning of the selected data grid row or beginning with a certain form template page The latter option is the same as reading from the scanner or image files normally except that you can choose the page
227. grid can be sorted according to the values in a specific region Data can be sorted in ascending or descending order For example you can sort your data by ID number or respondent name There are two ways to sort data right clicking a column header or using the menus 179 Remark Office OMR User s Guide To sort data by right clicking the mouse 1 Select the header of the column by which you want to sort the data the entire column is highlighted See Section 8 3 1 Making Grid Selections 2 Right click the column header click Sort and then click Ascending or Descending The entire data set is sorted according to your selection To sort data using the menus 3Sort 1 Select the Edit menu and then click Sort or click Sizes 2 Inthe Primary sort key box use the drop down list to choose a region on which to base the sort operation 3 Mark the checkbox for Descending if you want the data to be sorted in descending Rerform Sort order Leave this checkbox blank to sort the ar o vee 3 teys to use to sort the deta data in ascending order 4 If you want to sort the data by more than Primary sort key StudentID Secondary sort key Gender one criterion select the appropriate regions arden CE on which to sort in the Secondary sort key and Third sort key boxes 5 When finished selecting regions click the Sort button The entire data set is sorted according to your selection s 8 5 Spell Checker
228. he last settings used for that specific form template are applied Caution Easy Scan is useful if you are using the same settings each time you scan If you are uncertain about what settings exist it is recommended that you run the Read Wizard to initiate scanning To use Easy Scan 1 Open the correct form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template 2 Select the Tools menu and then click Easy Scan or click the Easy Scan toolbar s5 button me All pages in the scanner are scanned based on the last settings used with this form template If the form template has never been used the last used settings in the Read Wizard are applied You then see a spreadsheet of data Each row represents one complete form and each column represents each item question you defined in the form template 121 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 122 7 3 2 Processing Image Files with the Read Wizard Remark Office OMR can process image files that have already been scanned For example if you have a network scanner or a scanner that is not compatible with Remark Office OMR you can scan your forms in another application and then save the resulting image files If you use a multi function peripheral MFP that has scanning capabilities you can scan forms on the MFP save them as image files and then have Remark Office OMR read the images with the corresponding form template The end result looks just as if you had scanned the forms directly in the Re
229. he test points to be used for grading The following table lists the region types and their default grade settings Region Grade Status Test Type Test Points Type Objective or Subjective OMR Multiple Rank Boolean Objective Correct 1 No Response 0 Grid Add and Binary N A Not Graded Image Not Graded N A N A Barcode Not Graded N A N A OCR Not Graded N A N A 79 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Questions can be designated as Objective or Subjective questions An objective question is one where respondents choose one or more pre defined answers on a form by darkening in a mark e g bubble These questions are typically multiple choice or true false questions A subjective question is one that is open ended and must be graded by a human such as an essay or short answer question Remark Office OMR cannot automatically read this type of question however you can include points from a subjective question when grading First place a region on the form where the instructor can enter the appropriate amount of points earned on the subjective portion of the test This is typically an OMR region where the instructor bubbles in the points earned Then designate the region as a subjective item in the form template This region must be set to the numeric data type in order to use the region as a subjective region When setting up your answer key enter the maximum number of subjective points that can be earned see the Remark Quick St
230. hen you are ready to review the newly processed forms in the Review Exceptions window click the down arrow on the Begin Review button and choose Begin from Last Read Operation The Data Center begins reviewing data grid rows from the point where you most recently began processing forms The Data Center searches the data for the specified exception cases When a selected exception case is found it appears in the Review Exceptions window in the left Task Pane You use this window to make changes Please proceed to the next section for detailed information about the Review Exceptions window Tip When using Review Exceptions after form processing you can review the entire data set or sections of the data set To review sections of the data set select the column or row header s of the area you wish to review or highlight a group of cells For example if you only want to review a specific comment region Image region so that you can hand enter data select the column header of the comment region so that the entire column is highlighted Then click Review Exceptions only the selected column is reviewed There may be times when you are reviewing exceptions and the exceptions are legitimate e g a question is left blank By default if you leave the exception as is it always retains the color coding and exception text If you prefer to remove the color coding once an item has been reviewed go to Tools Preferences and mark the checkbox for Clea
231. hese steps Otherwise skip to Step 10 7 OPTIONAL Select your database type from the DSN drop down list 8 OPTIONAL Select the appropriate checkbox to indicate whether your database is Directory or DSN based Directory based or DSN based 9 OPTIONAL If your database utilizes password protection use the Username and Password boxes to enter your login information If the database is not password protected you may skip this step 10 In the Lookup amp Return section click the Connect to Database button to link the database to the region 11 Use the Table drop down list to select the table in the database containing the fields to which you are linking the region 12 Use the Lookup drop down list to select a field in the connected database to which you want to link this region When the forms are processed the respondents answers are verified against the values in this database field If the answer is found in the database field Remark Office OMR outputs the Replace value If the answer is not found in the database field Remark Office OMR flags it for review 13 Use the Replace drop down list to select a field in the connected database to return when the Lookup field is verified If you only want to verify data and not replace it with anything else use the same field in both the Lookup and Replace lists If you want to look up the value and then replace it with a different database field s information select the appropriate
232. ic Brightness Compensation Recognition Settings Dynemcely adn for mages that were ohter or darber than the orignal 1 Mark the checkbox for Dynamic Brightness Compensation 2 Choose the desired Brightness compensation threshold 5 is the default as previously described 3 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again 7 14 f Blank Page Detection The Blank Page Detection option allows you to automatically detect when a blank page is scanned and remove it from the recognition process For example suppose you have the duplex option turned on for your scanner but are scanning a single sided form Using Blank Page Detection the backsides that the duplex scanner picks up are ignored Or if a blank page is accidentally scanned with valid pages it is ignored This feature is also useful if your form has an odd number of pages e g three double sided pages You don t have to create a blank backside in the form template you can simply ignore the blank pages The Blank Page Fill Threshold determines how much of the page must be filled in order for it to be ignored The default setting is 10 meaning that if the page s fill percentage is less than 10 of the template s lowest fill percentage the page is ignored Use a lower percentage to require less fill on the page in order for the page to be considered blank less sensitive Use a higher p
233. ice OMR regions questions are listed in the second column called Grid Column Use the down arrow in the Grid Column section to choose the appropriate field to map to the corresponding database field Note Remark Office OMR attempts to automatically map the fields based on the field region names Review the field mapping first and then make changes if necessary a r E a eens identifier fields and then click OK 10 Choose a field or fields to use as an identifier by Cee marking the appropriate checkbox next to the z field name The identifier fields are used to pel deen bors een tra ase match data from Remark Office OMR to the ee external database If a match is not found the ee Dy Student Name StU dent Name data is not added to the database unless you selected this feature in step 8 and you receive a message You may select more than one field to use as the identifier in which case the data from all identifier fields must be a match for the record to be updated in the external database leleledatelelelela alana l StudentID G ender Gender jational School Lunch Program National School Lunch Program Teacher he Q Q Q Q Q wo e lo en a leo Ooooo000 11 Click the OK button to save the data 12 If any problems are encountered when updating the selected file a message appears 190 detailing the problems If the database is updated successfully you receive a message tell
234. ick the Next gt gt button to configure remaining Read Wizard options See Section 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard for further details about processing forms Make your selections and then click the Read button Caution When using Auto Form ID alone the Data Center processes multiple page forms sequentially After recognizing the first page of a multiple page form Remark Office OMR assumes the following pages belong to the same form template You may optionally use the Auto Page ID and or Respondent Tracking features described in the next two sections to process pages out of sequential order After recognizing the form type the Data Center places the data into the appropriate data grid window Any images that the Data Center cannot recognize enter a queue of unrecognized images You can review these images during or after form processing See Section 7 9 4 Reviewing Unrecognized Images for further information about reviewing unrecognized images 7 9 2 Auto Page ID The Auto Page ID feature allows you to process form pages out of normal page order The Data Center searches for the page identifier region on each page first and places the data in the proper order Auto Page ID can be used alone or in conjunction with Auto Form ID and or Respondent Tracker When used alone you must process only those forms associated with one specific form template and be certain that all pages belonging 140 Processing Forms to each respondent
235. ies for the source grid below 2 Click the Properties button to choose and Prnt Duplay configure a specific printer Otherwise the S default printer is used ae 3 Inthe Print Display section mark the ee checkboxes corresponding to the items you wish to print Column headers Row footer headers Grid lines Border 4 Inthe Margins section choose the print active sheet O cobor O Allsheets Black amp white margins in inches The default settings are 1 inch margins on the top and bottom and 12 193 Remark Office OMR User s Guide inch margins on the left and right 5 Inthe Header and Footer area optionally enter text to be displayed in the header and footer of the page 6 Inthe Print Range area select a page range to print Active sheet currently selected form template or All sheets all open form templates 7 Inthe Print Color area select whether to print the page in Color or Black amp white the color setting only applies if the selected printer is color enabled 8 Click the Print button to print the grid 8 8 Emailing Data 8 8 1 Email Overview and Set Up You can email data files in their native formats or in ZIP format from the Remark Office OMR Data Center You have a choice of using Microsoft Outlook 2007 or 2010 or your own SMTP server to send the emails We cover both methods here Note When emailing data a local copy of the data is not saved If you need to save a data file mak
236. ile type and file name and then click OK 3 Choose the File name file format using Save as type and if using a database Filename MyData format the Table or Sheet mame YOU dO core ssiyse emai rno not need to specify a location for the file as it is automatically attached to an email message 4 Click the OK button Outlook automatically opens a new email _ message with your file attached You may now enter recipients and a message and send your file Note if you chose to zip the file it appears with a zip extension To email data files using your SMTP server 1 After processing forms saving data or opening a data file select the File menu and click Email Note If you choose the toolbar option or Task Pane option to send email the file is always in zipped format 2 Choose Data as Attachment to attach the native file to an outgoing email message Choose Data as ZIP Attachment to first zip the native data file compress it into a zip file and then attach it to an outgoing email Note Your organization or the recipient s organization may have restrictions on the types of files that can be sent via email If the file is restricted and you do not zip it the email may never reach the intended recipient If you are unsure whether the selected file type is restricted use the ZIP option The recipient must have a Zip program to unzip the file and view it The Email Data window appears 3 Choose th
237. ility in Remark Quick Stats to capture portions of reports e g graphs to place in other applications Data Groups When analyzing multiple data sets together you can enter a descriptive name for each data set That name can then be used to filter data in Remark Quick Stats as well as on certain reports such as the Demographic Comparison Comparative Grade and Comparative Item reports This feature is useful for comparing data sets Remark Office OMR Overview e Importing and Exporting of Grade Scales You can now import and export grade scales for the purposes of sharing them via the Remark Quick Stats Preferences 1 3 Technical Support Remark Office OMR includes a user s guide and online help You will also find a knowledgebase on the Gravic website where you will find the answers to frequently asked questions In addition there are two tutorials included with the software Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation Tutorials which we strongly recommend you perform before using the software with your forms Most questions can be answered by consulting these reference materials If a problem with Remark Office OMR arises that cannot be solved using the materials above customers may contact Gravic technical support Note For the first 30 days of ownership technical support is included for free starts from date of purchase After 30 days Gravic Inc makes support available only to registered users of the Remark Office
238. image files l z 125 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Review Exceptions is a way to correct exception cases found on forms such as blank and multiple responses see Section 7 6 for further details about using Review Exceptions 15 In the Review Exceptions window specify whether to review exception cases during the reading process by marking the Activate Review Exceptions checkbox 16 In the Review Exceptions Options area mark the checkboxes for those cases that you wish to review during Office Read Wizard Review Exceptions optional reading The following options are Seapine ae cena renee available Multiple responses Blank noven aromana pf nag cnt Tae i Be oe et atm pend responses Recognition errors Image Piet resorts eae oan cans rasa aie exter ee ee cee regions Database Lookup regions sy ee eee esa es eae opr eer aa eae Barcode regions OCR regions a Na oa TERE Repeated rank responses or Required Epics AS D items Reviewing exceptions during Eie MERRE eae image processing causes the software to P A lt z C ea es J Bad geet T stop reading image files when it encounters any exception cases you select You can then make the appropriate adjustments and then resume image processing Note Review Exceptions can also be run after all the forms are processed if you prefer not to stop processing when problems occur 17 Click the Read button to begin processing image files
239. images from being overwritten Optional If desired click the Name Builder button to further customize the stored image names and locations o Inthe Image Base Name area you may choose to add Name Builder a region from the processed Name fuer data to the image base name Ganea nemregen amaa o em Choose the region from the Image Base Name drop down list and then click EEES E the Add button For example OEE if processing tests you could RSen edema ea FR ae Cr add a Student Name field that JC ree is being collected from the gd ZEE At oe mt aeo cortan the cst torpis poge onbe Fmt cas mi form so that your repackaged 155 Remark Office OMR User s Guide images all begin with the students names o Inthe Image Target Directory area you may choose to add a region from the processed data to the folder structure that holds the repackaged images Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button For example if processing tests you could add teacher name and student ID fields that are being collected from the form so that each student s form images are stored in a folder containing the teacher s name and then a subfolder named by the student ID number o Inthe Name Builder box click the OK button to return to the Read Wizard e Inthe Saved image type box select an image type to use for storing the repackaged images The choices are PCX DCX PDF TIF or JPG For example you may be
240. ing Remark Office OMR User s Guide If you have activated your software the About Remark Office OMR window displays This informational window remains for a few seconds while the program loads When complete the main Remark Office OMR window displays If you have not activated your software continue to the next section 2 5 1 Software Activation Remark Office OMR requires activation in order to run on your computer Activation means that the copy you have installed is licensed to the computer Once the software is activated it cannot be installed on another computer without deactivating it from the current computer You may activate your software over the Internet recommended or through several manual methods The first time the software runs and until you activate your software you receive a message indicating how many uses and or days you have left to activate the software If you exceed your time you are not able to use the software any longer without activation 1 When the prompt appears to activate your software click the Activate button 2 The License Key Entry window appears Enter your License Key which appears on the CD case 3 Click the Submit Key button 4 The Software Activation window appears Note that the license key listed in this window can be modified by clicking it in case you did not enter it correctly on the previous screen 5 To activate the software automatically over the Internet click the
241. ing pixels to black The default setting is 175 Use a lower number to make the image lighter Use a higher number to make the image darker For example using a higher number could help light pencil marks appear darker and aid with recognition of those lighter marks Use the White Bit Depth Conversion Threshold to adjust the thresholds for converting pixels to white The default setting is 225 Use a lower number to make the image 167 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 168 lighter Use a higher number to make the image darker For example using a lower number could help erasures become less visible during processing To use Bit Depth Reduction 1 Mark the Enable Black Bit Depth Conversion Threshold checkbox to adjust the black threshold 2 Choose the desired threshold as described previously 175 is the default You may need to try a few different thresholds before you get it just right for your form sass ogpation Settings Fre tune the proces of convertng color and grayscale imagas to tack and white mages or recognition 3 Mark the Enable White Bit Depth Conversion Threshold checkbox to adjust the white threshold 4 Choose the desired threshold as described previously 225 is the default You may need to try a few different thresholds before you get it just right for your form 5 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again Sect
242. ing you how many records were updated and asking you if you want to save the configuration file for later use If you do wish to save the file click the Yes Working with Your Data button Enter a file name and choose a location for the ini file in the Save window that appears Note The ODBC Database Update format works just as described previously but you can save to a database using an ODBC connection 8 6 5 Save All Data The Save All Data feature allows you to save multiple open data sets to one combined file This feature is useful if you need to store and analyze data both on an aggregate and individual level By maintaining separate files you can easily report on an individual data set However by combining the individual data files into one you can also report on the data as a whole without having to open each data set individually any time you want to analyze all the data To use Save All Data 1 Select the File menu and then click Save All Data The Possible Data Sets window opens allowing you to choose the open files you wish to include in the save operation 2 Mark the checkboxes of all data sets you wish to include in the save operation You may use Select All to select all data sets in the list Please note that the data set must correspond to the active form template in order for it to be included in peeve the save operation EOE INAS Select the data grid s you would like to include in the save operation 3 If ne
243. inue The Create Page Elements window appears From this window select how you want to import the images of your form You may scan pages directly into the Template Editor or you may import image files that you previously scanned and saved of the form Regardless of how you import these images remember to always base your form template on a blank copy of your form Note You must scan the blank form for template creation in order for accurate recognition Do not import a PDF or similar file that did not originate from a scanner Creating a PDF file directly from a document is not the same as scanning a form and producing an image file and therefore your form template does not match the scanned images of your completed forms leading to recognition errors To create a form template image using the scanner 1 Inthe Select Method to Use for Image Se ea Acquisition section click the Read from scanner radio button Note If you need to configure your scanner you may click Scanner Properties next to Read from scanner to view the Scanner Properties window See Chapter 4 for further details about using a scanner Using the Template Editor 2 OPTIONAL If you are using drop out colors on your form choose the color you wish to drop out of the form Red Blue Green You may also select a Drop out threshold This threshold determines how close the color match must be in order for the color to drop out The higher
244. iod for which the FTP Service attempts to lock the file before giving up and recording an upload failure 18 Enter the details for your FTP server as Ee ae Specify the settings needed to connect to the FTP server described in the previous table ae 19 Use the Test Connectivity button to ensure pews FIP Sites you can connect to the FTP server using the FTP tes pftp evanple comfie i sae tee supplied information stefan tobe sent to ar FP ae 20 Optional If you would like to save your FTP Sse sites oeenn server information click the Save button The ee FTP Server name is automatically used to name your settings AA rite Test Connectivity 21 Click the Finish button to complete the setup Optionally you may click the arrow on the Finish button and choose to Save your configuration without executing it Execute the configuration without saving it e g to test it or Save and Execute to both save and execute the configuration in one step 22 When clicking Finish you are prompted to save your Send Wizard Configuration file Itis poeeme recommended that you save the file so you Saven Rena Fs Oc may use it again in the future or call it up te from the Automation Wizard The file can be Boa saved anywhere on your computer or network and has an XML file extension 23 To save the Send Wizard Configuration File click the Yes button choose a location and Ri provide a file name Ensure that you reme
245. ion the region appears in the image representation area of the Template Editor window You then need to position the region correctly by dragging it with the mouse 6 4 4 Deleting Regions Use the Delete option to remove unwanted region definitions To delete a region 1 Activate the region you want to delete by clicking within the region boundaries or clicking its node in the tree view Kad 2 Select the Edit menu and then click Delete click right click the mouse and choose Delete or press Delete on the keyboard You may also right click the region and choose Delete from the menu 6 4 5 Undo Redo Remark Office OMR employs Undo and Redo in the Template Editor Using Undo negates the last action that was performed Using Redo repeats the last action for which undo was used To use undo nal 1 Select the Edit menu and then click Undo click keyboard to negate the previous action or press Ctri Z on the To use redo i 1 Select the Edit menu and then click Redo click keyboard to repeat the previous action or press CtrI Y on the 6 4 6 Adjusting Region Borders If you need to adjust a region border e g make the region larger or smaller you can do so with the mouse 97 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 98 To adjust region borders 1 Select the region you want to adjust by clicking it in the image representation area 2 Place the mouse over one of the squares in the field border until you see a do
246. ions 7 14 i 7 14 k apply to pre processed image files only and are accessed via Tools Recognition Settings Default Settings Template Settings Image Pre processing 7 14 i Invert Image The Invert Image option applies to pre processed images only Use the Invert image option to correct an image that appears in reverse black background with white text The default setting is No You only need to adjust this setting if your image comes in reversed To use Invert Image 1 Under Tools Recognition Settings Image Default Image Pre processing Settings Pre Processing use the drop down list for Default Image Pre processing Settings Invert image to select Yes if you want to turn e ee e E e EE on the invert image feature JA Preprocessing Settings 2 Click the OK button eee The adjusted settings apply to your next Read Z Despeckle Images During Recognition operation and stay in place until you change them See again a C e Processing Forms 7 14 j Deskew Images During Recognition The Deskew Images During Recognition option applies to pre processed images only Use the Deskew Images During Recognition option to correct an image that is crooked The default setting is off You only need to adjust this setting if your image comes in crooked Default Image Pre processing Settings To use Deskew Images During Recognition Default Image Pre processing Settings Select the desired default image pre preprocessing settings to be
247. ions options Review Option Function Blank Responses Review when a respondent fails to answer a question Multiple Responses Review when a respondent chooses more responses than were permitted Image Regions Review when a flagged Image region is encountered Allows the hand entry of information into the data grid or the ability to choose a qualitative response code 132 Processing Forms Review Option Function Region Errors Review when a recognition error occurs and Remark Office OMR cannot properly recognize the region e g image is skewed form is poorly marked spacing is too tight on the form Database Lookup Review when a database lookup error is encountered meaning Errors that the response is not located in the database that was specified during the form template creation process Once you correct the Database Lookup exception if you are returning other fields from the database they are updated automatically Barcode Errors Review when Remark Office OMR cannot read the barcode properly OCR Errors Review when the text in an OCR region cannot be properly recognized Repeated Rank Review when a respondent chooses the same rank for different Responses questions in the same region Required Items Review when a required item has not been answered Multiple exceptions Review when multiple exceptions occur For example an OCR region utilizing Database Lookup could be unrecognized which w
248. ired items Click the Read button to begin the reading process 133 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 134 The Data Center begins processing forms normally When the software encounters one of the specified exception cases processing stops and the Review Exceptions window appears in the left Task Pane You use this window to make changes Please proceed to Section 7 6 2 a for detailed information about the Review Exceptions window To use Review Exceptions after form processing Review Exceptions M multiple responses 1 After processing forms select the Tools menu and then 2 aia eae click Review Exceptions or click Alternatively o oo you may select the Review exceptions link from the a aero Data tab of the Task Pane een ceptor Find and correct exception cases 2 Inthe Review Exceptions Options area select the af Seachby exception cases you would like to review Blank paean responses Multiple responses Recognition errors f ere Image regions Database lookup regions Barcode regions OCR regions Repeated rank responses or Required items Review Exceptions Not Running F eer Bean review 7 3 Click the Begin Review button to begin reviewing the data Tip You may process forms and clean sections of the data as you go Simply begin Review Exceptions normally Then if you wish to process more forms leave the Review Exceptions window open and process additional forms W
249. is supported by your specific barcode type Remark Office OMR recognizes several barcode types e Code 3 of 9 Code 39 Alphanumeric e Interleaved 2 of 5 Numeric e Codabar Numeric e PDF 417 2D Alphanumeric e Data Matrix 2D Alphanumeric e QR Code 2D Alphanumeric e Code 11 Numeric e Code 128 Alphanumeric e Code 93 Alphanumeric e EAN 13 Numeric e EAN 8 Numeric e UPCA Numeric e UPCE Numeric Barcode regions have the following properties Property Function Region name A name assigned to a Barcode region Region names are used as grid column headers in the data grid window and are exported when saving data to common file formats Region names are limited to 60 characters Barcode type Use this setting to select the type of barcode to be recognized types are listed earlier in this section You may use the Auto Detect setting to have Remark Office OMR automatically determine what type of barcode is in the region However if you know the barcode type that you are using we recommend that you choose it from the list Barcode Use this setting to select the orientation of the barcode horizontal orientation left to right or vertical top to bottom 75 76 Property Data type Barcode Contains Multiple Items Remark Office OMR User s Guide Function Sets whether the data should be considered textual or numeric when saved exported Barcodes can contain multiple pieces of data When outputting mor
250. is checkbox to establish a pattern of characters to be recognized Use the following syntax for your format number A letter X any character optional character for trailing purposes only Other character must match what you type exactly For example if you are reading a date field type in and if you are reading an abbreviated US State field type in AA Applies to Standard OCR only 77 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 78 Property Region contains more than one word Function Mark this checkbox if the OCR region contains more than one word Region contains multiple lines of text Mark this checkbox if the OCR region extends past one line of text Applies to Standard OCR only Invert region image Deskew region image Mark this checkbox to invert the colors on the text and background of the OCR region during recognition This feature can be used if the text on your form is white and the background is black and you want to invert them in order to read the text Mark this checkbox to deskew the OCR region during recognition to assist in reading the text Despeckle Image Region Mark this checkbox to despeckle the OCR region during recognition to assist with reading the text Despeckling can help with thick dark letters Use the Maximum speckle size setting to adjust how much to despeckle It is recommended that you start with a small number to see how the image lo
251. is checkbox to remove the color coding for an exception after it has been reviewed This setting applies when you review grid cells but do not make changes that would automatically remove the exception color e g if a question is legitimately blank you might leave it as BLANK with the yellow colored cell By clearing the exceptions Review Exceptions does not stop on them the next time it is run Maximum length for a value in a data grid cell Enter the maximum number of characters allowed in a data grid cell You are not able to enter more characters than allowed e g when entering text using a Data Entry Image region Note that performance may be affected by data grid cells that contain very large amounts of text Replace missing data values with Enter the value to be used when missing data are encountered during a data file export Missing data means that the piece of data captured does not match what was defined as Labels in the form template A MULT BLANK and ERROR left in the data set would all be considered missing If you typed a response in a list cell in the grid but it did not match the labels defined this data would also be considered missing e g A is defined in the form template but you type a The Missing Value is also used when running reports in Remark Quick Stats The default value is 1 System poll interval during Server Mode secs Enter the number of seconds in between polls fo
252. is exported in any saved data files The default replacement is Asterisk Other pre defined options include MULT Nothing Space Character and Tilde You may also type characters into the Replace with box Default Blank Exception Handling Replace with Multiple Rank and List Replace with Grid Select the replacement option to be used by default when a blank response occurs for a Multiple Rank or List region during form processing The text entered in this box appears as output in the data grid and is exported in any saved data files The default replacement is BLANK Other pre defined options include Asterisk Nothing Space Character Tilde and VOID You may also type characters into the Replace with box Select the replacement option to be used by default when a blank response occurs for a Grid region during form processing The text entered in this box appears as output in the data grid and is exported in any saved data files The default replacement is BLANK Other pre defined options include Asterisk Nothing Space Character Tilde and VOID You may also type characters into the Replace with box Section Option Flag Blanks Grid Default Replace with Duplicate Rank Exception Handling Using the Template Editor Description Use this setting to further customize how Remark Office OMR interprets blank responses Always If any character in the Grid region is left blank re
253. issoria Aaa AEE ATEAN 321 Contents Remark Office OMR Overview Chapter 1 Remark Office OMR is a software package designed to collect data from marks bubbles checkboxes on plain paper forms In addition the software recognizes machine printed text OCR and barcodes The software works in conjunction with an image scanner to collect the data The software then analyzes that data or allows you to export it to various file formats The following overview provides the basic steps to using the software Create a scannable form in the software package of your choice word processing survey design etc The forms you can use with Remark Office OMR vary tremendously from tests and assessments to surveys and market research Remark Office OMR can read marks bubbles checkboxes etc machine printed text OCR and barcodes While Remark Office OMR is not a form designer you are allowed a great deal of flexibility in the design process because you do not need special marks or drop out inks nor do your respondents need to use a number 2 pencil to fill in the forms Because Remark Office OMR works with forms that you create we provide form design guidelines to help you get the best results possible Please refer to Chapter 5 for form creation guidelines and tips Use the Template Editor portion of the Remark Office OMR software to create a form template definition file The form template tells Remark Office OMR how to read your form To cr
254. ist in Missing the external database but were not processed as part of the data file Export Exports only the detected respondents those that both Detected exist in the external database and were processed as part of the data file Export Exports only the duplicate respondents those that appear Duplicates more than once in the data file The software only detects duplicate entries that have also been verified as existing in the linked database Print Results Prints all results to the default printer on your computer 9 Click the Close button to return to the Remark Office OMR Data Center 7 13 Reviewing Duplicate Responses Remark Office OMR includes a feature to detect duplicate responses even when not using the Database Lookup feature with Respondent Detection as described in the previous section The Review Duplicates feature allows you to choose any region in the data grid in which to search for duplicates When a duplicate entry is found you are prompted to take one of four possible actions review the duplicates keep only the first 158 Processing Forms duplicate record keep only the last duplicate record or delete all duplicate records During the review process the data grid is automatically sorted on your duplicate identifier region so that you can easily review the data This feature is useful if you accidentally process a form multiple times or someone fills out a form multiple times when this is not permitted
255. ized Image Utility the Data Center displays the Unrecognized Image utility window when an unrecognized form or page is encountered This window is described in detail in Section 7 9 5 Using the Unrecognized Image Utility To use the Unrecognized Image Utility during form processing 1 Open the correct form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template 2 Begin processing forms by selecting the Tools menu and then clicking Read Wizard clicking J or by clicking the Read Wizard link in the Task Pane 3 Make the necessary selections on the Read Method screen If using Auto Form ID mark the Auto Form ID Mode checkbox If automatically recognizing page or respondent IDs you do not need to make any extra indications in the Read Wizard 4 Click the Next gt gt button to continue 5 Make the necessary selections on the Scanned Image Naming Conventions if scanning or Image Selection window if reading image files screen See Section 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard for detailed information about these screens 6 Click the Next gt gt button to go to the Review Exceptions screen 143 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 7 Mark the checkbox for Review unrecognized images when using region tracking and or page error detection to turn on the Review Unrecognized Images feature 8 Click the Read button to begin the reading oo Review Exceptions optional process Select the desired items to be flagged when running R
256. k to stop Server Mode and allow access to the full Remark Office OMR feature set 7 12 Respondent Detection Remark Office OMR includes the ability to determine which respondents forms have been processed as well as locating duplicate respondents This feature called Respondent Detection is used in conjunction with Database Lookup If a region is linked to an external database using Database Lookup the software provides a report of which respondents listed in the external database have been processed not been processed or have been processed more than one time For example suppose you have a region on your form where the respondent fills in an ID number You can link this ID number region to an external database that has all of the ID numbers of your expected group of respondents You can then use Respondent Detection to compare IDs collected in the data set to IDs in the external database Any time you use the Respondent Detection feature you also have the option to return additional data from the external database if desired this is not required to use Respondent Detection When you process your forms Remark Office OMR confirms which ID numbers from the external database exist in the processed data The software then provides a report showing found ID numbers missing ID numbers and duplicate ID numbers If you are returning additional fields this information is also available in the report You can save this report as a text file to use
257. k So Alternatively you may select the Read Wizard link from the Task Pane In the Read Method window select the See the method to us for da cect radio button for Read from scanner Selec Method to uee for Dat nced Image Recognition Properties Note If you need to configure your L scanner click the Scanner Properties oses link to view its setup See Chapter 4 for o 5 detailed information about setting up a scanner In the Advanced Collection Options area mark the checkbox for Collate Mode Note Collate Mode is only enabled if you open a multi page template and you do not have the Scan Duplex option marked in the Scanner Properties window Click the Next gt gt button to continue by modifying Scanned Image Naming Conventions and Review Exceptions options see Sections 7 3 and 7 6 for further details or click the Read button to begin processing forms Place all double sided forms you want to read in the automatic document feeder of your scanner in normal page order and then click the OK button The Data Center begins reading the odd numbered pages the front sides of the forms When finished processing the odd numbered pages you are prompted to read in the other direction 7 8 9 When prompted turn the stack of forms over and place it back in the automatic document feeder of the scanner Do not rearrange the forms The Data Center collates the forms properly Click the checkbox for Be
258. l address or any other form of personally identifiable information Your Internet Protocol IP address is logged when you connect to the Gravic website but this address is only used to generate aggregate statistics Tips and Helpful Hints Appendix A A 1 Overview The following appendix provides some useful tips for getting the most out of your Remark Office OMR software There are several key areas of the software that you use often Look through the following sections to learn more about how to best utilize the software For complete details about a feature consult the proper section in this user s guide A 2 Scanners Remark Office OMR works with image scanners There are a wide variety of scanners that fall into this category Use the following guidelines when selecting and using a scanner with Remark Office OMR There are four basic categories of scanners low end mid range high end and multi function peripherals MFP Generally speaking a low end scanner is capable of scanning up to 10 pages per minute ppm Low end scanners are often geared toward graphics scanning rather than document scanning and therefore are not typically recommended for use with Remark Office OMR A mid range scanner is capable of scanning about 11 to 40 pages per minute A high end scanner is capable of scanning over 40 pages per minute Speed has a direct effect on price MFPs are typically larger peripherals that can perform several functions such
259. l to indicate their response Although Remark Office OMR works with almost any complete shape e g circle square triangle experience indicates that bubbles between 10 and 14 points in height work the best Non oval shapes are somewhat harder to fill completely Respondents typically fill bubbles more completely and neatly which leads to better recognition rates When using word processing software we recommend using a capital O in an Arial font You may also use our OMR Bubbles fonts which creates an encircled letter or number The OMR Bubbles fonts install with the Remark software They can 000 0 0 also be downloaded from the Gravic website Once installed oO you may access the fonts from Windows applications on your a ae computer just as you would any other font While it is YYvyvYyy possible to place numbers or letters inside of marks the 00000 number letter must be as small and light as possible Dark thick or bolded characters may cause Remark Office OMR to 44 Designing Scannable Forms interpret the mark as being filled Therefore we recommend using our tested OMR Bubbles fonts if you require encircled numbers or letters We do not recommend creating bubbles using the Times New Roman font which may be the default font in some word processing programs This font does not create an evenly defined bubble and can therefore break apart when scanned Using the Arial font yields a well d
260. lace or click 2 Find Replace 2 Enter the search text in the box titled Find what Some Word Find what Replace with This Word 3 Select the other options you want to use eo Replace al_ _ Replace Include partial matches to control the search e erroreie lemectied o Search Option Case sensitive Result Mark this checkbox to make the search case sensitive Include partial matches Mark this checkbox to search for part of the text does not require the entire contents of the cell to match what you have entered in the Find what box Search for values greater than or equal to specified value If searching for numeric data mark this checkbox to search for numeric values that are greater than or equal to the value you have typed in the Find what box Search selected block only Mark this checkbox to search in the selected cell s only 4 To replace items located in the search enter the replacement text in the box titled Replace with 5 Choose one of the following search commands by clicking the appropriate button Search Command Result Find Next Locate the next item meeting search criteria Replace Locate and automatically replace the next item meeting search criteria Replace All Locate and automatically replace all items meeting search criteria 6 When you have completed searching the data click the Close button 8 4 Sorting Grid Columns Columns in the data
261. le e Right Click and Paste The option to right click and choose Paste in the Template Editor image area has been added e TWAIN Scan Ahead A checkbox has been added to the Scanner Properties window to support the Scan Ahead feature on TWAIN compatible scanners If your scanner supports this feature in its TWAIN driver turn on the checkbox in Remark Office OMR to take advantage of it e Installation You can push out the Remark Office OMR installation to computers using active directory when installing multiple licenses of the software e Auto Check for Updates A method for checking for software updates was added to the Help menu and program preferences Remark Quick Stats Improvements New Reports e Question Mean Report This new survey tabulation report shows each question on the form along with the minimum and maximum responses mean and a bar chart of the mean e Student Response Report This new test grading report shows a matrix of all the students and test questions the answer chosen and a color code to indicate whether it was the correct response It provides fast insight into both student and question performance e Demographic Grade Report This new version of the Comparative Grade report allows you to compare up to three fields in your data in a table format as compared to the Demographic Comparison Report that is in hierarchical format e Basic Item Analysis Condensed Test Report This new report for b
262. le computer which is validated through activation of the license after installation If you are upgrading to Remark Office OMR 8 from an earlier version do not install the software in the same directory as your previous version Once the installation is complete you can copy information from your old installation that you want to use in the new version e g form templates data etc Note Form template files are not backwards compatible Remark Office OMR 8 converts form templates from previous versions of the software automatically However once a form template has been converted it cannot be opened in a previous version of the software Always make copies of form templates before converting them To install Remark Office OMR The Remark Office OMR CD ROM contains an auto play feature so that when it is inserted into your CD ROM drive the installation begins automatically This feature is only available if your CD ROM drive s auto play feature is enabled If the software installation does not automatically start use the following instructions to install the software 1 Insert the installation CD ROM into your CD ROM drive 2 Select Start on the taskbar click Settings and then click Control Panel Note Accessing the control panel may vary slightly based on the version of Windows you are running 3 Double click Add or Remove Programs or Programs depending on your operating system 4 Click Install and then follow the on sc
263. le quote Step 3 Field Field Size Width and Padding Fixed Width Fields Only The maximum number of characters allowed in the field Start Position Pad With The position in characters where the field begins For example if your field sizes are 25 the first field starts at position 1 and the second field starts at position 26 25 characters later Enter the character to use to pad the field typically a space character Pad On Select whether to pad the field on the left or right of the text that resides in the field Step 4 Record Delimiter Record Delimiter Sets the delimiter to be used to separate records Carriage Return Line Feed Carriage Return Line Feed Other Step 5 Field Exclude Exclusion and Record Breaks Break After Every Record 188 Mark the Exclude checkbox to exclude the field listed from the data file Mark the Break After checkbox to start a new record in the data file after this field Mark the Every Record checkbox to include the field in every record of the data file e g repeat the field for each record Working with Your Data To use the Custom format 1 Select the File menu and then click Save Data As The Save Data window opens allowing you to choose a file name a file type the directory in which you would like the file saved and advanced saving options 2 Select the desired directory location using the Look in drop down box Ent
264. lete Row 2 Select the Edit menu and then click Delete Row or click Alternatively select Shift Delete on the keyboard or right click the mouse and then select Delete Row Tip You may delete multiple rows by selecting more than one grid row Use the row headers to select the rows 8 3 5 Freezing Columns and Rows You can freeze specific columns and rows in the data grid so that as you scroll the frozen columns and rows are still visible For example if grading exams you might want to freeze the Student Name column so you can see the students as you scroll You can freeze a maximum of 10 columns and rows To freeze columns and rows 1 With your data set open select the View menu 2 To freeze rows select Freeze Rows Then choose the number of rows to freeze 3 To freeze columns select the Freeze Columns Then choose the number of columns to freeze Remark Office OMR User s Guide Your selected rows columns are frozen and delineated with an orange line If you wish to return to normal viewing select the View menu and choose Unfreeze Rows or Unfreeze Columns 8 3 6 Using Find and Replace The Remark Office OMR Data Center provides find and replace commands for locating and replacing text You can search for each occurrence of characters including uppercase and lowercase letters whole words and parts of words By default the Data Center searches the entire data grid when performing a find and
265. lick in a cell and select Delete A click the toolbar button for Delete g or press the Delete key You may also delete an entire grid row by clicking the row header or clicking in a cell in the row and then right clicking and selecting Delete Row or by selecting the Edit menu and then clicking Delete Row Working with Your Data 8 3 4 Resizing Inserting and Deleting Rows You can change the number of rows contained in each data grid by adding rows to the end of the grid inserting rows into the grid or deleting rows from the grid Note that during form processing the grid expands as needed to hold your data you do not need to manually add rows to the grid Tip This section assumes an understanding of how to make grid selections in order to select grid cells See Section 8 3 1 Making Grid Selections for detailed information about this topic To insert row s into the grid 1 Select the desired insertion point by clicking a grid cell Insert Row 2 Select the Edit menu and then click Insert Row to insert a row or click Alternatively select Shift Insert on the keyboard or right click within the cell and choose Insert Row The row is inserted above your current selection point Note You may also select multiple rows to insert the same number of rows above the selection e g select two complete rows to insert two rows above the highlighted rows To delete rows from the grid 1 Select the rows to delete EJ De
266. lid object is being copied to the clipboard 239
267. light print directly beneath the barcode Example 5 9 1 The Code 3 of 9 Barcode The Code 3 of 9 barcode is created by installing the Code 3 of 9 barcode font This font installs automatically with the Remark software or can be downloaded from the Gravic website When using the Code 3 of 9 barcode font you need to begin and end the barcode with asterisks These asterisks become bars in the barcode and are necessary for proper recognition of the barcode Without these asterisks Remark Office OMR cannot read your 3 of 9 barcode Use caution as some word processing applications use the asterisks as an auto formatting feature to bold the text and drop the asterisks Check your form design s program options for this auto formatting feature In addition do not use spaces Designing Scannable Forms in the barcode If you need to represent a space use the exclamation point character The Code 3 of 9 barcode always outputs letters in upper case Example To barcode the name Jane Doe you would type Jane Doe and then convert the entire sequence to the Code 3 of 9 barcode font 5 10 Paper Remark Office OMR works best with plain white paper and black ink Utilizing standard 20 copier paper works well for single sided forms and 28 or higher paper works well for double sided forms heavier paper helps avoid bleed through While we recommend using white paper for the best recognition you may use colored paper pastel colors tend to work w
268. list Use scroll bars to view additional items in a list or different parts of a window The following table explains how to use the mouse within a vertically oriented scroll bar to produce various results Mouse Action Result Click the arrow at the bottom of the Moves your view in the list down one line scroll bar Click the arrow at the top of the Moves your view in the list up one line scroll bar Drag the elevator on the scroll bar Allows you to see various parts of the window To drag the elevator point to the elevator with your mouse press the mouse button and drag the elevator along the scroll bar Click the mouse pointer above the Moves the elevator up one section elevator in the scroll bar Remark Office OMR User s Guide Mouse Action Result Click the mouse pointer below the Moves the elevator down one section elevator in the scroll bar 3 5 Menu Items Context sensitive help is available for all menu items by highlighting the item in question and pressing F1 The following sections provide menu options for the Remark Office OMR Template Editor and Data Center Menu options for Remark Quick Stats are detailed in the Remark Quick Stats User s Guide which you can access under Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation Please see the corresponding sections in this user s guide for complete descriptions of the features that can be accessed from the menus Most menu items can be represented on the tool
269. low where you where you would like the new would like the new region to be added so region to be added so that it is that it is highlighted For the first question highlighted For the first question in a form template click the Page 1 in a form template click the node Page 1 node 2 Click the Region menu if you 2 Right click the same node to display a have selected a region Click the drop down menu Page menu if you have selected a page 3 Click Insert 3 Click Insert Using Menus to Insert Regions 1 Make the appropriate selection based on what you would like to insert and whether you want to insert it before or after the selected node Page After OMR Region After Image Region After Barcode Region After OCR Region After Page Before OMR Region Before Image Region Before Barcode Region Before or OCR Region Before Using the Template Editor Using a Mouse to Insert Regions 1 Make the appropriate selection based on what you would like to insert and whether you want to insert it before or after the selected node Page After OMR Region After Image Region After Barcode Region After OCR Region After Page Before OMR Region Before Image Region Before Barcode Region Before or OCR Region Before Note You may also use the toolbar buttons to insert each region type green for OMR optical mark recognition regions orange for Barcode regions blue for Image regions and purple for OCR optical character OMR g B
270. lphanumeric e QR Code 2D Alphanumeric e Code 11 Numeric e Code 128 Alphanumeric e Code 93 Alphanumeric 47 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 48 e EAN 13 Numeric e EAN 8 Numeric e UPCA Numeric e UPCE Numeric You may put one or more pieces of data within one barcode If using multiple pieces of data in one barcode you must separate the data with some character called a delimiter such as a space comma or tab Remark Office OMR outputs the individual pieces of data to separate cells in the data grid when the forms are processed Use the following guidelines when placing barcodes on your forms e Barcodes should be at least 26 points in terms of size about 1 4 inch high e Barcodes may be placed on forms horizontally or vertically e If using barcode stickers place a lightly colored placeholder on the form so that the person affixing the stickers to the form knows where to place the barcodes The barcodes must be in the same place on each form in order for Remark Office OMR to recognize them Ideally the placeholder should be covered by the sticker or light enough to drop out completely disappear when scanned You do not want the placeholder to interfere with recognition of the barcode Example e Do not put text lines etc within 2 inch of the barcode with the exception of the tip below Tip If you would like to be able to read the barcode with the human eye place the text of the barcode in small
271. ltiple a Data type Textual Threshold 3 Regions to Grade Regions to Tabulate Multiple Multiple O Grid O Grid Boolean Boolean Default Multiple Exception Handling Replace with Multiple Rank and List AIl Responses ALL Replace with Grid Asterisk x Default Blank Exception Handling Replace with Multiple Rank and List BLANK BLANK x Replace with Grid Nothing a Flag blanks Grid Multiple Rank and List Always Default Duplicate Exception Handling Replace with Rank DUP DUP x Description Sets the default OMR region type to be used when creating new OMR regions Multiple Grid Boolean List Add Binary Rank Data type Sets the default OMR region data type to be used when creating new OMR regions Textual or Numeric The data type is used when exporting data Orientation Threshold Sets the default OMR region orientation to be used when creating new OMR regions Row or Column Sets the default recognition threshold for OMR regions Lower thresholds force the software to be more sensitive when reading light or less filled marks Higher thresholds force the software to be stricter and therefore more discriminate when reading regions with multiple filled marks Use the default setting of 3 unless you encounter problems when processing forms Use caution when using extremely low or high thresholds Low thresholds cause the software to be very sensitive
272. m e g the image for the form template looks too light and the marks are not complete If you change the 225 Remark Office OMR User s Guide brightness setting for the form template use the same brightness setting when you scan the filled in forms Before you create the form template know what you will be doing with the data after the forms are scanned The format in which you want to save your data should determine how you set up the form template For example if you want to export the data to Excel your form template Region Names must be limited to 64 characters If you plan to export the data to a survey design and analysis package find out the data requirements of the particular survey design and analysis package before creating the form template When you create an OMR region you may only capture the marks on the form no text lines etc If text or lines separate the marks you must use the Append Linked Region feature Take advantage of the Append Linked Region feature as you go to link the regions as you define them This is a great time saver The Remark Office OMR Template Editor utilizes basic Windows commands such as cut copy paste drag drop and undo These shortcuts can be tremendous time savers when you are creating regions You may also copy regions from one page to the next or from one form template to another use Copy Paste Special for the latter case The order in which the regions are defined in
273. m template and then re read the batch Save Template Changes cl i Cc k N oO to re ve rt to t h e The template changes have not been saved Would you like to save the template modifications before re reading the batch original form template E ee ete e setti n g sS t h u s ca n cel i n g Click Cancel to cancel the read operation i any changes you made Yes No Cancel and click Cancel to stop the re reading process the changes you made using Recognition Settings are still intact Then you can click Yes or No to the data overwrite warning if you choose to continue with the re reading process 8 Once the re reading process completes a message appears telling you if it was successful 9 You may continue to make adjustments as needed 10 To return to the regular Task Pane click the Back link within the Task Pane or the Data tab at the top of the Task Pane 7 15 a Using the Recognition Tools in Conjunction with Recognition Settings When using the Recognition Tools you may find it helpful to use the Recognition Settings to improve general recognition The Recognition Settings are described in full in Section 7 14 When you click the Recognition Tools link in the Task Pane the Recognition Settings portion of the Task Pane also appears below The settings shown are specific to the active form template You can click the link for any Recognition Setting and make adjustments You can then choose re read options from the Recognition T
274. mark Office OMR Data Center Remark Office OMR can read the following image file formats PCX pcx Multipage PCX dcx TIFF tif tiff JPEG jpg jpeg Portable Document Format pdf PNG png Windows Bitmap bmp Tip It is strongly recommended that you use the TIF TIFF format for pre scanned image files particularly if you have a choice between TIFF and PDF very common on multi function devices PDF files are not native image files and require more processing time making the reading process slower TIFF Group 4 compression gives you the most compressed file for fastest processing To read image files with the Read Wizard 1 Open the correct form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template J Read Wizard 2 Select the Tools menu and then click Read Wizard or click dL i Alternatively you may select the Read Wizard link from the Task Pane 3 Inthe Read Method window select the radio button for Read from image files 4 If desired modify the recognition settings being used by the software by ff clicking the Recognition Settings a ee link This link opens the recognition a settings that apply to this form Orica Eons template Please see Section 7 14 for iret nas esate cs RA Sane a detailed description of each option S T The link is provided in the Read O Auto Form 1D Mode Wizard for your convenience Note a that you should not modify the recognition settings unless you experience rec
275. mbed the fonts you use in case the person printing the form does not have the same fonts Do not use the PDF to create the form template always use a blank scanned image 5 12 Form Testing The best way to know whether you have created a good scannable form is to test it Always test any forms you plan to use with Remark Office OMR before printing and distributing them It is much easier to find and fix problems before the forms are printed and distributed To test your form create a form template in the Remark Office OMR Template Editor see Chapter 6 for more information Then fill out a sampling of forms as you expect to get them back from your respondents not perfectly Scan the forms and check your results If you do not get the accuracy you expect check your form s design against the guidelines presented in this user s guide and make the appropriate modifications Remember to use the same scanner settings for form template creation and when scanning the filled in forms 5 13 Form Review Service 50 We will review any form after it is created to ensure it is compatible with Remark Office OMR You can email or fax forms to our technical support department and we will check them for known issues We can often head off potential issues before they become problems Be sure to use this service before you print and distribute your forms Using the Template Editor Chapter 6 6 1 Overview The Remark Office OMR Template Editor
276. mber where the files are stored so that MyNews Fiera you can locate them later 24 If you do not wish to save the Send Wizard Configuration File click the No button The configuration executes Binish gt Save as type Send Wizard Configuration xml Once the wizard closes the action is active Remark Office OMR looks in the directory ies specified for files to send to your FTP site If any problems occur you are 200 Working with Your Data notified Otherwise the requested action is executed and a notice appears letting you know the operation was successful To use the Send Wizard to send files via email 1 2 10 Optional If using compression choose 11 Optional If creating a single zip file enter a 12 Optional If you would like the contents of the Send Wizard Select the Tools menu and click Send Wizard ES Under File Name Pattern Matching chose a Select the files to send or load an existing send configuration file location on your computer or network for the Load rom Fie software to search when looking for files to Files to Send send Fle Name Paton Matting Under Custom Filter choose the extension of TEE the file to send For example if you are S sending Excel 2010 files to an FTP site you Remakes would enter xlsx If you want all files found in the specified directory to be included in the send operation enter Click the
277. n currently when sending the emails from Remark Office OMR Otherwise logged in continue to the next step to enter specific credentials user Username If authentication is required and you are not using the credentials of and the currently logged in user enter the Username and Password as Password supplied by your network email administrator Working with Your Data Option Description Throttle The throttle rate adds a delay while sending emails The default rate setting is 500ms meaning that one email is sent every 500 ms in other words two emails are sent per second Throttling emails keeps the SMTP server from being overloaded when sending large numbers of emails Unless you plan on sending hundreds of emails at one time the default setting of 500 is likely fine 20 Enter the settings as described in the previous table 21 Click the Finish button to complete the setup Optionally you may click the arrow on the Finish button and choose to Save your configuration without executing it Execute the configuration without saving it e g to test it or Save and Execute to both save and execute the configuration in one step 22 When clicking Finish you are prompted to save your Send Wizard Configuration file It is recommended that you save the file so you may use it again in the future or call it up from the Automation Wizard The file can be saved anywhere on your computer or network and has Save Send Wizard Configura
278. n 6 2 4 o OMR Regions Section 6 2 5 o Image Regions Section 6 2 9 o Barcode Regions Section 6 2 10 o OCR Regions Section 6 2 11 e Additional region properties Section 6 3 e Additional template editor features Section 6 4 e Saving form templates Section 6 5 e Editing existing form templates Section 6 6 e Editing regions Section 6 6 1 51 Remark Office OMR User s Guide e Template Editor preferences Section 6 7 Tip It is strongly recommend that you perform the tutorials included with the software to get an understanding of the Template Editor You can find the tutorials under the Help menu in the software or by clicking Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation on your computer 6 2 Creating Form Templates 52 6 2 1 Understanding the Template Editor Interface The Remark Office OMR Template Editor contains three basic components that you use to create and edit your form templates The left portion of the template editor window contains a tree view an item list with nodes representing each region in your template st u uan iia Important Keyword Region A region is an Image Barcode OCR or OMR area that you define A single OMR region can contain one or more questions Also in the left portion of the window you can find the Task Pane The Task Pane contains links to commonly used features and updates automatically based on your selections to help you navigate through the software Note that
279. n Remark Ctrl R Quick Stats H Save Data Saves data from the grid to a new or existing data file hal Ctrl S Clicking the Save button creates a new data file or save the data to the current file if one has already been established Save Data Saves an existing data file under a new name allows you As F2 to select an output format or allows you to change the path to which the file saves seve Albata Save All Saves all open data files to one master file allowing you Data to select a file name output format and the path to which Ctrl F2 the file saves Save Data Launches the Data Builder which allows you to customize Builder the data saving process by dynamically building file Ctrl F3 names and locations using information from the active data set a Email Emails the active data set using Microsoft Outlook or the built in email program gg Batch wizard Batch Opens the batch wizard so that you can create batch files Wizard Batch files allow you to process a header sheet with identifying information for the forms that follow Print Prints the contents of the grid or an image Ctrl P Tool Menu Pull Down Item Navigating Remark Office OMR Function Recent Files Displays the most recently used files Click a file to open it Close Closes the current data grid If there are unsaved Ctrl F4 changes you are prompted Close All Closes all open data grids If there are unsaved changes Tem
280. n choose whether to review the unrecognized images during or after form processing You must match the unrecognized image with the appropriate form template page or respondent The Unrecognized Image Utility is used to match unrecognized form templates form pages or respondents and can be used in one of two ways During Form Processing If used during the reading process whether scanning forms or processing saved image files the Unrecognized Image Utility provides an option to have the Data Center software pause after encountering an unrecognized identifier region You can then match the region to the appropriate form template page or respondent After Form Processing The Unrecognized Image Utility can also be used after the forms have been processed therefore you are not required to have the software stop when a form page or respondent is not recognized Any images that are not recognized are stored in a queue You can then access this queue after the forms have been processed and make the appropriate identifications Note When using automatic page identification without the Respondent Tracker feature you must process all pages of one complete respondent s form before moving on to the next form If a page is not recognized processing stops even if you are not using the option to review during the read operation Please sort your pages so that an entire respondent s form is read at one time Regardless of how you use the Unrecogn
281. n in the region By using individual question names it is easier to save data to existing databases and other file types that may already be set up with specific fields By default Remark Office OMR uses sequential region names for each question in the same region Sequential region names consist of adding numbers sequentially onto the region name you provide in the Properties OMR Region window For example if you enter a region name of Question Remark Office OMR calls the individual question names within the region Questioni Question2 Question3 etc In contrast if you use the Question Names section of the Question text and names window to enter individual question names you are able to customize the question name for each question within the region Question names are limited to 60 characters each Tip The following characters are not allowed in region question names due to the problems they could cause when exporting data to certain formats Period Exclamation Singe quote Left bracket Right bracket Comma Double quote Left paren Right paren To insert individual question names 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Question text and names link in the left Task Pane 3 Click in the first grid cell under Question Names 4 Type the desired question name in the first grid cell Alternatively double click in a cell then right cli
282. n scan both sides of a piece of paper at one time Scan duplex Show TWAIN interface Show scanning progress Mark the Scan duplex checkbox if you have selected a duplex scanner and wish to scan both sides of a page at one time This feature is used for scanning double sided forms Mark the Show TWAIN interface checkbox to show your scanner s TWAIN interface By showing the scanner s interface you can setup scanning parameters We recommend turning this selection on initially to verify your scanner s settings e g scanning mode page size resolution brightness Some scanners but not all support having the interface hidden Once you verify all the settings within the scanner s interface you can try turning off the TWAIN interface so that you do not have to see it every time you scan Mark the Show scanning progress checkbox to show the scanner s progress indicator as pages are being scanned Please note that not all scanners support this feature Some scanner drivers always show scanning progress and some never show scanning progress If the scanner s driver allows applications to control the scanning progress indicator marking this checkbox enables the feature Center feed adjustment Mark the Center feed adjustment checkbox to have the page aligned with the center portion of the ADF regardless of how the ADF is positioned This feature is useful when scanning pages that are smaller than 8 5x11 in
283. n sending the emails from Remark Office OMR Otherwise user continue to the next step to enter specific credentials 194 Working with Your Data Option Description Username If authentication is required and you are not using the credentials of and the currently logged in user enter the Username and Password as Password supplied by your network email administrator Throttle rate The throttle rate adds a delay while sending emails The default setting is 500ms meaning that one email is sent every 500 ms in other words two emails are sent per second Throttling emails keeps the SMTP server from being overloaded when sending large numbers of emails Unless you plan on sending hundreds of emails at one time the default setting of 500 is likely fine Microsoft Outlook If you plan to use Microsoft Outlook 2007 or 2010 you do not need to set up anything outside of telling the software to use Outlook To choose Microsoft Outlook or your own SMTP server in Remark Office OMR 1 6 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the Tools menu and then click ee Preferences Se ae A AAA tron sare are Click the Email link in the left Task Pane SMTP Seting Under Email client choose Default to use your own SMTP server Choose Outlook to use Microsoft Outlook 2007 or 2010 If you are using T Ue the defaut credentials of the curertiy gp user Outlook simply click OK If you are using the Default email client continue to
284. nc cannot guarantee that all TWAIN drivers work correctly Scanner manufacturers typically revise TWAIN drivers frequently to correct for any problems therefore it is a good idea to check for updated drivers for your scanner from time to time Manufacturer websites often have updated drivers available for download In order to select a TWAIN source in Remark Office OMR the TWAIN driver must first be installed Consult your scanner s documentation for installation instructions and information about obtaining a TWAIN driver for your scanner Once the driver is installed use the following procedures to select the scanner in Remark Office OMR Setting Up Your Scanner To select and configure a scanner 1 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the Tools menu and then click Scanner Properties to display the Scanner Properties window 2 Click the TWAIN Source drop down arrow to display a list of TWAIN compliant scanners that are available on your system Note Your scanner must be turned on and connected to the computer and you must install your scanner s TWAIN driver in order for the scanner to display in this list 3 Click the appropriate scanner to select it Note Some versions of Windows come with Windows Image Acquisition WIA drivers If you see two drivers for your scanner we do not recommend selecting the one beginning with WIA Whenever possible it is better to use the driver that comes directly from the manufacturer
285. ncatenated together for textual data Boolean indicates a region where a user defined value e g Yes is output for filled responses and another value e g No is output for non filled responses Boolean regions output one piece of data for each mark answer choice in the region Binary indicates a region where a value of 1 is output for filled responses and a value 0 is output for non filled responses Binary regions output a string of responses 1s and Os to a single cell Rank indicates a region containing multiple choice questions where each selection choice can only be selected one time Data type Sets whether the data should be considered text or numeric when saved exported Region orientation Columns in the region Sets the orientation of the region in terms of columns and rows Column the region contains questions that are oriented in columns Row the region contains questions that are oriented in rows Sets the number of columns of marks contained in the region Rows in the region Sets the number of rows of marks contained in the region Possible label scales Sets a range of pre determined values as output Labels e g A E or 1 5 Use this setting to quickly enter Labels into the Labels grid as opposed to entering each Label individually Each mark on your form is represented by a Label The Label is the output when the form is processed e g scanned Note that only label scales co
286. nd maintain consistency with your forms This practice may help you achieve a higher level of accuracy in the software 4 3 2 b Obtaining Updated TWAIN Drivers Most scanner manufacturers release new TWAIN drivers on a regular basis Updated drivers are created to correct problems and maintain operating system compatibility If you experience any problems scanning in Remark Office OMR while using a TWAIN driver first try using the scanner in another application to see if the same problems exist If so contact your scanner manufacturer to ensure that you have the latest driver release and to troubleshoot the problems You can find drivers on the websites of most scanner manufacturers 4 4 Multi Functional Peripherals A multi functional peripheral or MFP is a printing device that also scans copies and sometimes faxes These all in one units are becoming increasingly popular to automate workflows Some MFPs are connected directly to a computer while others are free standing and attached to your network If you wish to utilize an MFP for scanning you may do so with Remark Office OMR When using an MFP that is connected directly to the computer running Remark Office OMR you scan documents just as you would with any desktop scanner See previous sections of this chapter for information about scanning with a TWAIN driver When using an MFP on your network not connected directly to a computer you may scan the forms at the MFP and save them a
287. ndent IDs If using Page IDs with Form IDs and Respondent Tracker regions forms can be processed in virtually any order and still be recognized The software attempts to first recognize the form then the page and then the Respondent Tracker The Unrecognized Image Utility assists you when any ID region cannot be automatically matched When using Respondent Tracker with your Page IDs you do not have to process each respondent s form in its entirety before processing another form If you have chosen to review unrecognized images during form processing the window appears for each unrecognized page ID region If you have chosen not to review during 146 Processing Forms form processing the images are stored in a queue so that you can process them all at once Note When using automatic page identification without the Respondent Tracker feature you must process all pages of one complete form before moving on to the next form If a page is not recognized processing stops regardless of whether you are using the option to review during the read operation Please sort your pages so that an entire respondent s form is read at one time To use the Unrecognized Image Utility for Page ID regions 1 Follow the directions in Section 7 9 2 Auto Page ID to begin processing forms If you are using the Auto Form ID feature remember to mark the Auto Form ID Mode checkbox in the Read Wizard If you are using the Auto Form ID feature when the U
288. ng with the Data Once you have scanned your forms you will likely need to clean the data After the data is cleaned you have two options for the data 1 Use Remark Quick Stats to grade or tabulate the data or 2 export the data to another program for analysis Note the following points when working with your data To clean your data make use of in cell editing and Review Exceptions to make changes to the data In cell editing is convenient when making just a few corrections Review Exceptions allows you to automate the review process and allows you to refer to images to make large scale corrections When exporting data to another program know the limits and specifications of the file format You may need to set up your form template in a specific manner to accommodate your file format File format specifications are outlined in Start Program Files Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation Remark Office OMR 8 Supported File Formats 227 Remark Office OMR User s Guide A 7 Analysis 228 The Remark Quick Stats program provides detailed analysis of your data Information about Remark Quick Stats is included in a separate user s guide in PDF format which is installed with the software Go to Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation to locate this file Keep the following in mind when using Remark Quick Stats To facilitate the grading process set up an answer key file that you can use over again You can specify an answer key
289. ngs e g pencil or when respondents do not fill a 161 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 162 large portion of the area in which they can hand write responses Use caution as you go lower a value of 1 may cause false positives during form processing Higher values for the Recognition Threshold can be used to make the software more discriminating when looking for handwriting in an Image region Very high Recognition Thresholds may cause the software to not pick up some handwriting e g if only a few words are written in a large space or light writing is used such as pencil However it reduces the likelihood that unintended marks are picked up e g stray marks and erasures OCR Threshold The OCR Threshold setting ranges from 1 100 with a default setting of 70 The threshold applies to each individual character in the text you are trying to recognize The software returns a confidence value for each character recognized e g 62 certain it is a G If any character returns a confidence value lower than the specified threshold the OCR field is flagged as an exception for your review If you find that regions are being flagged as blue during processing indicating an OCR exception but the text is read correctly you can lower the Recognition Threshold If you find that text is not being flagged but is being incorrectly interpreted you can raise the OCR Threshold To change thresholds 1 Determine the threshold you wish t
290. nrecognized Image Utility appears the Form Templates list may be empty if the form was not recognized If necessary click the drop down list to choose the correct form template for this image Use the Image Viewer in the right portion of the screen to assist with understanding which form has been processed Once the correct form is identified or if you are not using Auto Form ID you may select the page being processed Click the Pages drop down list and then select the correct page for the form being processed Use the Image Viewer in the right portion of the screen to assist with understanding which form page has been processed Optional If desired click the Cancel button to skip recognizing this image This might be appropriate if the wrong form was scanned or the wrong image was processed If desired use the Skip Image or Discard Image options Once you have matched a page to its form template page click the Read button to continue processing If using the Unrecognized Image Utility during form processing forms are continued to be read until you end the read process If reviewing unrecognized images after form processing once all forms have been identified the Unrecognized Image Utility closes automatically If you are also using Respondent Tracker regions please see the next section 7 9 5 c Reviewing Unrecognized Respondent Tracker Images If the Data Center cannot automatically read a Responden
291. ns A 3 Forms Creating forms correctly is the most important step to a successful experience with Remark Office OMR When a form is created well many potential problems are averted Note the following points when creating your forms 224 Create your forms where you are most comfortable a word processing program survey design program etc Review Chapter 5 Designing Scannable Forms before creating your own forms These guidelines help you understand how to consistently create forms that scan well and produce more accurate results Consider using barcodes to capture information such as ID numbers names etc You can easily create barcodes yourself with the Code 3 of 9 barcode font installs with the software and is available on our website for download Make the barcode about 26 points in size do not make it smaller than 24 points If using the Code 3 of 9 font you must begin and end the barcode with asterisks and use the exclamation point for a space For example to barcode John Doe you would type John Doe Barcodes must be in the same position on each form of the same type You can use barcode stickers as well to attach the barcode after the forms have been duplicated If using Microsoft Word to create barcodes turn off the Auto Format Correct feature to Replace Bold with Real Formatting This feature turns anything between two asterisks to bold and ignores the last asterisk which leads to recognition problems if left activat
292. ns for repackaging the processed images e Inthe Begin image names with box enter a file base name that the software can use to name the images of each form The default base name is the form template name however you may use any name you like We suggest using something that identifies to you that the images belong to a certain form Office Read Wizard Image Naming Conventions The images that are stored all begin with this base name and then have the page number if processing a multi page template date and time appended to them to keep track of the various images You may optionally choose a region from the form Select the naming conventions that will be used when saving images Image Naming Conventions Begin image names with Exam Answer Sheet i Image target drectory EA ciRemark Office OMR 8 Images ka Sa a subfolder based on the form template s name Saved image type TIF Image compression levet Group 4 highest Save mukiple page form templates as multiple page image files a Please note that image nar form template page iF appl ie C Program Files GraviciRemark Office OMR 8 Images History Exam A Exam Answer Sheet 2010 07 21_11 01 01 52 tiF ill also contain the date and time of when they were processed as well as the corresponding template to use as the base name The value that is collected from the form Sve for the specified region is used as the base name for the corresponding stored im
293. nt to include click the Feb a Add button next to the File list window 7 Optional In the Open window select the files you wish to include 8 Once you have all the files you wish to include visible in the File list window click the Next button 9 Under Send type choose FTP to send the files to an FTP site 10 Optional If you would like to compress the files first mark the checkbox for Compress Files into a Zip Archive 11 Optional If using compression choose whether you want each file in its own zip file Send Types Create a separate zip archive for each file ee eee or to combine all files into one zip file Create a single zip archive for all files Sa Compress Files into a Zip Archive 12 Optional If creating a single zip file enter a cee E name for the file in the Zip file name box Note when archiving each file individually the zip file is automatically named with the file name 13 Optional If you would like the contents of the zip file to be encrypted and password protected mark the checkbox for Encrypt and Password Protect the Zip Archive s 14 Optional Enter the password required to open the zip file in the Zip password box 15 Optional If you would like to delete the original files stored locally once the files are sent via the Send Wizard mark the checkbox for Delete local files after successful send If a problem is encountered sending the files the original files are not deleted
294. ny squares around it to indicate it is the active region Note If the region appears with a solid red fill it has not been drawn or set up properly To correct this problem please see Section 6 2 8 6 2 7 Linking OMR Regions Marks that are separated by text lines or graphics cannot be selected in one region definition When creating an OMR region in an area that contains items such as text or lines you can only select the marks The Append Linked Region function allows you to link these types of marks into one OMR region OMR region types that can be linked include Multiple Grid List Rank Binary and Add The following is an example of a question layout that would require a linked OMR region 67 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 68 What is your gender O Female O Male The marks bubbles are separated by the response text in between them but are still logically considered one question However you cannot select the word Female within your OMR region Therefore you create a region around just the mark for Female and then link the mark for Male to the original region Tip When designing your form try to avoid having to use linked regions by laying out questions without text lines or anything else between the OMR bubbles whenever possible To use the append linked region function 1 Create an OMR region around the first region to be linked as if it were its own region in the previous example you would s
295. o override 2 Mark the appropriate checkbox for OMR Threshold Image Threshold and or OCR Threshold 3 Choose the desired value 1 6 for OMR and Image Regions a percentage for OCR regions as previously described 4 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again 7 14 b Auto Rotate The Auto Rotate feature causes the software to try to rotate form images if it cannot properly read the form during the first pass If a form is accidentally scanned upside down the Auto Rotate feature will flip the scanned image right side up and try the recognition again This feature is on by default and it is recommended that you keep it on The default threshold is 25 meaning that if the percentage of questions on the page contains 25 or more errors Remark Office OMR will try to rotate the image and re recognize the page If the error rate is not better than the original pass no new results are recorded and the image will not be rotated 25 is generally a good number to use Use a lower percentage if you want the software to find fewer errors before it tries to rotate the page less error tolerance Use a higher percentage if you want the software to find more errors before it tries to rotate the page more error tolerance Processing Forms To use Auto Rotate Default Recognition Set 1 Mark the checkbox for Automatically ee eee Rotate Images 2 Choos
296. offset compared to the form template image you can move regions optionally save your changes and then re recognize the data Original form template regions cannot be moved but you can move the yellow regions that display when you select Draw All Regions Once you have the Processing Forms regions moved to the correct place on the specific image you have three options for re reading forms 1 Re read Region The Re read Region option reads only the active region for the selected image This option is best when you are having problems with only a specific region on a specific image 2 Re read Page The Re read Page option reads all of the regions on the active page The entire page is re read regardless of the Draw options chosen This option is best when an entire image within a batch is shifted 3 Re read Batch The Re read Batch option reads all of the images corresponding to the data in the data grid The entire batch is re read regardless of the Draw options chosen If you would only like to select a portion of the records to re read choose the grid rows and then select the Re Read Batch option This option is best when you know an entire batch of forms is offset in the same way e g all from the same photocopied form that is shifted to the left right top bottom When you make changes to the positioning of the regions you may optionally save the form template as a new form template This feature is helpful if you want to re read
297. ognition problems with your form The default settings are optimized for general use of the software If you do modify the recognition settings from the Read Wizard the settings are stored with the form template and therefore still remain in effect the next time you use the same form template 5 If desired click the link for Advanced Image Recognition Properties This link allows you to set the following options Invert image Auto deskew images during recognition Auto despeckle images during recognition Processing Forms Caution We do not suggest making changes to the Advanced Image Recognition Properties unless you encounter difficulties related to these settings 6 If desired mark the appropriate checkboxes under Advanced Collection Options The following options are available Option Server Mode Description Automates form processing by having Remark Office OMR run in the background using specific options See Section 7 11 Server Mode for further details Auto Form ID Mode Allows the software to automatically recognize form templates form pages and respondents using identifiers you place on the forms See Section 7 9 Form Page and Respondent IDs for further details Start reading from form template page Package and rename images Delete images after packaging Allows you to start processing forms starting with a specific form template page instead of at the beginning This feature is useful for
298. oks Applies to Standard OCR only Auto rotate region image Mark this checkbox to automatically rotate the OCR region during recognition if the software is having difficulty reading the text Applies to MODI OCR only Limit OCR Character Set Mark this setting to choose the types of characters that are permitted Numbers Lower case text Upper case text Symbols or Custom character set Limiting the character set can improve accuracy If you do not wish to limit the character set do not mark this option Applies to Standard OCR only Include region in read operation Mark this checkbox to include data from this region when processing forms If this checkbox is not marked the region exists in the form template but no data is captured during form processing This option is on by default To create an OCR region 1 From the Page or Region menu choose Insert and then select OCR Region After Selected Region Page or OCR Region Before Selected Region Page Tip There are several ways to create regions menus toolbar right clicking in the image representation tree or the Task Pane These options are covered in greater detail in Section 6 3 3 Creating Regions Try creating regions using each method and then decide which way you prefer 2 Inthe image representation area use the mouse to drag a box around the text or the location where the text will be on the forms The text may vary in length depending on the data that
299. on Displays a folder containing the Remark Office OMR user s guides in PDF format Edit Authentication Allows you to enter a new serial number or authentication code for the software You should only use this option when directed by Gravic personnel Data Center only Navigating Remark Office OMR Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item Transfer Allows you to deactivate the software license on the License current computer so that you can install and transfer the license to another computer Data Center only Register Launches your default web browser and loads the Software software registration page on the Gravic website We strongly recommend that you register your software so that you receive important product notifications Data Center only Check for Checks the Gravic website for a software update If an Updates update is available you are given prompts to download and install it If no update is available you are notified that your software is up to date Copyrights Displays copyright information for Remark Office OMR About Remark Office OMR Template Editor Data Center Data Center only Displays the About Remark Office OMR window showing information about Gravic Inc as well as the serial number and current version of the software that is running 3 6 Accessing the Software Help File Remark Office OMR includes a help file to provide answers to your questions Use the following procedures
300. on s marks are missing or damaged a recognition error is output The default setting for questions is 50 This setting means that if 50 or more of a single question s marks are missing or damaged a recognition error is output Once the number of errors exceeds the specified threshold the errors are reported e g as recognition errors in the data grid If the number of errors does not exceed the threshold then the missing or damaged marks are considered unfilled Note The software must be able to recognize at least one complete OMR aa tings Optionally configure advanced recognition settings to compensate for poor qualty mages or damaged marks region consisting of four or more bubbles in order for the Compensate for Missing and Damaged Marks feature to be active To use Enhanced Reading Mode 1 Mark the checkbox for Use Enhanced Reading Mode Remark Office OMR User s Guide 2 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again To use Compensate for Missing and Damaged Marks 1 Mark the checkbox for Compensate for Missing and Damaged Marks Region damage threshold Choose the desired percentage of each region s marks Default Recognition Settings Cpionaly configure advanced recogriion settings to compensate far poor guilty mages or damaged marks Recogeition Settings E Trecho overndes above which recognition errors sh
301. on is encountered you can place your mouse over the region and the Template Editor provides details of the problem Flagged regions are also red and italicized in the tree view indicating that you need to make a correction Reasons for this issue include the following e The number of columns or rows entered in the Properties OMR Region window is not correct e One of the region borders is touching something else on the image It could be touching a mark text lines or graphics that are present on your form image Borders cannot be touching anything on the image You should have adequate white space on your form so that you can create regions without touching anything on the image See Chapter 5 for information about good form design e You have captured something other than marks bubbles within your OMR region e g text or lines Only capture the actual marks within a given OMR region If there is something such as text prohibiting you from selecting all of the marks for a single question you need to use the Append Linked Region function see Section 6 2 7 for further details e You are using a form that does not have optical marks In order for Remark Office OMR to read your form the form must contain complete shapes such as bubbles or checkboxes You cannot process forms that use circle the number 69 Remark Office OMR User s Guide style questions or those that have a line that someone marks to indicate a response
302. on to scan the page s Respondent tracker region nla The page s are scanned and then a thumbnail image of the form appears in the Image a window If scanning multiple pages at once use the Previous Page and Next Page icons under the image to view all scanned images You may delete any images you do not wish to keep by clicking the Delete icons 5 If you are satisfied with the image s click the OK button Otherwise click Acquire Images from Scanner again to rescan a page You may be prompted to have the software attempt to move your existing regions to the appropriate place on the new image Review changes carefully after repositioning Using the Template Editor To use Reset Images with an image file 1 Select the Tools menu and then click Reset cA Reset Images Images or click See images 2 In the Select Method to Use for Image Use the acquire button to obtain new image file s For your existing Form template pages Select Method to Use For Image Acquistion Acquisition section click the Read from Onenen eevee image files link option Ss e Cee Warning Always use Forms that have nat been marked 3 Click the Acquire Images from File button to select an image from file 4 Inthe Select Image File window use the Look in drop down list to find the file s you iH i HEE wish to use for the form template You may iif ae evecare only select one image at a time however you s x can go
303. on to view details about the current window action etc 3 4 Using the Mouse and Keyboard I Read Wizard Customize your data collection tasks by stepping through the Read Wizard d Review exceptions Perform data validation By Review duplicates Search for duplicate records E Open data file Browse the file system for a data file to open into the active form template H Save data Save the Form template data El Save data as Save the Form template data as another file Email Data Email data as a ZIP attachment Recognition Tools Tools for modifying recognition settings and re reading images Exceptions Legend Multiple responses Blank responses Recognition errors Image regions Database lookup regions Barcode regions OCR regions Repeated rank responses Multiple exceptions This section details the different mouse and keyboard conventions used in the Remark Office OMR software You can use either the mouse or the keyboard to perform functions within Remark Office OMR Occasionally you might find it easier to combine the mouse and keyboard functions 3 4 1 Using the Mouse In this User s Guide the phrase the mouse button refers to the left mouse button unless otherwise stated The following table lists the different mouse actions and their meanings Mouse Action Meaning Click Press and release the mouse button Double click Press and release the
304. onnections Scanners are connected to a computer via a cable Scanners are typically connected to the computer in one of three ways e USB Port e SCSI Card legacy scanners e Network connection A video connection is not supported in Remark Office OMR For USB port connections you simply connect the scanner s cable to the appropriate port on the computer For SCSI connections you connect the scanner s cable to a SCSI card that is located inside the computer Some scanners come with their own SCSI cards or the computer may already have one installed Otherwise a SCSI card will need to be purchased Please see your scanner s installation guide for the specifics on your particular model Please note that SCSI cards are typically used with older scanners so you should check compatibility 33 Remark Office OMR User s Guide with your operating system Network scanners are not connected directly to a computer They are attached to the network so that multiple computers can connect to them Typically these systems are multi function systems where you can print copy scan or fax See section 4 4 for more information on multi function peripherals Note Read the scanner manufacturer s directions BEFORE installing your scanner You may need to install items in a specific order 4 2 2 Scanner Drivers Communication between software and a scanner occurs through a driver There are several different scanner communications protocols Rema
305. ons you could add a session name that is being collected from the form so that your processed image clips all have the session name them In the Image Target Directory area you may choose to add a region from the processed data to the folder structure that holds the processed image clips Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button For example if processing conference session evaluations you could add a session name that is being collected from the form so that each image clip is stored in a folder containing the conference session number In the Name Builder box click the OK button to return to the Image Properties Begin names with Image Clip Image region only Include region in read operation Use this box to enter a beginning base name to use when storing Image Clips This name has numbers appended to it to allow for the greatest number of images to be stored For example if you are storing Image Clips of a comment question on a survey you may wish to begin the clips with the name Comments Mark this checkbox to include data from this region when processing forms If this checkbox is not marked the region exists in the form template but no data is captured during form processing 73 Remark Office OMR User s Guide To create an Image region 1 From the Page or Region menu choose Insert and then select Image Region After Selected Region Page or Image Region Before Selected
306. ools portion of the Task Pane If you make changes to the Recognition Settings they are stored with the active template The general Recognition Settings however are not updated Working with Your Data Chapter 8 8 1 Overview This chapter explains the basics of data manipulation and using the data grid in the Remark Office OMR Data Center and includes the following Understanding the data grid Section 8 2 Editing the data grid Section 8 3 Sorting data Section 8 4 Spell checking data Section 8 5 Saving data Section 8 6 Printing data Section 8 7 Emailing data Section 8 8 Send wizard Section 8 9 Opening grid data Section 8 10 Logging changes Section 8 11 The Remark Office OMR software requires a form template file for each type of form that you want to process For each form template created there is a corresponding data grid The Remark Office OMR Data Center uses a data grid to store data recognized from forms A form may contain up to 150 pages The data read from one form are considered a single record and display in one grid row Each column in the grid represents one variable or question on the form as defined in the form template 8 2 Understanding the Data Grid The Remark Office OMR data grid window employs a spreadsheet style view of the form template to display recognized data A5 a When a form template is open each grid column corresponds to an item or question on the form as
307. operties and then click the OK button Note For more information about region types see the Creating Form Templates section of this chapter 7 Save the form template when finished editing 6 6 1 Editing OMR Regions OMR Regions can be modified after they have been created in order to change properties such as region names data types orientation labels etc If you select the entire OMR region you have access to all of the properties that are valid for that region If you are editing an OMR region that contains multiple questions you may only edit certain 103 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 104 properties when selecting individual questions The ability to edit individual questions allows you to change items such as test points the ability to accept multiple responses and blank and multiple exception handling on an individual question basis yet still only create one OMR region Note Changing regions in a form template does not change data that have already been processed To update data that have been read you need to process the forms again or use the Find Replace option to change the existing data to match the revised form template Changing a form template can also invalidate Grade Wizard Survey Wizard definition files If you have already created these files it is recommended that you recreate them based on the current form template settings To edit a region with multiple questions 1 To Double click within the b
308. or column Each bubble has a unique output value Example Form What is your middle initial O OOQDOOO OO OP HHOO OHOOOODWHO Data Output Middle Initial L Add Region An Add region designates a region where the values of all of the chosen OMR bubbles are added together to produce one value You can assign individual values to each answer choice or mark on the form Example 1 For this example you could add each of the scale values chosen to make up one total response Form Please answer the following questions honestly using the scale provided Unhappy Happy 1 2 3 4 5 How do you feel today O e O O O How did you feel yesterday O e O O O How did you feel last week O O O O Using the Template Editor Data Output 2 2 3 Feelings 7 Example 2 In this example you could assign a 1 to each positive response and a 1 to each negative response and Remark Office OMR would output a total Form Mark the characteristics that you think apply to you 1 1 happy most of the time O unhappy most of the time O laid back e tense O fun e boring e intelligent O unintelligent e exceptional O average Data Output 1 1 1 1 1 Characteristics 1 Boolean Region A Boolean region designation is used when you want a user defined value e g Yes to be output if an answer choice is selected and another user defined value e g No for answer choic
309. or the Task Pane These options are covered in greater detail in Section 6 3 3 Creating Regions Try creating regions using each method and then decide which way you prefer 2 Inthe image representation area use the mouse to drag a box around the barcode or the location where the barcode will be on the forms e g if using stickers after the forms are returned place the Barcode region in the area where the stickers will be affixed Barcodes may vary in length depending on the data that you are capturing Be sure to make the Barcode region large enough to capture the longest barcode you plan to recognize 3 Inthe Properties Barcode Region box enter the appropriate properties for the region on the Barcode region properties screen as described previously There are additional more advanced features that may be defined These features are discussed in detail beginning with Section 6 3 1 4 Click the OK button Using the Template Editor After creating a Barcode region you see the region in the image representation area and a new node is added to the tree view Each Barcode region is orange to differentiate the regions 6 2 11 OCR Optical Character Recognition Regions OCR Optical Character Recognition regions are used to recognize machine printed text Note OCR does not include handwriting recognition commonly called ICR or Intelligent Character Recognition In order to use the OCR feature the text must
310. order and still have Remark Office OMR record the data properly Respondent Tracker ID regions can be OMR OCR or Barcode regions Note If you are only processing one multi page form use of Auto Form ID is not necessary If you would like to process more than one form type at once and use the Respondent Tracker feature you need to also use Auto Form ID To use Respondent Tracker 1 Outside of Remark Office OMR create a form that contains a unique identifier on each page that can be captured as an OMR OCR or Barcode region in the Remark Office OMR form template Remember that if you are using Auto Form ID and Auto Page ID you need a third unique identifier to be used as the Respondent Tracker Tip The Respondent Tracker region can be a bubble region where the respondent marks identifying information such as name ID number etc It can also be a Barcode or OCR region that contains similar information and is pre printed The information must appear on every page of the form 2 Create a form template for each form you wish to process using the Respondent Tracker feature When creating the form template set the region to be used as the Respondent Tracker region in the Tracking section of the region s properties Mark the checkbox for Use Region as a Unique Identifier Then select the radio button marked Respondent tracker See Section 6 3 3 c Respondent Tracker for further information about setting up Respondent Tracker regions in the
311. orks and whether you have set up the form template properly for your data analysis needs A 5 Reading Forms When the form and form template guidelines in the previous sections are followed reading forms is a smooth process Here are some tips to keep things running efficiently Scan filled in forms at the same resolution and brightness settings that were used for the form template If you are unsure of theses settings open your form template in the Template Editor Double click any page node and then hover your mouse over the information button in the image viewer to view details about the stored image Q 226 Tips and Helpful Hints Whenever possible scan in black and white mode as opposed to grayscale or color Black and white is the fast scanning mode If you are going to scan forms outside of Remark Office OMR and then have the Remark software read the resulting images save the scanned forms as TIF black and white images Do not save them as PDF files as these are not native image files and require a great deal more processing from the software meaning your processing time is slower You have two options when it comes to cleaning your data 1 Use Review Exceptions during form processing to stop processing when selected exception cases are encountered and make a correction immediately or 2 Use Review Exceptions after processing the forms to have the software cycle through the data and allow you to make corrections b
312. ormation ranging from names to ID positioned numbers to other demographic information barcode OCR Optical Machine OCR regions are used to read text that is Character printed text machine printed on your form not handwritten Recognition The software can read characters such as ID numbers and names as long as they are machine printed Image An area for handwritten text or other information that cannot be automatically converted to data Image regions capture handwriting from comment areas and other open ended questions The software does not automatically interpret handwriting but it does either take a picture of the handwriting allow you to hand enter the written comments using image assisted data entry or type qualitative codes to apply themes to the handwritten comments Now that you know how your form translates to a form template we can begin the basics of form template creation 6 2 3 Beginning the Form Template Form templates are created in the Remark Office OMR Template Editor There are two main ways to access the Template Editor to create a new form template 1 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the File menu and then click New co Form Template or click ot Alternatively with the Templates tab selected click New form template in the Task Pane 2 From your Windows Start menu click Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Remark Office OMR Template Editor 53 Remark Office OMR User
313. oth tests and surveys provides a condensed view of all questions on the form response frequencies and means For test grading it optionally shows test score information such as min max and mean scores standard deviation prevalent non distractors and class performance by upper and lower percentages Enhanced Reports e Detailed Item Analysis Report Cumulative and Valid Percent statistics can be turned off in the Detailed Item Analysis report for surveys Remark Office OMR User s Guide Student Statistics Report T Score Z Score ETS Score and Dev IQ have been added to the Student Statistics Report shown optionally Condensed Item Analysis Report Colors have been added to the bar charts on Condensed Item Analysis report to highlight the correct answer and the distracters chosen when performing test grading Test Item Statistics Report Several enhancements have been made to the Test Item Statistics report to make it more readable including renaming Benchmark P Value to Benchmark changing the P value to a straight percentage renaming Benchmark as Percent Correct and changing the value to a straight percentage and adding options for each of the columns to be shown hidden Response Reports Response reports can now be sorted by Respondent ID or Response General Features NA Non Applicable Answer Choices You may now exclude NA answer choices from your analysis reports providing you with more accurate means and sta
314. ould be reported 30 is recommended as a starting point 3 Question damage threshold Choose the desired percentage of each question s marks above which recognition errors should be reported 50 is recommended as a starting point 4 Click the OK button The adjusted settings apply to your next Read operation and stay in place until you change them again 7 14 d Ignore Large Marks The Ignore Large Marks option lets you allow respondents to put large marks such as an X through a response that was marked by mistake as opposed to erasing it or trying to use white out to remove it If the software finds a large X or slash through a bubble it tries to ignore it If you want to use this feature you should tell respondents how to mark bubbles they did not mean to fill and include a graphic representation with the X or slash through the mismarked bubble The Ignore Large Marks feature is off by default Use the Large mark threshold to tell the software how to interpret the large marks The default value is 2 Use a lower value to have the software be more likely to recognize a large X or slash and ignore the mark Use a higher value to have the software be less likely to recognize a large X or slash and therefore include the mark in the recognition process Use the Only ignore large marks if the question contains multiple responses option to only turn on this feature when Remark Office OMR detects multiple responses and one or mor
315. ould generate both an OCR exception and a Database Lookup exception To use Review Exceptions during form processing ul Open the correct form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template Begin processing forms by either selecting the Tools menu and then clicking Read Wizard clicking aw or clicking the Read Wizard link in the Task Pane Make the necessary selections on the Read Method screen and the Scanned Image Naming Conventions if scanning or Image Selection window if reading image files screen See Section 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard for detailed information about these screens Click the Next gt gt button to go to the Review Exceptions screen Mark the checkbox for Activate Review Exceptions to turn on the Review Exceptions feature In the Review Exceptions Options Review Exceptions optional Select the desired items to be flagged when running Review Exceptions area select the exception cases you Sa So ie te f M u read operation would like to review during form a e AE E wor onan wig A A wa processing Multiple responses Blank gegere oenn d tahae been net drng a read geraten Please note that when readh responses Recognition errors EZ Activate Reve Exceptions Multiple responses Image regions C OCR regions Image regions Database lookup Binme Se ee o regions Barcode regions OCR E Recognition errors EI Barcode regions O Reguired tems regions Repeated rank responses or Requ
316. oundaries of any region you want to edit or double click a region node in the tree view to display the Properties window You have access to the OMR region properties Region item properties and Question text and names sections Make the desired changes and click the OK button Remember that changes made at this level apply to the entire region Save the form template when finished editing A Remark Ottice OSR Tempe Latter Laam Armee Sheet ent edit individual questions within an OMR region Expand the region containing multiple questions by clicking the plus sign next to the region node in the tree view Double click the question node representing the question you wish to change You can also select multiple nodes by holding down Ctrl on the keyboard and clicking each region or by clicking a region holding down Shift on the keyboard and then clicking another region all nodes in between the selections are highlighted Note If multiple questions are selected you are not able to edit Question Text or Question Names You are able to adjust the Labels for all selected questions however The Properties window appears You are E fee ni mS ae So able to adjust Region item properties and or eet Question text names and responses Note When viewing properties for individual questions within an OMR region the Question text and names window changes to Question text names and responses You can find the question s l
317. own list to find the image file you wish to use for the form template You may only select one image at a time however you can go back to this window to select more images in succession A thumbnail image of the form appears in the Image window 5 Repeat Steps 3 4 to add any other images to the form template if desired 6 If you are satisfied with the image s click the OK button Otherwise click Acquire Images from File again to reselect an image Remark Office OMR opens a window with a tree view item list on the left and an image representation of your form on the right In this window you outline the areas to be recognized Tip For multi page forms you can decide whether you want to start with a single template page or all pages at once If you need to add pages later simply click a page node in the tree view and use the Page Insert menu to add new pages 6 2 4 Creating Regions Regions can be created several different ways by using the tree view menus Task Pane or image representation area The sections that follow detail these methods You can create regions using the tree view by utilizing the appropriate menus and or the mouse The tree view contains nodes representing each page and region of your form You can double click or right click each node in the tree view to perform specific actions Using Menus to Insert Regions Using a Mouse to Insert Regions 1 Click the node above or below 1 Click the node above or be
318. plates you are prompted and Data Exit Exits the Remark Office OMR Data Center Alt F4 3 5 2 Edit Menu Use the items in the Edit menu to perform common Windows functions on one of the Remark Office OMR documents The operations include typical clipboard operations such as copying and pasting information and several data manipulation operations such as finding amp replacing Template Editor Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item va Undo Undoes the most recent change to the form template T Ctrl Z J Redo Redoes the last action to which Undo was applied 2 Ctrl Y o Cut Moves a selection of text or region from one place to kA Ctrl X another by cutting it from the original position and pasting it in a new position paste is a separate command Ta Copy Allows for easy duplication and movement of information sae Ctrl C You can copy a selected portion of text from a form template or a region from one part of a form template or a different document altogether and paste it in a different part of the form template A Paste Pastes information from the clipboard after the selected i Ctrl V node in the tree view Paste Before Ctrl B Pastes information from the clipboard before the selected node in the tree view 23 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item Copy Special When copying and pasting between two instances of the Ctrl L Template Edi
319. possibly picking up items such as erasures High thresholds may cause the software to choose the most filled mark when two marks are encountered instead of outputting a multiple response for your review Default Region Grade Settings Regions to Grade Use the checkboxes to select the OMR region types that you want to be graded by default when performing a grade operation Default Region Survey Settings Regions to Tabulate Use the checkboxes to select the OMR region types that you want to be tabulated by default when performing a survey operation 107 Section Default Multiple Exception Handling Remark Office OMR User s Guide Option Replace with Multiple Rank and List Description Select the replacement option to be used by default when a multiple response occurs for a Multiple Rank or List region during form processing The text entered in this box appears as output in the data grid and is exported in any saved data files The default replacement is ALL meaning that all responses are output and the data cell is flagged green Other pre defined options include MULT Asterisk Nothing Space Character and Tilde You may also type characters into the Replace with box Replace with Grid Select the replacement option to be used by default when a multiple response occurs for a Grid region during form processing The text entered in this box appears as output in the data grid and
320. question groupings Test statistics and reports include A Grade Wizard steps you through the process of setting up an answer key grade scale questions points learning objectives benchmark scores and other grading information for your test For each item Remark Quick Stats calculates Mean Variance Standard Deviation Standard Error Min Max Range Median Skewness Kurtosis T Value Percentiles Confidence Intervals P values Point Biserial Correlation For each answer choice Remark Quick Stats calculates Frequencies Percentages Point Biserial For each student Remark Quick Stats calculates Total score Raw score Grade Dev IQ Number correct incorrect unanswered 211 Remark Office OMR User s Guide For the test Remark Quick Stats calculates Number of graded tests and items Max Min Median Range Percentile scores Mean Variance Standard Deviation Confidence Intervals 1 5 95 99 KR 20 KR21 Coefficient Cronbach Alpha A Grade Report displays each student s results on the test and optionally an image of the scanned test A Group Report displays grades for specific subsets of your data A variety of graph types are also included all of which can be copied and printed Pie Bar Horizontal Bar Line Area Point Polar Fast Line 9 2 Tabulating Surveys with Remark Quick Stats 212 Surveys can be tabulated in two ways Easy Survey and the Survey Wizard Easy Survey uses the parameters specified in
321. r Server Mode The software searches for image files in a directory or pages in the scanner s sheetfeeder based on this time interval 10 3 File Storage Location Preferences File Storage Location preferences allow you to setup the default directories that are used to store various file types If you prefer to store files on a network drive you can enter that location here ensure that you have permission to fully access that drive The following options are available 217 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Application Preferences General Preferences Home Directories General Set the generic application preferences LY File storage locations Set target file storage locations Aa Custom Font Optionally choose a custom font and character set to use throughout the application 2 Email Choose the desired email client and settings E Change Log Optionally enable logging for all changes to the data Check for Updates Type Directory Location Form Templates C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Templates Data C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Data Dictionaries C WINDOWS system32 Modify Directory Image Search Directories Image Directory Search List C Program Files Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Images Add Directory Optionally check for software updates when j Dictionary Settings starting the application Active dictionary English det Pre
322. r a password in the Password box Passwords have a maximum of 255 characters 4 Click the Enable button 5 Click the OK button to close the Preferences From this point forward all changes to the data grid are logged 208 Working with Your Data To turn off logging 1 2 3 4 From the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the Tools menu then click Preferences then Change Log Enter the password that was set when turning on logging in the Password box Click the Disable button Click the OK button to close the Preferences From this point forward all changes to the data grid are not logged If changes have been logged previously the Access database still exists To access the change log database 1 2 3 Using Windows Explorer or My Computer go to Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 Change Logs where C is the drive on which Remark Office OMR is installed Windows Vista Windows 7 C ProgramData Gravic Remark Office OMR 8 change log Note you must have the option to show hidden folders and files on to see this location Double click the Access file when the database was initially created it used the date of creation as the filename Enter the password that was used when logging was enabled in the Remark Office OMR Preferences The database opens in Access for your review It is a fully functioning Access database that
323. r exceptions after they have been reviewed in the section called Review Exceptions After a cell is reviewed using Review Exceptions the color disappears even if you did not make a change to the cell If Review Exceptions is run again the cell is not flagged as an exception Processing Forms 7 6 2 a Using the Review Exceptions Window Whether you use Review Exceptions during or after form processing any exceptions found while reading display in the Review Exceptions window The Review Exceptions window displays the following information Property Search by Response Function Row Respondent Use this option to search across the data grid in rows by respondent Column Item Use this option to search across the data grid in columns by form template item question Displays the current response Use this box to enter the correct response by typing the response or clicking the drop down arrow and choosing a response You can view the item in question in the Image Viewer for assistance in verifying the response Search Forward Moves to the next exception case on the form Search Backward Moves backwards until it encounters an exception case Next Row Column Moves to the next exception case on the next form or column it searches by row or column depending on your selection in the Search by box Previous Row Column Moves backward one row or column until it encounters an exception case it searches b
324. r further details 5 5 Form Spacing Allowing enough white space on a form is an important part of good form design Allow at least 3 8 inch of space between any text lines or graphics on the form and all user markable areas bubbles checkboxes barcodes text you plan to read using OCR etc The white space around your marks provides a buffer that can help Remark Office OMR accommodate scanner skew form offset and not so perfect markings from your respondents The more white space you have the better Remark Office OMR is able to tolerate differences from form to form In contrast the more crowded a form or the less white space there is the harder it is for Remark Office OMR to compensate for form differences Although groups of bubbles need to be 3 8 inch away from any visible lines or text the individual bubbles within the group can be as close to one another as two character spaces 45 Remark Office OMR User s Guide We recommend staying away from the use of lines or boxes around or between the marks on a form If you find it necessary to use lines or boxes you may make them a light gray that drops out completely disappear during the scanning process In addition follow the spacing guidelines above Note You cannot photocopy forms that use gray lines as the gray becomes too dark Only use clean printouts for forms utilizing gray lines Example of good form spacing Excellent Good Fair Poor Question 1 O O O O Ques
325. r key to accurate form processing Every form that is scanned is compared to the form template in order for Remark Office OMR to locate the marks on the page and output the correct information Therefore the form template must be the same as the filled in forms that are scanned The form template determines the order of fields in your data as well as the labels your data contains If you plan to export your data to another file format e g Access Excel SPSS etc adhere to the limitations imposed by that specific file format see your file format s documentation for these limitations Make sure you know where your data will eventually end up before you create your form template so that the form template can be set up to meet your database s needs Note the following points when creating your form templates Always use a form that has not been filled in to create the form template Use the same quality form to create the form template that you are distributing to your respondents This means that if you photocopied the forms use a blank photocopy to create the form template If you had the forms professionally printed use a blank printer s copy to create the form template If you printed them on a laser printer use a blank copy from the same laser printer to create the form template When forms are duplicated offset may occur By using the same quality form you compensate for this offset If you allow various locations to print their own ve
326. r user or application to finish working with the database and then try the operation again 7201 An error occurred updating the database The database file table or field is defined as read only 7202 An error occurred accessing the specified path or filename The path or filename is not valid Check the name and path to make sure they were entered correctly then retry the operation 7203 7204 A permissions error occurred accessing the specified database table or object You don t have the necessary permissions Contact the database administrator regarding access rights A file disk or network access error occurred Resolve the error condition and then retry the operation 7205 An error occurred attempting to create the database table or object because it already exists This error can also occur if an ODBC database contains several tables with the same name 7206 An error occurred attempting to open or access the database file The file is either invalid or corrupt 7207 An error occurred trying to access a necessary database file or table Resolve the error condition and then retry the operation 7208 An attempt was made to import or attach to an empty text file To import or attach a text file the file must contain data 7209 You tried to perform an operation that would have violated referential integrity rules for related tables 235 Remark Office OMR User s
327. rcode region in the Remark Office OMR form template 139 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Tip The Auto Form ID region could be a series of bubbles that represent form numbers such as 1 4 Or it could be a barcode or OCR area that identifies a specific form such as Form A 2 Create a form template for each form you wish to process in Auto Form ID mode When memm creating the form template set the region to be used as the Form ID region in the Tracking section of the region s properties Mark the checkbox for Use Region as a Unique Identifier Then select the radio button marked Form ID See Section 6 3 3 a Auto Form ID for further information about setting up ID regions in the form template 3 When you are ready to start processing forms open the form templates you wish to use in Auto Form ID mode in the Data Center see Section 7 2 Opening Form SS Templates Only open form templates soi aaa Ry aac that contain Auto Form ID regions eS oe oe O Read from scanner Scanner Properties Recognition Settings 4 Rea d fo rm s fro m e it h e r sca n n e r o r i m a g e Read from image files Advanced Image Recognition Properties Advanced Collection Options file by selecting the Tools menu and then deysn clicking Read Wizard or click S Read Wizard a AS Office Read Wizard 5 Inthe Read Wizard go to the section titled Advanced Collection Options and mark the checkbox for Auto Form ID Mode 6 Cl
328. re having trouble with skewed forms Invert image Use the Invert image option to correct an image that scans in reverse black background with white text The default setting is No You only need to adjust this setting if your image comes in reversed Rotate front side Rotate back side Use the Rotate front side option to rotate the front side of each page that is scanned Select the rotation degrees in the box provided Only use this option if the front side of your form does not rotate correctly on its own Use the Rotate back side option to rotate the back side of each page that is scanned when scanning duplex two sides at one time Select the rotation degrees in the box provided Only use this option if the back side of your form does not rotate correctly on its own Hardware Options Flatbed only Select the Flatbed only option if your scanner only contains a flatbed area for scanning Flatbed scanning is not recommended for Remark Office OMR ADF only Select the ADF only option if your scanner only contains a sheetfeeder ADF for scanning Flatbed and ADF Select the Flatbed and ADF option if your scanner contains both a flatbed and a sheetfeeder ADF 37 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Content Option Area Duplex scanner Function Select the Duplex scanner checkbox if the scanner you are using has duplex capabilities for double sided form scanning meaning the scanner ca
329. re scanning a multi page form and would like all of the images for one complete form to be saved as one image file Using this option creates fewer image files and is recommended 14 If you would like to configure Review Exceptions options click the Next gt gt button to continue Otherwise click the Read button to begin scanning pages Review Exceptions is a way to correct exception cases found on forms such as blank and multiple responses see Section 7 6 Review Exceptions for further details about using this feature 15 In the Review Exceptions window specify whether to review exception cases during the scanning process by marking the Activate Review Exceptions checkbox 16 In the Review Exceptions Options area mark the checkboxes for those cases that you wish to review during scanning The following options are available Multiple responses Blank responses Recognition errors Image regions Database lookup regions Barcode regions OCR regions Repeated rank responses or Processing Forms Office Read Wizard Review Exceptions optional Required items Reviewing Exceptions eerie eta OI S during scanning causes the software to es RSPR TOSSES SIS is the process of viewing and matching Tracking regions that are not automatically recognized during a stop scanning when it encounters any exception cases you select You can then make the appropriate adjustments and BON NTR th e scann i n g resumes Multipl
330. records larger than can be supported Redefine the table by making some regions shorter or by removing unneeded regions 7602 A field error occurred due to a data type conflict or an invalid data type 7603 7604 An error occurred saving a field value The value specified is invalid The specified table doesn t contain the specified field s Check the spelling of the region name s in the form template and ensure that they do not contain invalid characters commas parentheses etc 7605 None of the import region names matches fields in the associated table At least one region name in the import table and one field name in the appended table must match 7606 An error occurred creating the table or appending the field because more than one field was defined with the same name Each field name in a table must be unique Check the region name s specified in the form template 7607 You referred to a record that you deleted or that another user in a multi user environment deleted Move to another record and then try the operation again 7608 You attempted to import an invalid range of spreadsheet cells 7609 The first row of data contains invalid region field names such as quoted and unquoted strings in the same field name Check the import table for properly matched quotation marks and then try the import operation again 7610 An error occurred creating the table or index
331. reen instructions to display the Remark Office OMR Installation window Note The NET 2 0 Framework is required to install Remark Office OMR If you do not have it installed on your system you are prompted to install it Once the NET 2 0 Framework installation completes the Remark Office OMR installation resumes normally 5 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation You are prompted for a serial number and authentication code You can find this information on a sticker on the CD case that came with your software Installing and Activating Remark Office OMR Remark Office OMR 8 0 0 InstallShield Wizard 6 Some operating systems may ask whether you wish to install the software for all users or only es the person currently logged into the computer SSW In most cases and especially if multiple ravie Inc people use this computer and need to use ei Remark Office OMR on this computer you E should choose the option for all users anyone T SON CE So Ee Install this application for who uses Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me 7 When the installation completes click the Finish button to close the installation program lt Back Next gt 2 4 Uninstalling the Software If you need to uninstall the software in order to reinstall it on the same computer use the Windows Control Panel Add or Remove Programs function If you need to uninstall the software and
332. reinstall it on another computer you must transfer your software license before you uninstall Please see Section 2 5 2 for details before proceeding with the uninstall Note When uninstalling the software all program and default files are removed Files that you created remain on the system However for best practices purposes if you plan to reinstall the software we recommend backing up any files you wish to save prior to uninstalling the software To uninstall Remark Office OMR 1 Select the Start menu click Settings and then click Control Panel Note Accessing the control panel may vary slightly based on the version of Windows you are running 2 Select the Add or Remove Programs option or Programs depending on your operating system 3 Select Remark Office OMR 8 from the list and then click Remove or Uninstall 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the uninstallation 2 5 Running Remark Office OMR Use the following procedures to start and exit Remark Office OMR To start Remark Office OMR 1 If you chose to install a shortcut on your desktop during installation double click this shortcut Otherwise select Start from the taskbar 2 Highlight Programs highlight Remark Office OMR 8 and then click Remark Office OMR Data Center To go directly to the Template Editor click Remark Office OMR Template Editor Note Accessing the installed programs may vary slightly based on the version of Windows you are runn
333. rk Office OMR supports the most common protocol TWAIN TWAIN is a standard protocol for controlling scanning equipment With TWAIN each scanner manufacturer provides a TWAIN compliant driver for their scanners and each software application includes TWAIN support as part of the software Software applications supporting the TWAIN protocol can control many different scanners When using the TWAIN option in Remark Office OMR you have the option of using legacy support for older scanner drivers Once you have connected your scanner to the computer install the appropriate drivers and verify that the scanner is functioning properly Then proceed to the next section 4 3 Selecting Your Scanner 4 3 Selecting Your Scanner 34 To use your scanner with the Remark Office OMR software you must first select your scanner from the list of supported scanners 4 3 1 TWAIN Source TWAIN is a standard for controlling scanning equipment Most scanners ship with a TWAIN driver If you are uncertain whether you have a TWAIN driver check with your scanner manufacturer Note Individual scanner manufacturers write their own scanner drivers The TWAIN standard leaves some areas unclear open for interpretation and as a result the functionality of some TWAIN drivers is questionable Remark Office OMR supports the TWAIN protocol however since scanners come onto the market so quickly and different companies have different software quality standards Gravic I
334. rm as it is processed The software then uses these images to help automate the correction of output errors and exception cases without needing to locate the appropriate paper form e Save data and or use the built in analysis tool Remark Quick Stats Save the data to over 30 output formats including Access Excel SPSS Oracle SQL Server ODBC etc Or use the analysis program included with the software Remark Quick Stats to tabulate your survey or grade your test If you use Remark Quick Stats you can take advantage of powerful grade results crosstabulations graphs charts and more Remark Office OMR works with image scanners which are the type of scanners that are also used for scanning pictures or pages of text and are readily available from your local computer dealer or via mail order and online companies See Chapter 4 for more specific information about scanners and their relationship to Remark Office OMR This User s Guide is designed to provide information about all of the features of the software as well as guidelines for using the software Software features are not only described but you are also given steps for how to use the features Items taken directly from the software such as menus buttons and dialogs are in bold format whenever they are used in an instructional context You are encouraged to read the chapters that follow in this user s guide before designing your own forms or using the software with your own forms
335. rms can be created Good form design is a key component to using Remark Office OMR successfully Therefore we have created a set of form design guidelines to help you create forms that will work well with the software Remark Office OMR works with plain paper forms no special inks or marks are needed Respondents can use pen or pencil to complete the forms Note Remark Office OMR is not a form designer Forms used with Remark Office OMR are created independently of the software in programs such as word processing and survey design packages Designing scannable forms for Remark Office OMR can be broken down into the following elements e Finding an application for designing forms Section 5 2 e Mark selection for OMR Section 5 3 e Character selection for OCR Section 5 4 e Form spacing Section 5 5 e Question grouping Section 5 6 e Using shading Section 5 7 e Margins Section 5 8 e Barcodes Section 5 9 e Paper selection Section 5 10 e Duplicating forms Section 5 11 e Testing forms Section 5 12 e Form review service Section 5 13 43 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 5 2 Finding an Application for Designing Forms The first step in designing a scannable form is determining where you prefer to design the form Some of your options include e Word processing software e Survey design software e Form design software Word processing software e g Microsoft Word is commonly used for creating forms
336. ror Message Details This appendix details the different error messages in Remark Office OMR Use this appendix to gain a better understanding of any problems that may arise while using the software The following table lists error class error category error number and the error text along with some enhanced instructions where applicable Class Category Error Error Text 0100 Memory 100 106 Not enough memory to perform specified operation Errors Close other applications to free up more memory or restart Windows Ensure that your computer meets the minimum system requirements 0200 Windows 200 206 Windows function errors internal to Remark Office Errors OMR Could signify that the Windows environment is functioning improperly Close other software applications and restart Windows 1000 File Open 1001 Remark Office OMR could not open the specified Errors 1012 file The file no longer exists or could not be opened for an unknown reason Possible causes could be a full hard drive an inaccessible network drive or the file is being used by another application 1100 File Read 1101 Error reading the specified file Possibly indicates a Errors 1103 corrupt file Possible causes could be a full hard drive an inaccessible network drive or the file is being used by another application 1200 File Write 1201 Error occurred while writing file to disk Possible Errors 1214 causes could be a full hard drive an inaccessible network dri
337. rresponding to the number of answer choices you have selected appear in this list Labels Sets the output data that appears in the data grid when reading forms Each mark on your form is represented by a Label The Label is the output when the form is processed e g scanned You cannot use the following reserved characters in the list of Labels commas quotation marks semicolons or parentheses Enter labels carefully because once you have processed data you cannot change your labels without reprocessing your forms 65 Property Values Remark Office OMR User s Guide Function Use this setting to associate a numeric value with each textual answer choice Label Values are used for calculating statistics for responses that are set to the textual data type Values are also used when saving to the SPSS file format Note that values are not used as point values when grading tests You cannot assign partial credit to individual answer choices when performing test grading Possible value scales Sets a range of pre determined numbers as Values Use this setting to quickly enter Values for each of your textual output Labels into the Values grid as opposed to entering each Value individually Save Current Scale NA Label Define Format Saves a scale of user defined labels and values as output Labels that you can save and use over again e g Excellent Good Fair Poor Click the Save Current Scale button a
338. rsion of the form ensure you get at least one blank copy of the form from their printer back You can then reset the form template image with their version of the form if it is significantly shifted from the original The image in the form template should always come from a scanned version of the blank form Do not import a PDF document into the Template Editor A PDF created from applications such as Microsoft Word is not the same as what your scanner produces In order to get a true comparison between the filled in forms and the form template image the quality must be the same If your scanner has an automatic document feeder feed the form through the document feeder when scanning it for the form template Do not place the form directly on the flatbed glass as the positioning is different Scan the form for the form template at a resolution of 200 DPI dots per inch Use the same setting when you scan the filled in forms that was used when you created the form template Resolution affects the size of the image which in turn affects the location of the marks on the page Changing the resolution midway may lead to recognition errors Note 300 DPI resolution is recommend if you plan on using OCR optical character recognition Use the default brightness setting sometimes referred to as threshold or contrast on your scanner when you scan the form for the form template You should only change the brightness setting when you encounter a proble
339. ructor Questions 6 3 1 g Mark Discrimination Remark Office OMR allows you to disable mark discrimination on an OMR region Mark discrimination sets the value that determines the difference between two or more marks that are filled partially filled This allows the Remark software to determine which mark is actually filled If you turn off mark discrimination Remark Office OMR does not try to determine which mark is more filled when more than one mark is filled whether or not they are allowed The result is a multiple exception in the data grid that you can review and correct if multiple responses are not found If multiple responses are allowed all marks considered filled are reported Disabling mark discrimination is considered an advanced option and not recommended for most applications To set disable mark discrimination 1 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 2 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane 3 Mark the checkbox for Disable mark discrimination 4 Click the OK button to save the changes and return to the tree view 6 3 1 h Required Items Remark Office OMR allows you to make items required to be filled during processing This feature is used in conjunction with Review Exceptions see Section 7 6 If an item is marked as required in the form template and you are using the Review Exceptions Using the Template Editor feature Remark Office OMR flags
340. s See Section 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard for detailed information about using the Read Wizard 11 Follow the batch header form with the forms that correspond with the group identified on the batch header form 12 When the first group of forms has been processed insert a new batch header form and follow it with the corresponding forms 13 Continue processing forms in this fashion until you have processed all of your batches In the end you see an entire data set with all of the batch header information pre pended to the records Tip If you have already created a batch file and want to open it without using the Batch Wizard select the File menu and then select Open Form Template Change the Files of type drop down list to Remark Office Batch Files to view available batch files 7 11 Server Mode Server Mode is a mode of operation in which Remark Office OMR runs in the background processing pages or image files according to your instructions Server Mode allows you to simultaneously use your computer for other projects while using Remark Office OMR to process forms Server Mode can also be used to process completed forms that are received as image files over a network or by fax You can use Server Mode in conjunction with Auto Form ID to process a variety of form types Server Mode works in two ways continuously polling the scanner for pages and or checking a user specified directory on your computer or network for image files
341. s Select the best response What is your gender O A O Female O B O C O Gender O D Row Regions oriented by row contain question s that are positioned on the form in rows it can be one row or several rows Examples Excellent Good Fair Poor Question 1 O O O O Question 2 O O O O Question 2 O O O O What is your age group 18 24 25 34 35 44 45 54 55 64 65 O O O O O O 6 2 6 Defining the OMR Region Once you have inserted an OMR region the Properties OMR Region window appears The following table contains a brief summary of the OMR region properties Property Function Region name A name assigned to an OMR region Region names are used as grid column headers in the data grid window and are exported when saving data to common file formats Region names are limited to 60 characters Property OMR type Using the Template Editor Function The type of OMR region being described Region types include Multiple indicates a region containing multiple choice questions Grid indicates a grid or matrix of marks bubble checkbox that equates to a single piece of data e g student ID number List indicates a region where each mark is assigned a unique output value but the marks are not contained in a single row or column e g a list of answer choices Add indicates a region where the values for each of the answers that are filled by the respondent are added together to produce a single value for numeric data or co
342. s Delimited barcodes contain multiple items within a single barcode When set up in the Template Editor you can tell the software which part of the barcode to use as the Form Page or Respondent Identifier Note It is strongly recommended that you read Section 6 3 3 Tracking for detailed information on setting up Form ID Page ID and Respondent Tracker regions in a form template before you begin processing forms using Tracker regions 7 9 1 Auto Form ID Remark Office OMR provides an Auto Form ID option for automatically matching a form with its corresponding form template This type of form recognition allows you to process many different form types without pre sorting the forms Note You cannot use the Collate Mode option with Auto Form ID If you wish to process double sided forms using Auto Form ID you need to use a duplex scanner Each form type you want to use with Auto Form ID must contain an ID region on every form template page The ID region can be an OMR OCR or Barcode region Note For backwards compatibility forms with an ID region on the first page only still work in Auto Form ID mode when using Auto Form ID by itself If you wish to use Auto Page ID or Respondent Tracker in conjunction with Auto Form ID you must have identifying regions on every page of the form To use Auto Form ID 1 Outside of Remark Office OMR create a form that contains a unique identifier on each page that can be captured as an OMR OCR or Ba
343. s in your Windows directory 4103 Could not open the specified TWAIN source Make sure that the scanner and scanner driver are installed correctly 4104 4105 The specified source scanner is not compatible with Remark Office OMR The scanner and Remark Office OMR are not compatible 4106 Error transferring the image file to Remark Office OMR Check to make sure there is enough memory and disk space on your computer 4107 The specified source scanner is not compatible with Remark The scanner is not capable of providing data to Remark in the appropriate format 4108 The TWAIN source scanner returned an invalid image size height or width set to zero Reset the scanner s image size information on the scanner s TWAIN interface Tools Scanner Properties Show TWAIN Interface Class Category Error 4109 Understanding Error Messages Error Text Remark Office OMR and the TWAIN source have fallen out of sync Close Remark Office OMR reset the power on the scanner and retry 4110 The TWAIN source did not close correctly Reset the power on the scanner and check to make sure your scanner is installed properly 4111 4112 The TWAIN32 DLL file could not be found Make sure that the file TWAIN32 DLL is located in your Windows directory 4113 The specified TWAIN source scanner could not be enabled Not all TWAIN drivers allow showing hiding of their TWAIN Interfac
344. s image files using the MFP s scanning software Most MFPs can save images as TIF or PDF files Remark Office OMR can then read those image files Remark Office OMR users commonly scan the forms as TIF image files and save them on a network drive Then they go to the computer where Remark Office OMR is installed and read the images from the network drive If you are using a networked MFP you can determine the workflow that works best for you and your organization Tip If you have the choice of TIF or PDF images choose TIF PDF files are not native image files and require more processing by Remark Office OMR The result is that the scanning process is slower TIF Group IV images are the most compressed for smaller file sizes and faster processing Some network MFPs offer a network TWAIN driver that allows you to control the MFP from the computer running Remark Office OMR Depending on the quality of the network TWAIN driver you may be able to utilize it within Remark Office OMR When using an MFP that has a network TWAIN driver you scan documents just as you would with any desktop scanner See previous sections of this chapter for information about scanning with a TWAIN driver 41 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 42 Designing Scannable Forms Chapter 5 5 1 Overview Remark Office OMR provides a flexible solution for scanning forms you create and producing data and reports Because there is so much flexibility a wide variety of fo
345. s link allows you to view the forms on screen as you click through the data grid making it easy to correct exceptions in your data Therefore you should plan ahead on how you will store these images when the forms are processed Tip If you are sharing files with other Remark Office OMR users you may wish to save the image files on a shared network drive that all users have access to in the same manner e g through a mapped network drive Mark the checkbox for Save images in a subfolder based on the form template s name to have the Data Center automatically create a folder in which to store these images The folder name is the name of the form template and the folder is created in the directory you have selected in the Image target directory box 119 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 120 Tip We recommend using the Save images in a subfolder based on the form template s name feature for easier organization of image files Use of this feature keeps all images associated with each form template in one folder for easy access The unique date and time portion of the image names prevents images from being overwritten 10 OPTIONAL If desired click the Name Builder button to further customize the stored image names and locations e Inthe Image Base Name area you may choose to add a region from the processed data to the image base name Choose the region from the drop down list and Name Builder Name Builder th
346. save the changes and return to the tree view To set multiple response settings 1 2 3 Create a region as defined in Section 6 2 4 From the Properties window click the Region item properties link in the left Task Pane In the Multiple Exception Handling section select the number of responses allowed in the Multiple responses drop down list Select Not Allowed to only allow a single response Select Allow All to allow an unlimited number of responses Alternatively select a specific number from the list to only allow that number of responses If the respondent chooses more than you allow their responses are colored green as an exception ALL setting or replaced by the value you designate in the Replace with box The final option is Select most filled Selecting this option forces Remark Office OMR to select the mark it thinks is the most filled when more than one mark is detected Tip Use extreme caution when using the Select most filled option Using this option means that Remark Office OMR never returns a MULT for you to review The software always chooses what it thinks is the most filled mark In the Replace with box choose a value from the drop down list or enter a unique replacement of your own Pre set choices include ALL MULT Asterisk Nothing Space Character and Tilde If you choose the ALL option this is the default setting all chosen responses are displayed in the data grid but it is still
347. settings apply to your next Read Lape g le operation and stay in place until you change them again 169 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 7 15 Recognition Tools 170 When form recognition errors occur Remark Office OMR offers tools to help you diagnose and troubleshoot why the errors are occurring The Recognition Tools feature allows you to view form template region offset giving you an opportunity to reset your form template to the processed image on the fly and re recognize the form You can also save revised form templates as new form template files This feature is useful for example if you receive forms from various sources and they are all offset from the original used to create the form template Instead of resetting the form template for every batch you can reset it to the batch in the Data Center Another example where this feature is useful is if you photocopy forms Suppose you run out of forms and photocopy more forms from a photocopy It is very likely that the new batch will be offset compared to the old batch Using the Recognition Tools you can reset the form template to the new batch on the fly The Image Viewer is required to use the Recognition Tools feature If the Image Viewer is not visible click View Image Viewer to turn it on You may also find it helpful to close the Graph Viewer when using the Recognition Tools so that you have more room for the Image Viewer The Recognition Tools feature can only be use
348. sing Review Exceptions ccccceeeeeee eset eee eeeneeeeeeenaes 132 7 6 2 a Using the Review Exceptions Window 135 7 7 Using Collate Mode Scanning Double Sided Forms with a Single Side Only SCANNER ences kid ETE AEE E ENE tae dives bedawevaiee du vars Youn tears 136 7 8 Overwriting Data RecordS cece cece eee eee e eee etna teens eee neta ees 138 7 9 Using Form Page and Respondent Detection cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 139 7291 Auto Form ID ca eacna cles tert ee aan Made eae 139 F292 Auto Page ID vrier du cowie anced edaald ia Geleedeaeaes ndebarnanebeeds 140 7 9 3 Respondent Tracker ssssssssrssssessensessernorrorrnerrerreneen 141 7 9 4 Reviewing Unrecognized IMaQES ceeeeeeee eee e neta ees 143 7 9 5 Using the Unrecognized Image Utility c eee 144 7 9 5 a Reviewing Unrecognized Auto Form ID Images145 7 9 5 b Reviewing Unrecognized Page ID images 146 7 9 5 c Reviewing Unrecognized Respondent Tracker Images eat tie red E call creas videos te ate vey eevee eee mile an bales 147 Z 10 Batch PFOCESSING cocceecic oiesaaeconeciesaanedegerecneneneed a aledaneaders 149 7 14 Server Mode wie vies coiewces kania aa eet Wi evs envied devia ci aria RATAA ANAE oe 150 7 12 Respondent Detection ssssssrssrrerresressssnsensensernerrorreerenrrenean 157 Contents 7 13 Reviewing Duplicate RESPONSES ceccceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneees 158 7 14 Software Recognition SettingS ece
349. sired folder location using the Look in drop down box Lookin vata Jeoamitmn 4 Entera file name in the File name box If choosing a database format also enter a Table Name 5 Choose the file format in the Save as type ue Filename MyData 6 Click the OK button Save as type Remark RMK 7 Next go to the File Name area of the window The name you set in the previous screen is listed as the file name You may modify it by typing in the box You may also use the drop down list to add a region from the processed data to the file base name Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button For example if RTE processing student test forms you could add a cote aeaaat oc aeeaneane S O student name region that is being collected s from the form so that your data file name includes the name of each student each time the student name changes a new data file is created 8 Inthe Folder Name area you may choose to add a region from the processed data to the folder structure that holds the data file Choose Working with Your Data the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button Continuing with our example if processing student test forms you could add a teacher name or ID region that is being collected from the form so that your folder names include teacher identifiers Each student s data from the data set would be stored in a separate folder based on teacher name
350. sk Pane Task Pane Displays the Task Pane in the left side of the Data Center which provides shortcuts to frequently used functions e g open save etc The Task Pane updates with appropriate tasks as you perform certain functions in the software Recognition Displays the current recognition settings in the Task Settings Pane Flag Legend Displays the legend explaining each type of exception flag and its associated flag color Freeze Rows Freezes grid row s so that if you scroll in the data grid the frozen rows still appear Unfreeze Unfreezes any row s to which you applied the Freeze Rows Rows property Freeze Freezes the grid column s so that if you scroll in the Columns data grid the frozen columns still appear Unfreeze Unfreezes any column s to which you applied the Freeze Columns Columns property Theme Allows you to choose a theme for the software which 3 5 4 Tools Menu defines colors fonts title bars etc You may also choose whether to display large or small icons on the toolbar The items available in the Tools menu are the primary Remark Office OMR operations These items vary slightly from the Template Editor to the Data Center Template Editor Tool Menu Pull Down Item Navigating Remark Office OMR Function Reset Images Reset Resets the open form template s images This feature Images allows you to reacquire images from the scanner or Ctrl R im
351. sment DAT CCI Assessment format existing files may only be overwritten there are no append options XML XML Extensible Markup Language format HTML HTM Hypertext Markup Language ODBC g Open Database Connectivity Custom ASC TXT Custom Text format Database Update XLS XLSX Updates an existing database with new data e g MDB adds missing information overwrites existing ACCDB information ODBC Database Update To save grid data x x Updates an existing ODBC database with new data e g adds missing information overwrites existing information Before saving data to another data format we suggest saving a copy of the data to the Remark RMK format to preserve exception colors and links to stored images Once your project is complete you may delete or archive the RMK file or save all of your files to the Remark Office Archive ROA format 183 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 184 When exporting to a specific format e g Access Excel etc make certain your data meets the format s specific requirements see Start Programs Remark Office OMR 8 Documentation Remark Office OMR 8 Supported File Formats for more information 1 After processing forms select the File menu and then click Save Data or click Bj if saving the data set for the first time or to overwrite the data Click Save Data As to save the data with new parameters Note Clicking the toolbar button for Save Data overwrites the current dat
352. ssed an activation code will be sent back to you e Telephone You may also request an activation code by telephone Be prepared to read the Authorization Request Code you see in the Software Activation window when you call Important Note Automatic activation over the Internet is the fastest way to receive your activation code The manual options rely on processing from Gravic or our reseller based on operational hours 2 Once you receive your activation code click the Enter Activation Code button 3 Enter the Activation Code exactly as it was given to you You can use Ctrl V to paste the information from the Windows clipboard e g if you copied it out of an email message 4 Click the Activate button to activate your software This is a one time process so once the software is activated you do not have to go through this process again Once activated the software opens normally for use 2 5 2 Transferring a License The Gravic software license agreement states that any one copy of the software can only be installed on one computer If you need to transfer your software to another computer you may deactivate the license on one computer install the software on a different computer and then activate the software on the new computer Note that once a license is deactivated on a computer it cannot be activated on that computer again You need an active Internet connection to transfer a license Remark Office OMR User s Guide
353. ssociated Working with Your Data with this form template form template data and stored images We suggest putting them in a folder based on the form template name so that you can easily associate the files with the right form 5 Click the OK button once you have selected a folder The files are automatically be unzipped to the location specified The form template and data load normally into the data grid All associated image files are available so that you can click in a cell and view the corresponding image or use Review Exceptions to clean the data 8 6 3 Custom Format The Custom format allows you to create a customized text file This format is useful for exporting data into a database that has very specific requirements The format can also be used to break apart rows of data into multiple rows For example if you are processing an attendance sheet containing records for multiple students in a single row you can use the Custom format to separate the data into one record for each student Note When saving to an existing custom data file regions are not matched by region name instead they are matched by position in the data file Ensure that the data you are saving matches the existing custom wizard data file before appending new records The following table summarizes the screens and options that are found in the Custom Wizard and the corresponding descriptions of each option Custom Option Description Wizard S
354. t Questionmark QSF Perception Questionmark format save only SPSS SAV SPSS 16 format SPSS Legacy SAV SPSS 6 format Survey Pro SRV Survey Pro standard format Apian Software Survey Pro STL STL Survey Pro STL format Apian Software ASCII commas ASC Comma delimited ASCII ASCII tabs ASC Tab delimited ASCII Spreadsheet TXT Comma delimited ASCII with quotes around non commas numeric data Spreadsheet TXT Tab delimited ASCII with quotes around non tabs numeric data Working with Your Data File Format Extension Description Survey System DAT The Survey System format Creative Research Systems dBase V DBF dBase V format dBase IV DBF dBase IV format dBase III DBF dBase III format Paradox 5 X DB Paradox 5 X format existing files may only be overwritten there are no append options Paradox 4 X DB Paradox 4 X format existing files may only be overwritten there are no append options Paradox 3 X DB Paradox 3 X format existing files may only be overwritten there are no append options Lotus WK3 WK3 Lotus Works 3 format existing files may only be overwritten there are no append options Lotus WK1 WK1 Lotus Works 1 format Lotus 1 2 3 WKS Lotus 1 2 3 format LXR Test MRG LXR Test format Report RPT Fixed format ASCII cell text padded or truncated to specified record length Data Interchange DIF Standard format using file header and data section Format CCI Asses
355. t Tracker region the image is added to the Unrecognized Images queue If you have chosen to review unrecognized images during form processing the Unrecognized Image window appears for each unrecognized Respondent Tracker region If you have chosen not to review unrecognized images during form processing the images are stored in a queue so that you can process them all at once 147 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 148 Note If you are using the Review Exceptions feature to correct exception cases either during form processing or before reviewing unrecognized images it is possible to provide a valid respondent tracker value before the image is added to the Unrecognized Images queue Depending on the types of exceptions you are reviewing Review Exceptions may show you exceptions in your Respondent Tracker regions e g BLANK MULT etc Once corrected the software matches data records based on the Respondent Tracker region Exceptions that have not been corrected in Review Exceptions cause the image to be added to the Unrecognized Images queue To use the Unrecognized Image Utility for Respondent Tracker regions Follow the directions in Section 7 9 3 Respondent Tracker to begin form processing Optional If you are using the Auto Form ID feature when the Unrecognized Image Utility appears the Form Templates list may be empty if the form was not recognized If necessary click the drop down list to choose the correct form templat
356. tely Please choose a font and character set that is supported by the Optionally chosss amp custom fens and operating system and that displays appropriately within the software character set to use throughout the application Email Note Please restart the application to ensure all changes to font settings take effect Choose the desired email client and settings to use EF Change Log Optionally enable logging for all changes to the data Check for Updates Optionally check for software updates when starting the application Defaults OK Cancel Apply 10 5 Email Preferences Email preferences allow you to set your internal SMTP server or Outlook as your default email client This setting directly applies to the email option available from the File menu Section 8 8 which can use either your SMTP server or Microsoft Outlook When using Outlook Outlook opens with your file s as an attachment When using Default SMTP an internal email client opens that utilizes your SMTP server The Send Wizard Section 8 9 uses the SMTP server only If you set up your SMTP server settings in the Preferences they are available by default when using email with the Send Wizard SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol and is the Internet standard for transmitting email across networks It is likely your organization has a running SMTP server already set up You just need to find out general information about
357. the data grid if the linked mark is chosen so that you know which regions need attention for data entry This feature is especially helpful when used in conjunction with Review Exceptions OMR region Use this drop down list to select the region to which Data Entry Image to link the Image region when using the Link Region region only to an Existing OMR Region option Using the Template Editor Property Function Question Use this drop down list to select the individual Data Entry Image question within the OMR region to which to link the region only Image region Note that if the linked OMR region only contains one question you only see this question in the list Answer Use this drop down list to choose an answer response Data Entry Image Label from the linked question Alternatively you region only may type an answer choice in the box When this answer choice is detected during form processing the linked Image region s cell is colored blue in the data grid Target directory Click the ellipsis to select a location in which to store the Image Clips Name builder Click the Name Builder button to further customize the stored image clip names and locations In the Image Base Name area you may choose to add a region from the processed data to the image clip base name Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button For example if processing conference session evaluati
358. the FTP server The person responsible for your FTP server should be able to provide this information to you Select either Binary or ASCII As a guideline use ASCII only for plain text files and Binary for all other types The default value is Binary Select an action to perform if the uploaded file already exists on the FTP server You can choose to overwrite the existing file or choose not to upload the file at all Description You can choose to restrict the size of files are uploaded by the FTP service Any files that are placed in the Source Directory defined under the Basic tab that exceed this value in size is not uploaded to the FTP server 199 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Option Description File Lock Timeout When a file is copied or moved to the Source Directory defined under the Basic tab the actual copy or move operation takes time to perform on any operating system For very large files this time period can be several seconds or even minutes While this takes place the file cannot be uploaded with FTP since the file is incomplete in this folder until the copy or move operation has finished The FTP Service attempts to gain exclusive use locked use of the file before uploading it In this way the software can determine that a copy or move operation has finished and therefore that the file is complete and ready for upload Use this File Lock Timeout setting to control the time per
359. the number the closer the match must be Note Dropping out color is useful on forms where you have colored lines or shading near your marks Dropping out the color means that the color disappears as the form is scanned The marks bubbles checkboxes must not be the same color you are dropping out or they will drop out as well making the form unreadable Using drop out colors via the software works with any scanner that can scan in color If your scanner can also drop out colors we recommend using the scanner s color drop out by turning on the scanner s TWAIN interface for optimum performance Please note that dropping out color will likely slow down the scanning process 3 Place the blank page s to be scanned in the scanner You may scan pages one ata time or all of the form s pages at once 4 Click the Acquire Images from Scanner button to scan the page s The page s are scanned and then a thumbnail image of the form appears in the Image window If scanning multiple pages at once use the arrows under the image to view all scanned images You may also delete images by clicking the Delete icon 5 If you are satisfied with the image s click the OK button Otherwise click Acquire Images from Scanner again to rescan a page Make sure images do not look severely skewed if they are acquire the images from the scanner again Remark Office OMR opens a window with a tree view item list on the left and an image representation of
360. the server You will likely need to consult with your network email administrator to obtain information about your SMTP server Please use the following table as a guide to have your administrator provide the proper settings 219 Remark Office OMR User s Guide Application Preferences General Preferences Email Settings cereral Choose which email client to use For sending email messages Set the generic application preferences Email client Default v SMTP Server p File storage locations Set target file stoy SMTP Server 5 Aa Custom font Optionally choose SMTP Server character set to application Specify the settings needed to send messages through your SMTP server Email Choose the desire SMTP Settings to use SMTP Server EF change Loa Specify the following settings to allow emails to be sent through your SMTP server Optionally enable the data SMTP server mail example com Check for U kd aiea SMTP port 25 FEI Enable a secured SSL connection Optionally check starting the appliq IT Use the default credentials of the currently logged in user amp Username Password Throttle rate E milliseconds Option Description SMTP Server This is the name address or IP address of the mail server SMTP port The SMTP port is usually 25 but may vary with your email server Enable a If desired use a secure connection by marking the checkbox for secured Enable a secured SSL
361. the settings could vary Be sure to coordinate any changes you make to the recognition settings on the form template level with any other Remark users The Recognition Settings window has a Defaults button If you are in the global software defaults clicking the Defaults button returns the software to the original installation defaults If you have a form template open and are viewing the recognition settings for that form template clicking the Defaults button resets the settings to the global default settings Note The recognition settings are not a substitute for good form design and proper procedures for processing forms It is very important that you follow the form design guidelines in Chapter 5 when creating scannable forms as well as the best practices laid out in this user s guide e g creating a form template image from the same quality form you are distributing to respondents and maintaining scanner settings from the form template to the filled in forms These recognition settings are intended to supplement good form design and best practices 7 14 a Threshold Overrides There are three types of threshold overrides OMR Region Image Region and OCR Region Thresholds are used behind the scenes to define tolerance levels when determining if a mark is filled OMR regions text is recognizable OCR regions or if handwriting is present Image regions When setting thresholds in the Recognition Settings you are setting them globall
362. the template image you can move the regions to the appropriate place on the scanned image and have Remark re read the form You can even save the newly placed images as a new form template for future use Email An email option is available in the Remark Office OMR Data Center and Remark Quick Stats to email data and reports as attachments You can use Remark s built in email client in conjunction with your SMTP server or Microsoft Outlook Send Wizard A Send wizard was added to move files via FTP or email with minimal interaction You send data and reports from a folder on your computer or network to an FTP site or via email using your own SMTP server You can set up profiles to be reused as needed Remark Office OMR User s Guide e Microsoft Office 2010 Support The Access and Excel 2010 file formats are now supported anywhere database formats are supported e g database lookup saving data exporting report data e Save Data Builder You can now customize the data saving process by including a field from your data set in the file name For example if you are processing course evaluations and wanted the data file to be saved by instructor you could use the instructor field from the database as the base name e Delete Images after Renaming When using the Package and Rename feature in the Read Wizard you may now remove the original images that were processed if desired This leaves you with just the repackaged version of the
363. they are in the right position on the new image s You may move or delete regions as needed to line them up with the new image s You may also use the Auto Align feature to have the software automatically try to readjust the regions see the next section for further details 99 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 100 6 4 8 Auto Align The Auto Align feature attempts to adjust all regions on a page so that they are situated properly around the marks This feature is useful if you need to scan a new image for the form due to form changes or a badly skewed image It is also useful if you plan to share form templates with another user Form templates created with one scanner should be realigned to new images when a different scanner is used You can align one page or an entire form template To use auto align for one page 1 Select the page node you wish to align 2 Right click the page node select the Region menu or right click in a blank section of the image representation area 3 Choose Auto Align Page from the menu Note You can also select the page node and click the toolbar button for Auto Align Page To use Auto Align for the entire form template 1 Select the Tools menu and then click Auto Align Form Template Once you have aligned pages or the entire form template you should review the changes to make sure the regions are in the right position You may need to do some additional moving of regions 6 4 9
364. this same form template This feature can save time when saving future data sets 10 Click the OK button to save the changes 11 In the Save Data window click the OK button to save the data 185 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 186 8 6 2 Remark Office Archive Format The Remark Office Archive format saves the form template data file and stored images in one zipped file By having all items stored together the information becomes portable For example this feature is useful if you own and use multiple copies of the software One person can scan forms on one system and then save the data to the Remark Office Archive Format Another person can then open that Remark Office Archive file which provides the form template data file and stored images and run Review Exceptions to clean the data This process makes sharing the workload easier Caution Please read the Remark license agreement carefully before installing Remark Office OMR on multiple computers Licensing is computer based meaning that one copy of the software may only be installed on one computer To save data to the Remark Office Archive format 1 Select the File menu and then click Save Data As The Save Data window opens allowing you to choose a file name a file type and the directory in which you would like the file saved 2 Select the desired directory location using the Look in drop down box 3 Enter a name in the box titled File name 4 Select the Remark O
365. till appears as solid red double click inside the red box to display the Region Properties window 3 Ensure that the number of columns and rows specified match what has been captured in the region Make corrections if necessary and then click the OK button If neither of these solutions addresses the red region you may need to reacquire a cleaner image of your form or adjust your form design see Chapter 5 Designing Scannable Forms 6 2 9 Image Regions Image regions are used for areas on a form that contain handwritten text e g a person s name comments etc Remark Office OMR cannot read this type of information automatically but does provide you with three options for capturing this information as an Image region e Data Entry Image regions reserve space in the data grid for the manual insertion of text You can type the information contained in the Image region into the data grid using image assisted data entry typing while viewing the image on screen 70 Using the Template Editor You can also use default fill data such as a date to automatically populate the data set during form processing e Image Clip Image regions save a snapshot image of the particular region to a user specified location on your computer or network The location is displayed in the data grid as the forms are being scanned After collecting the Image region information you may optionally run a report in Remark Quick Stats to view the
366. tion 2 O O O O Question 3 O O O O 5 6 Grouping Questions Positioning all of the marks for the same question type in a single region area minimizes your efforts when you create form templates within the software Whenever possible try to place similar types of questions together For example place all true false questions in one area of the form and all multiple choice questions in another All marks you want to define in a single OMR region must align horizontally and vertically When possible place the labels for a group of questions on the top of each column or at the beginning of each row at least 3 8 inch away from the marks this allows you to select the entire group of questions within one region when you create a form template in the software If the labels are between marks you may have to select questions individually and or link marks together to form logical questions Example Original Layout Better Layout What is your gender What is your gender O Female O Male O Female O Male 5 7 Shading 46 Remark Office OMR works best with marks printed in black ink on white paper without shading While we do not recommend the use of shading in areas containing marks you can create shading that completely drops out when scanned a 5 10 gray typically works well A better alternative is to shade the questions but leave the area containing the marks white Designing Scannable Forms Note You cannot photocopy forms that
367. tion File an XML file extension Brame 23 To save the Send Wizard Configuration File a click the Yes button choose a location and D provide a file name Ensure that you remember reme where the files are stored so that you can RA locate them later 24 If you do not wish to save the Send Wizard MyNeivok Floren Configuration File click the No Once the wizard 2 EE closes the action is active Remark Office OMR looks in the directory ies specified for files and sends them to your designated recipients If any problems occur you are notified Otherwise the requested action is executed 8 10 Opening Data The Remark Office OMR Data Center can open data saved in dozens of different file formats We specifically designed the Remark file format to optimize the data storage process in the Remark Office OMR software The software is designed to work with data that is collected using a form template in Remark Office OMR Therefore you must first open a form template and then open the corresponding data file Once the data file is opened you can save it to another format or location or use Remark Quick Stats to analyze it Tip When working with data in Remark Office OMR use the Remark file format RMK This format saves the link to the image files and exception case colors Only save data to other formats when exporting The following table lists the different file formats the Data Center can open
368. tistics For example if your answer choices are Strongly Agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly Disagree NA if someone chooses NA you can have it not count in the statistics but still be able to see how many respondents chose the NA response Scaled Scores The Grade Wizard supports scaling a score whereby you look up grades in a table and then apply the scaled score from the external file You can define a default scaled score lookup for the overall test and for learning objectives Scaled scores can look up by either total score percent score or percentile The following grade reports support the scaled score Student Statistics Report Student Grade Report Comparative Grade Report Demographic Grade Report and Student Response Report Support for Multiple Versions of an Answer You can now enter various versions of an answer and have them all treated as the correct response For example if 25 and are both correct using the Grade Wizard you can instruct the software to allow either answer to be considered correct Turning Off Subjective Questions Using Easy Grade When using Easy Grade if a subjective question is left blank or contains non numeric data it is excluded from the grade operation marked as not graded not subjective Otherwise if the subjective question contains a numeric value that value is used as the total possible subjective points for the question Screen Captures You may now access a screen capture ut
369. ton to select a location in which to store the images for this form You may use the default directory for images or select a different directory on your computer external drive or network Note Choose the image location carefully The images should remain in this location once the data is saved using the RMK format if you want to retain the link between the processed data and each image file This link allows you to view the forms on screen as you click through the data grid making it easy to correct exceptions in your data Therefore you should plan ahead on how you will store these images when the forms are processed Tip If you are sharing files with other Remark Office OMR users you may wish to save the image files on a shared network drive that all users have access to in the same manner e g through a mapped network drive Mark the checkbox for Save images in a subfolder based on the form template s name to have the Data Center automatically create a folder in which to store these images The folder name is the name of the form template and the folder is created in the directory you have selected in the Image target directory box Tip We recommend using the Save images in a subfolder based on the form template s name feature for easier organization of image files Use of this feature keeps all images associated with each form template in one folder for easy access The unique date and time portion of the image names prevents
370. top 2 Use the Look in drop down list to locate files on your computer or network Select the correct form template file by clicking My Documents its name SZ 3 Click the Open button to open the form template and display the corresponding MyNewok Fienome Eram Answer Sheet on data grid window Files of type Supported Files Once the form template is open you may begin processing forms By default when you open a form template you see the data grid across the top of the screen and the Image Viewer and Graph Viewer at the bottom of the data grid The data grid is where you see the data as forms are processed The Image Viewer displays an image of the form as it is processed If you click within a data grid cell the Image Viewer moves to that place on the 116 Processing Forms corresponding image Note If you have the Zoom to Region on Selection toolbar button enabled e the Image Viewer also zooms in on the selected region The Graph Viewer graphs the tabulation of a single question as selected in a cell of the data grid 7 3 The Remark Office OMR Read Wizard Form processing is handled through the Remark Office OMR Read Wizard When reading forms in the Remark Office OMR Data Center you can have the software read pages directly from a scanner connected to the computer or from image files that you have previously created by scanning forms outside of the Remark software Before
371. tor use Copy Special to copy a region or regions to the clipboard Paste When copying and pasting between two instances of the Special Template Editor use Paste Special to paste a region or Ctrl U regions from the clipboard Note You must use Copy Special to copy this information to the clipboard A Delete Removes the highlighted information This operation does Delete not use the clipboard and Remark Office OMR retains no copy of the deleted information except by Undo Data Center Tool Menu Pull Function Down Item Je Cut Moves a section of text from one place to another or to ds Ctrl X another document by cutting it from the original position and pasting it in a new position paste is a separate command f j Copy Allows for easy duplication and movement of information Ctrl C You can copy a selected portion of text from one part of a data grid or a different document altogether and paste it in a different part of the data grid A Paste Whenever a section of text is copied or cut Remark Office Ctrl V OMR places the contents on the clipboard This intermediary holds the information so you can paste it multiple times if desired until you place something new on the clipboard by cutting or copying something else Data can be copied from a document of one program and pasted to a document of another as long as the data are compatible Paste Allows you to paste information
372. tore data text and list The cell type depends on the kind of region being used Each cell changes to either a text box or list box depending on its region type Grid Add and Binary OMR regions barcode regions OCR regions and Image regions without the use of Database Lookup or qualitative response coding are considered text regions You do not have a drop down box for these region types All other types of OMR regions and Image regions using qualitative response coding are considered list regions and do have a drop down box from which you can choose responses as they were defined in the form template labels To change the contents of a text cell 1 Select the cell by clicking within its borders 2 Type the desired cell contents into the cell and press Enter To change the contents of a list cell 1 Select the cell by clicking within its borders 2 Click the down arrow on the cell s list box 3 Click the correct response Note An asterisk appears next to selected responses 4 If more than one response is permitted repeat steps 2 and 3 to select more than one response Editing a cell removes any exception case colors that may have been present e g yellow for a BLANK response 8 3 3 Cutting Copying Pasting and Deleting The Remark Office OMR template grid supports normal Windows clipboard functions cut copy and paste In addition it supports the Paste Special command which allows you to copy the contents of one cell and th
373. ttings are broken into two parts Recognition and Image Pre processing The Recognition settings apply throughout the software whether you are reading forms directly from a scanner or reading pre processed image files The Image Pre processing settings only apply when reading pre scanned image files from a directory folder Recognition settings are stored in two places as global software defaults and with the form template to which they were applied Choose the link that best meets your needs If a specific form template is causing problems open it in the Data Center first then adjust only its recognition settings using either the Tools Recognition Settings Template Settings option or the Recognition Settings link within the Read Wizard If you wish to change recognition settings across the board for all new form templates use the Tools Recognition Settings Default Settings option When recognition settings are adjusted for a particular form template those settings override any global settings Global settings apply to any form templates that have never been Processing Forms used The first time you use the form template the global settings are in effect and remain in effect until you make changes while the form template is active Note The settings you apply to a form template are stored in each user s preferences file Therefore if you share form templates or have different users accessing the same form template on the same machine
374. uble arrow 3 Drag the border to the desired location 4 When finished release the mouse button 6 4 7 Resetting Form Template Images There may be times when your form template images no longer match your actual form For example suppose that you create a form and then decide to remove one of the questions from the form Or perhaps you create the form template from a printed version of the form and then decide to make photocopies for distribution which causes the entire form to be shifted In either case if you have already created your form template you can use the Reset Images feature to bring in new images with your existing form template without having to recreate the entire form template Tip If using the Reset Images feature you need to acquire images for all pages in the form template If you want to acquire individual form template pages double click the page node and then acquire the new image for that page To use Reset Images with a scanner Reset Images 1 Select the Tools menu and then click Reset Images or click deel 2 Inthe Select Method to Use for Image Acquisition section click the Read from scanner link option Note If you need to configure your scanner you may click the Scanner e Properties link just after Read from Saad RA E S OANE scanner to view the Scanner Properties ae window 3 Place the page s to be scanned in the scanner 4 Click the Acquire Images from Scanner butt
375. uded in your database This feature can be useful if you are saving to a database format that has specific requirements You can temporarily override the form template settings by using the advanced parameters The Advanced Save window also allows you to save either the scanned form image or path to the scanned form images to your data file Note Setting parameters in the Advanced Save window does not make any changes to the form template The following advanced features are available note that what is available depends on the file format selected Working with Your Data Option Description Include Mark this checkbox to include the region question in the data file Note that you may include the paths to the stored images of each processed form The last item s in the Name list is the form image s listed by page e g Page 1 Image Name Use this column to enter a new field name to be used in the exported data file if desired Changing the field name in this window does not affect the region s name in the form template Data Type Use this column to change the data type for this question Size Use this column to specify a field size for the data for this question Do not specify a size that is smaller than what is in your data To use advanced saving options 1 Select the File menu and then click Save Data As The Save Data window opens allowing you to choose a file name a file type the directory in whi
376. und non commas numeric data Spreadsheet TXT Tab delimited ASCII with quotes around non tabs numeric data dBase 5 0 DBF dBase 5 0 format dBase IV DBF dBase IV format dBase III DBF dBase III format Paradox 5 X DB Paradox 5 X format Paradox 4 X DB Paradox 4 X format Working with Your Data File Format Extension Description Paradox 3 X DB Paradox 3 X format Lotus WK4 WK4 Lotus Works 4 format open only Lotus WK3 WK3 Lotus Works 3 format Lotus WK1 WK1 Lotus Works 1 format Lotus 1 2 3 WKS Lotus 1 2 3 format LXR Test MRG LXR Test format Report RPT Fixed format ASCII cell text padded or truncated to specified record length Data Interchange DIF Standard format using file header and data section Format CCI Assessment DAT CCI Assessment format XML XML Extensible Markup Language format HTML HTM Hypertext Markup Language ODBC 7 Open Database Connectivity Custom ASC TXT Custom Text format To open grid data 1 Open the correct form template See Section 7 2 Opening a Form Template 2 Select the File menu and then click Open open Dat Data or click cad to display the Open Open Form Template Data window Alternatively use the Open Look ne Dae data file link from the Task Pane O Erone 3 Select a file from the list Use the Look in box to locate saved data files You may need to ej adjust the Files of type list to find the desired fil
377. update is available you are prompted to install it The Check for Updates window also has the ability to do an immediate check for updates To automatically check for updates Application Preferences Check for Updates 1 Select the Tools menu then click Preferences then Check for Updates 2 Mark the checkbox for Check for updates when starting to turn on the automatic check for updates 3 Optional If you would like to see if an o update is available immediately click the sworn Optionally check for software updates when icatior Check for Updates Now link aaa 4 Click the OK button to close the Preferences Check for Updates Now The next time the software is started it automatically checks for an update If an update is found and you would like to install it follow the on screen prompts You must have an Internet connection to download the update If no updates are available you receive a message indicating that your software is up to date The Remark Office OMR Automatic Update collects some system configuration data in order to provide you with updates that apply to your installation This information includes e Product Name e Remark Authentication Code e License Key e Software Version and Build Number e Remark Serial Number e System Finger Print same as activation Gravic Inc is committed to helping protect your privacy Using the automatic update feature does not collect your name address emai
378. use shading as the shading becomes too dark Use clean printouts for forms utilizing shading Example Excellent Good Fair Poor Text for Question 1 O O O O Text for Question 2 O O O O Text for Question 3 O O O O Text for Question 4 O O O O Text for Question 5 O O O O Always test your form with your scanner before printing large quantities Shading varies from printer to printer and scanner to scanner If your scanner supports color drop out you can shade questions using a pale shade of one of the colors your scanner drops out Note that this may slow down the scanning process and should be thoroughly tested before printing and distributing forms 5 8 Margins Margin space along the edges of a form is important We recommend leaving a one inch margin around all sides of the page At a minimum do not go below 12 inch margins The margin space allows some shifting in forms without having the marks fall off of the page when scanned The smaller the margin the less tolerance you have for inconsistencies from form to form 5 9 Barcodes Remark Office OMR can read many types of barcodes Barcodes can be used to capture a variety of information including but not limited to names ID numbers session class numbers other demographic information etc The software recognizes the following barcode types e Code 3 of 9 Code 39 Alphanumeric e Interleaved 2 of 5 Numeric e Codabar Numeric e PDF 417 2D Alphanumeric e Data Matrix 2D A
379. ve or the file is being used by another application 1300 File Access 1301 Error occurred while attempting to access a file Errors 1310 The file may be damaged Possible causes could be a full hard drive an inaccessible network drive or the file is being used by another application 229 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 230 Class Category Error Error Text 1400 File Close 1401 An error occurred while trying to close a file Check Errors 1403 the amount of free disk space Possible causes could be a full hard drive an inaccessible network drive or the file is being used by another application 1500 File 1501 An error occurred while trying to create a file Creation 1502 Check the amount of free disk space Possible Errors causes could be a full hard drive an inaccessible network drive or the file is being used by another application 1600 View 1600 Not enough memory or disk space available to Image 1610 perform the view image operation Free up more Errors memory by closing other applications or restarting Windows Ensure that your computer meets the minimum system requirements 1700 Miscellan 1700 A file cannot be accessed due to a bad name or eous File 1703 path Check that the file name is valid and that the Errors target directory can be accessed from your system 1704 A file has already been opened by Remark Office OMR or by some other application and cannot be opened again Close oth
380. w Sanae ese you browse to the file we send you and then iii dlalecmadaas OO a Application license key XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX click OK to recover your license J To recover the software icense by phone please call 1 610647 7650 B Click here to request recovery code via email et Enter Code 14 Installing and Activating Remark Office OMR In the case of a corrupt license you will receive a License Recovery error message Please contact Gravic technical support with the Application license key and Recovery request code that you see in the License Recovery error window We then provide you with a recovery code you can enter to restore your license Once the license is recovered you need to activate it again you are prompted by the software automatically 2 6 Registering the Software You can register your Remark Office OMR software from the Help menu within the software The Register Software link takes you to the Gravic website where you can fill out a short registration form We encourage you to register your software so that you receive important product updates To register your software 1 In the Remark Office OMR Data Center select the Help menu and then click Register Software You must have an active Internet connection 2 The registration page of the Gravic website appears in your default web browser 3 Fill in the fields requested and then click the Submit button 2 7 Updating the Software Remark Office OMR
381. well as the default region values to use when inserting Default region name Eormat delimiter Grid Asterisk Perform logging un and state restoration after unexpected termination Set default OMR region properties jettings gig mage regions C WINDOWS system32 Ga cation C Set default Image region properties Active dictionary Enolish det J ig Barcode regions Set default Barcode region properties gig OCR regions Set default OCR region properties 105 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 106 Section Option Description General Default region Enter a default region name to be used for Preferences name every new region created For example entering Q causes every region name to be called Q Remark Office OMR automatically appends numbers to the end of the region name so that your regions are called Q1 Q2 Q3 etc Format delimiter Specify the character to use for the Define Grid Format feature for Grid regions Define Format allows you to format the output of a Grid region e g put slashes in between numbers to produce a date The Format Delimiter is the character displayed in the region properties window when you use this feature The asterisk is the default delimiter Each asterisk represents a character in the region Perform logging Mark this checkbox to have Remark Office OMR store log files that can be recovered if the software terminates unexpectedly
382. x already exists 7401 An error occurred trying to create an index because the index definition is invalid 7402 An error occurred adding a record to the table or updating the table because the current record contains an invalid value in the region s defined as the primary key 7403 An error occurred making changes to the table because of a duplicate value in a field that is the underlying table s primary key or an index that doesn t allow duplicates The changes were unsuccessful Class Category Error 7404 Understanding Error Messages Error Text The operation you attempted requires a primary database index An index was not found The operation was unsuccessful Create a primary index for this database and then retry the operation 7405 An error occurred creating the index Possible causes the key fields are named improperly there are duplicate records based on this index or there were too many indexes already defined 7406 An error occurred deleting the index The current index cannot be deleted 7500 Database Registry Errors 7500 An error occurred initializing the database engine due to invalid initialization or registry settings or an engine conflict 7501 Unable to locate current record Move to or select another record and try the operation again 7502 You tried to use a Paradox table but the table s associated lock LCK file is outdated Delet
383. y choose to add a region from the processed data to the folder structure that holds the repackaged images Choose the region from the drop down list and then click the Add button For example if processing tests you could add teacher name and student ID fields that are being collected from the form so that each student s form images are stored in a folder containing the teacher s name and then a subfolder named by the student ID number o Inthe Name Builder box click the OK button to return to the Read Wizard e Inthe Saved image type box select an image type to use for storing the repackaged images The choices are PCX DCX PDF TIF or JPG For example you may be processing TIF images but want to repackage them as PDF files for others to view e When saving to the PDF or TIF formats you can choose the compression level under Image compression level Uncompressed Group 3 Group 3 2d Group 4 and LZW Group 4 creates the most compressed image smallest file size that takes up less space on your computer e Mark the checkbox for Save multiple page form templates as multiple page image files if you are processing a multi page form and would like all of the images for one complete form to be saved as one image file Using this option creates fewer image files and is recommended 14 If you would like to configure Review Exceptions options click the Next gt gt button to continue Otherwise click the Read button to begin processing
384. y meaning they override the form template settings for the same feature Threshold Overrides are off by default You should only change the threshold from the default setting if you encounter recognition problems as described in the next three paragraphs OMR Threshold The OMR Threshold is a value from 1 to 6 with 3 being the default Using a lower value makes the software more sensitive Lower values can be used to help pick up lighter markings e g pencil or when respondents do not fill a large portion of the mark Use caution as you go lower a value of 1 may cause erroneous marks such as erasures to be seen as filled marks Higher values for the Recognition Threshold can be used to make the software more discriminating when multiple marks are filled For example if two marks are filled and one is erased leaving some marking behind or one is partially filled a higher Recognition Threshold can help Remark Office OMR figure out which mark is filled Very high Recognition Thresholds cause the software to be quite discriminating meaning that it may choose a mark that is X d out as the most filled when that was not the intention of the respondent Note See Section 7 14 d for using large marks to correct marks that are accidentally selected Image Threshold The Image Threshold is a value from 1 to 6 with 3 being the default Using a lower value makes the software more sensitive Lower values can be used to help pick up lighter marki
385. y row or column depending on your selection in the Search by box Finished Ends Review Exceptions Cancel To replace an exception 1 Click the Response box down arrow if available to view a list of possible responses and then click the correct answer s or type the desired text into the Response box The down arrow is available for Multiple Boolean Rank and List OMR regions as well as Image regions that use Database Lookup or qualitative Cancels reviewing of the current page Upon canceling you have three options 1 Restore Original Data Cancels any changes made to this page during Review Exceptions and restores the original data 2 Discard Page Data Discards the current page s data all together You may rescan or re import an image file after discarding the data 3 Cancel Returns to Review Exceptions Remark Office OMR User s Guide response codes You may type the first few letters of a response and Remark Office OMR tries to auto fill the response for you For Grid Add and Binary OMR regions as well as Barcode OCR and any other data entry Image regions you may type the appropriate response Note The displayed exception text e g BLANK and color remain in the output data unless you replace it If you prefer to remove the color coding once an item has been reviewed but left unchanged go to Tools Preferences and mark the checkbox for Clear exceptions after they have been
386. y tracking regions that are not recognized are flagged for your review or placed in the Unrecognized Images queue See Section 7 9 for further details about processing forms using Respondent Tracker Tip If you want to be able to recognize various pages and respondents within different forms at the same time you may want to use the Auto Form ID and Page ID features as well as Respondent Tracker Use of all three features allows you to scan various form types without pre sorting and still keep pages and respondents together 6 3 4 Database Lookup Remark Office OMR has a Database Lookup feature that can 1 verify that recognized data from a region appear in an external database and 2 lookup and replace recognized data with additional fields from an external database To use this feature you link a region in the form template to an external database As each form is processed Remark Office OMR verifies that the recognized data appear in the selected database field If the data are not present Remark Office OMR flags the question as a Database Lookup error for correction Database Lookup can be used with OMR OCR Image and Barcode regions This feature is useful for validating names identification numbers zip codes etc It is also useful for pulling information you have already collected out of a database and inserting it into your processed form data When you set up a Database Lookup region you tell the software what field to validate
387. you do not have an Internet connection or do not wish to activate the software using the Internet click here Exit Application Software License e 1 The software license was activated successfully OK The About Remark Office OMR window displays This informational window remains for a few seconds while the program loads When complete the main Remark Office 12 Installing and Activating Remark Office OMR OMR window displays If you prefer to activate your software manually continue to the next section 2 5 1 a Manual Activation 1 If you do not have an Internet connection or do not wish to activate your software automatically click the link provided in the Activate Software window for manual activation You have three options for activation e Email You may click the hyperlink Click here to request an activation code via email to construct an email message that you can send to Gravic Once the email is received and processed Gravic or your reseller will send you an email with your activation code Note that you can also copy the information about your license Sas to the Windows clipboard If you use a web mail client you can then construct an email and paste the license information into the email for sending to support e Fax You may click the print hyperlink to generate an HTML document in which you can enter your contact information and then print and fax the document to Gravic or your reseller Once proce
388. your form on the right In this window you outline the areas to be recognized You may continue to Section 6 2 4 Creating Regions To create a form template image using an existing image file 1 In the Select Method to Use for Image Acquisition section select the Read from aa Use the acquire button to obtain the image file s you want to use for your Form template pages image files radio button 2 OPTIONAL If you are using drop out colors on your form choose the color you wish to drop out of the form Red Blue Green You may also select a Drop out threshold This threshold determines how close the color match must be in order for the color to drop out The higher the number the closer the match must be Note Dropping out color is useful on forms where you have colored lines or shading near your marks Dropping out the color means that the color disappears as the form is scanned The marks bubbles checkboxes must not be the same color you are dropping out or they will drop out as well making the form unreadable If your scanner can also drop out colors we recommend using the scanner s color drop out feature when you scan the forms so that when the images are read in Remark Office OMR the color is already gone 3 Click the Acquire Images from File button to select an image from file 55 Remark Office OMR User s Guide 56 4 Inthe Select Image File window use the Look in drop d

Remark Office OMR 8 User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents